43 TV 25 11

TrendManager Suite Software for
V5, X Series and GR Series Recorders
PC Application Software Configuration,

Analysis Tool plus Database Management
and Communications Server
43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK
Table of Contents
Table of Contents iii

NOTICE OF LICENSED SOFTWARE ................................................................. ix
Year 2000 Compliance Statement ............................................................... xvi
Chapter 1: Welcome to the

TrendManager Suite 1
Chapter 2: Introduction to the
TrendManager Software Suite 3
Introduction .................................................................................................... 3
Software Options ........................................................................................... 3
Chapter 3: Installation 7
Installation ..................................................................................................... 7
InstallationTrendManager Suite : ............................................................ 7
TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation ............................. 16
Migration ..................................................................................................... 21
Migration of TrendManager Suite : ....................................................... 21
Post migration checks for using Trend Server Pro: ............................................. 29
TrendManager Suite User Groups after Migration ............................... 30
Troubleshooting for TrendManager Suite Application: .............................. 33
Installation or Migration of TrendView Historian: .................................. 36
Security Configuration Utility ..................................................................... 38
Access OPC DA/HDA Server ..................................................................... 40
Firewall settings on Windows 7 ........................................................................... 41
Report Generation Tool ....................................................................................... 46
Trendview Historian ............................................................................................ 46
Start Up ................................................................................................................ 46
Help ..................................................................................................................... 46
System Requirements .................................................................................. 47
Chapter 4: Operation 55
Operation ..................................................................................................... 55
43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK iii

Chapter 5: Help in the
Help Files - TrendManager Suite .................................................................57
Context sensitive help files ...................................................................................57
How to do things ..................................................................................................57
Parts of the program ............................................................................................57
Technical papers ...................................................................................................57
Searching in Help .........................................................................................58
Find ......................................................................................................................58
Help Topics ...........................................................................................................58
Back ......................................................................................................................58
Print ......................................................................................................................58
Options .................................................................................................................58
Chapter 6: Recorder Configuration from

X Series and GR Recorders ..................................................................59
Recorder Setup .....................................................................................................59
Add New Device ...................................................................................................59
Setup Window ..............................................................................................63
General Setup .......................................................................................................63
Field IO ................................................................................................................72
Pens ......................................................................................................................84
Comms ..................................................................................................................93
Events/Counters .................................................................................................103
Counters ............................................................................................................. 113
Preset Markers ................................................................................................... 113
Time Sync ........................................................................................................... 114
Screen ................................................................................................................. 114
Recording tab ..................................................................................................... 116
Transfer ..............................................................................................................120
Hardware ............................................................................................................121
Reports ...............................................................................................................122
Recorder configuration complete .......................................................................125
Printing Setups ............................................................................................126
Honeywell V5 Recorders ...........................................................................137
Start here ............................................................................................................137
Hardware Configuration Wizard for the Minitrend V5 ......................................137
Hardware Configuration Wizard for the Multitrend Plus V5 .............................139
PCMCIA Interface Card ....................................................................................140
Hardware Configuration Wizard for the eZtrend V5 .........................................140
iv 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

Recorder Setup ........................................................................................... 141
General recorder setup ...................................................................................... 141
Communications tab .......................................................................................... 141
Pen related setups .............................................................................................. 142
Analogue Output Setup or Re-transmission ...................................................... 150
Digital input/output port setup .......................................................................... 150
Events System .................................................................................................... 150
Importing and Exporting of Set-ups .................................................................. 161
Hardware Related Set-ups ................................................................................. 161
Recorder configuration complete ...................................................................... 161
Printing Setups ........................................................................................... 161
Chapter 7: TrendManager Suite 167

Recorders ................................................................................................... 167
Add a recorder ................................................................................................... 167
Delete a recorder ............................................................................................... 167
Copy a recorder ................................................................................................. 168
Edit a recorder ................................................................................................... 168
Import data from a recorder .............................................................................. 168
Browse a recorder .............................................................................................. 168
Upload button .................................................................................................... 168
Recorder clash list ............................................................................................. 168
Databases ................................................................................................... 169
Add a Database ................................................................................................. 169
Change the current Database ............................................................................ 169
Add an Archive Database .................................................................................. 170
Server access table. ........................................................................................... 171
Folders ....................................................................................................... 172
Graph Folders ................................................................................................... 172
Add a folder ....................................................................................................... 172
Move a graph between folders ........................................................................... 172
Delete a folder ................................................................................................... 172
Copy a folder ..................................................................................................... 172
Rename a folder ................................................................................................. 172
Importing ................................................................................................... 173
Importing Data from other Honeywell devices .................................................. 174
Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface ................................. 175
From Network Setup .......................................................................................... 177
Batch set up ....................................................................................................... 178
Schedule Setup ................................................................................................... 178
Realtime Communications ......................................................................... 180
Communications Server ..................................................................................... 180
Communications Realtime Settings ................................................................... 181
Realtime Data Buffer ......................................................................................... 181
Realtime Comms logging ................................................................................... 181
Batch Mode ................................................................................................ 183
Recorder Event/Batch Viewer ............................................................................ 183
43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK v

Exporting data to a spreadsheet ..................................................................202
System status ..............................................................................................206
Password ............................................................................................................206
Status ..................................................................................................................206
E-Mail .................................................................................................................206
Realtime ..............................................................................................................206
Server ..........................................................................................................207
Archive Database Server ....................................................................................207
Add a Remote Server ..........................................................................................207
Delete a server ....................................................................................................207
Change the current Server ..................................................................................207
Passwords ...................................................................................................208
Password Control ...............................................................................................208
Change Password ...............................................................................................208
Password User Manager ....................................................................................208
Password access table ........................................................................................210
Audit Manager ....................................................................................................211
Trend Server Pro with OPC Server ............................................................213
OPC Server .........................................................................................................213
OPC Clients ........................................................................................................213
OPC Interface - Open Process Control .......................................................214
Web Browser ..............................................................................................215
Internet Security Settings ....................................................................................216
Chapter 8: Comms Server 217

Communications Server .............................................................................217
Comms Server Overview ....................................................................................217
Database Size Management ...............................................................................223
Comms Server Setup ...........................................................................................224
Comms Server Logging ......................................................................................229
Comms Server Database .............................................................................235
System Setup .......................................................................................................235
Shutdown Server .........................................................................................235
Chapter 9: Graphing in the

Graphing .....................................................................................................237
Graph list ............................................................................................................237
Add New Graph ..................................................................................................237
Graph a recorder ................................................................................................238
Traces on graphs ................................................................................................238
Copy a graph ......................................................................................................238
Graph with Events ..............................................................................................238
Graph a Batch ....................................................................................................238
Save a Graph ......................................................................................................238
Rename a graph ..................................................................................................238
Delete a graph ....................................................................................................238
vi 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

Data Locator .............................................................................................. 239
Adding historical data to a realtime graph ........................................................ 239
Graph display features ....................................................................................... 240
Graphing different types of scale data ....................................................... 241
Time adjustment pen .......................................................................................... 241
Pre-Trigger Data ................................................................................................ 242
Zooming ..................................................................................................... 243
Y-axis zooming ................................................................................................... 243
X-axis zooming ................................................................................................... 243
Point markers ..................................................................................................... 243
Pen Scales .................................................................................................. 244
Arranging Scales ................................................................................................ 245
Resizing scale panels ......................................................................................... 245
Graph Set Time Span ......................................................................................... 246
Graphing Events ........................................................................................ 247
Explaining an Events Graph .............................................................................. 249
Events Filter ....................................................................................................... 250
Add User Text Event ........................................................................................... 250
Graphing a Batch ............................................................................................... 250
Retrospectively Graphing a Batch ..................................................................... 253
Realtime Graphing ..................................................................................... 254
Graphing Realtime Data .................................................................................... 255
Pause button ...................................................................................................... 256
Realtime graphing across Time Zones ............................................................... 256
Graph Pen Data Source Viewer ................................................................. 257
Graph Data Viewer .................................................................................... 257
Printing graphs ........................................................................................... 259
Chapter 10: TrendView Historian Server Client Software 261

Software License Agreement .............................................................................. 261
TrendView Historian Support Information ........................................................ 261
TrendView Historian Installation ....................................................................... 262
OPC Client Access to TrendView OPC Historian Server .................................. 263
Retrieving Data from TrendView Historian Server ............................................ 264
Retrieving Aggregate values. ............................................................................. 277
Chapter 11: Glossary 283

Explanation of terms relating to the TrendManager Suite. ......... 283
Appendix A - Maths Expressions for

Honeywell V5 recorders 287
Operator Precedence ......................................................................................... 292
Constants ........................................................................................................... 294
Boolean Expressions .......................................................................................... 294
Maths and Fail Safe ........................................................................................... 294
43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK vii

Appendix B - Maths Expressions for
X & GR Series Recorders 295
Full Maths & Script Processing ..................................................................295
Maths Variable and Function Tables ..................................................................296
Full Maths ..........................................................................................................304
Script Function Application Examples ...............................................................305
Maths Error Messages .......................................................................................309
Appendix C- Fuzzy Logging 311
Appendix D - Events 315

Cause and Effect ................................................................................................315
Cause and Effect - X and GR Series ...................................................................317
Appendix E - Ethernet & E-mail 319

Ethernet .......................................................................................................319
E-mail .........................................................................................................320
General operation of the e-mail system .............................................................320
Appendix F: Function Codes and Memory Maps 321

X & GR Series Modbus Memory Map Supplement: .................................321
Totalisers ............................................................................................................321
Input Text message .............................................................................................321
Analogue Input Value .........................................................................................322
Communications Input .......................................................................................322
Pen Values ..........................................................................................................322
Modbus Function Codes .............................................................................322
Appendix G - Modbus Communications and Modbus Profile Tool 325

TrendManager Suite and Modbus communications ...................................325
The Modbus Profile Tool ............................................................................326
Installation .........................................................................................................326
Getting started ....................................................................................................327
Transferring Modbus profiles between systems .........................................332
Comms Server and Modbus profile(s) ................................................................333
Appendix H - IQOQ Protocol Document 339

IQOQ Protocol Document ..........................................................................339
Index 345
viii 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

NOTICE OF LICENSED SOFTWARE
HONEYWELL END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

This End User License Agreement (“Agreement”) is a legal contract between Honeywell Inter-
national Inc., acting through its Honeywell Process Solutions business, having an office at
1860 West Rose Garden Lane, Phoenix, AZ 85027-5139 (“Honeywell”), and Licensee. The
right to use the Licensed Software is granted only on the condition that Licensee agrees to the
following terms. IF LICENSEE DOES NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT,
THEN HONEYWELL AND ITS LICENSORS ARE UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE LICENSED
SOFTWARE TO LICENSEE, IN WHICH CASE LICENSEE MAY RETURN THE PACKAGE
WITHIN THIRTY (30) DAYS AFTER SHIPMENT TO THE ENTITY FROM WHICH THE
LICENSE WAS PURCHASED, AND THE AMOUNT LICENSEE PAID FOR THE LICENSED
SOFTWARE WILL BE REFUNDED.
1. DEFINITIONS.
1.1“Authorized User” means an individual Licensee employee or independent contractor
authorized by Licensee to access and use the Software provided
by Honeywell, subject to the terms of this Agreement.
1.2“Confidential Information” means: (i) the Licensed Software; (ii) the technology, ideas,
know how, documentation, processes, algorithms and trade secrets embodied in the
Licensed Software; (iii) any software keys related to the Software; and (iv) any other infor-
mation, whether disclosed orally or in written or magnetic media, that is identified (if oral) or
marked (if written) as “confidential,” “proprietary” or with a similar designation at the time of
such disclosure. Confidential Information shall not include any information that is: (a) pub-
lished or otherwise available to the public other than by breach of this Agreement by Licen-
see; (b) rightfully received by Licensee from a third party without confidential limitations; (c)
independently developed by Licensee as evidenced by appropriate records; or (d) known to
Licensee prior to its first receipt of same from Honeywell as evidenced by appropriate
records. If any Confidential Information must be disclosed to any third party by reason of
legal, accounting or regulatory requirements beyond the reasonable control of Licensee,
Licensee shall promptly notify Honeywell of the order or request and permit Honeywell (at
its own expense) to seek an appropriate protective order.
1.3 “Documentation” shall mean Honeywell published user documentation for the
Licensed Software, which may be in the form of user manuals and/or other related docu-
mentation, in written or electronic object code form.
1.4 “Intellectual Property Rights” means all copyrights, trademarks, trade secrets, pat-
ents, mask works and other intellectual property rights recognized in any jurisdiction world-
wide, including all applications and registrations with respect thereto.
1.5“Licensee” means the entity that purchased the license to the Licensed Software solely
for use of the Licensed Software at the Licensed Site.
1.6“Licensed Processor” means a Honeywell-approved processor (which may be a con-
trol system or product, a computer, or a specific number of computing devices in a network
environment), which processor is owned, leased, or otherwise controlled by Licensee and
on which Licensee is authorized to install and use the Software pursuant to the terms and
conditions of this Agreement.
1.7 “Licensed Site” means the specific address of Licensee’s facility where the Licensed
Processor is located, as specified in Licensee’s Purchase Order.
43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK ix

1.8 “Licensed Software” means the Object Code of the Software identified in Licensee’s
Purchase Order and/or for which Licensee has purchased a license under this Agreement,
including all updates, revisions, modifications, or changes thereto to the extent licensed by
Licensee under this Agreement, and all full or partial copies thereof.
1.9 “Licensed Use” means use of the Object Code form only of Licensed Software by the
Authorized Users.
1.10 “Object Code” means computer programming code in a form not readily perceiva-
ble by humans and suitable for machine execution without the intervening steps of interpre-
tation or compilation.
1.11 “Purchase Order” means an order form submitted by Licensee to obtain rights to
use Licensed Software under this Agreement.
1.12 Software” means computer programming code, in Object Code and/or Source
Code, and Documentation, in written or electronic form, including updates (if any), and all
modifications thereto and full or partial copies thereof. For the avoidance of doubt, Software
may include Licensed Software and Unlicensed Software.
1.13 “Source Code” means computer programming code in human readable form that is
not suitable for machine execution without the intervening steps of interpretation or compila-
tion.
1.14 “Unlicensed Software” means Software that may be included on electronic storage
media containing the Licensed Software provided by Honeywell that Licensee is not author-
ized to access or use under this Agreement.
2. LICENSE GRANT. Subject to Licensee’s compliance with the terms and conditions of this
Agreement and payment of any applicable fees, Honeywell hereby grants to Licensee and
Licensee accepts a restricted, personal, non-transferable, non-exclusive, internal-use only
license, without the right to sublicense, to: (i) use Licensed Software, solely for Licensee’s
internal purposes in accordance with the Licensed Use, on Licensed Processor(s), at the
Licensed Site; and (ii) make up to two (2) copies (or the number of copies allowed under
applicable law) of the Licensed Software in non-printed, machine-readable form, to be used
solely for archival or backup purposes (“Archival Copies”). Licensee shall include all copyright
and trade secret notices and serial numbers on the Archival Copies, which shall be owned
solely by Honeywell or its third-party suppliers.
3. RESTRICTIONS.
3.1 General. Except as expressly permitted by this Agreement, Licensee may not: (i)
modify the Licensed Software; (ii) translate, reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble
(except to the extent applicable laws specifically prohibit such restriction) or attempt to
derive the Source Code of Software provided to Licensee in Object Code, or create deriva-
tive works of the Licensed Software or let any third party do any of the foregoing; (iii) repro-
duce the Licensed Software other than as specified above; (iv) sublicense, rent, lease, loan,
timeshare, sell, distribute, disclose, publish, assign or transfer any rights, grant a security
interest in, transfer possession of the Licensed Software or electronically transfer the
Licensed Software from one computer to another over a network other than Licensee’s inter-
nal network as permitted under this Agreement; or (v) alter or remove any of Honeywell or
its licensors’ copyright or proprietary rights notices or legends appearing on or in the
Licensed Software. Licensee shall reproduce such notices on any copies of the Licensed
Software Licensee is permitted to make. Licensee is responsible for informing all Authorized
Users of the restrictions set forth in this Agreement with respect to use of the Licensed Soft-
ware.
x 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

3.2 Keys and Access. Honeywell agrees to provide to Licensee any Software keys
necessary to permit Licensee to gain access to the Licensed Software contained on the
media shipped to Licensee. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary in this Agreement,
Licensee hereby acknowledges that Licensee shall have no right or license to any Unli-
censed Software, that any Unlicensed Software is included therein solely as a matter of
administrative convenience, and Licensee further agrees not to attempt to gain access to, or
permit any third party to attempt to gain access to, such Unlicensed Software. Licensee shall
not disclose the Software keys to any third party. Licensee shall not circumvent, or attempt to
circumvent, any license management, security devices, access logs, or other measures pro-
vided in connection with the Licensed Software, or permit or assist any Authorized User or
any third party to do the same.
3.3 Third Party Software. The Licensed Software may contain or be derived from
materials of third party licensors. Such third party materials may be subject to restrictions in
addition to those listed in this Section 3.0, which restrictions, if any, are included in the docu-
ments accompanying such third party software.
4. OWNERSHIP. Honeywell and its licensors shall retain exclusive ownership of all worldwide
Intellectual Property Rights in and to the Licensed Software. Licensee hereby assigns to Hon-
eywell any such rights Licensee may have or obtain in and to the foregoing. All rights in and to
the Licensed Software not expressly granted to Licensee in this Agreement are expressly
reserved for Honeywell and its licensors.
5. CONFIDENTIAL INFORMATION. Licensee shall not use or disclose any Confidential Infor-
mation, except as expressly authorized by this Agreement, and shall protect all such Confi-
dential Information using the same degree of care which Licensee uses with respect to its
own proprietary information, but in no event with safeguards less than a reasonably prudent
business would exercise under similar circumstances. Licensee shall take prompt and appro-
priate action to prevent unauthorized use or disclosure of the Confidential Information.
6. TERM AND TERMINATION. This Agreement shall continue for so long as Licensee uses the
Licensed Software, provided that this Agreement will immediately terminate upon Licensee’s
entry into bankruptcy, receivership, insolvency or dissolution proceedings; or upon Licensee’s
breach of this Agreement, unless Licensee cures such breach within ten (10) days after Hon-
eywell provides written notice of such breach. Upon termination, Licensee agrees: (i) not to
use the Licensed Software for any purpose whatsoever; (ii) to return or destroy the Licensed
Software and any copy then in Licensee’s possession, at the direction of Honeywell; and (iii)
to certify to Honeywell that such destruction has taken place. Upon termination Honeywell may
repossess all copies of the Licensed Software then in Licensee’s possession or control.
These remedies shall be cumulative and in addition to any other remedies available to Honey-
well. The following Sections shall survive any termination of this Agreement: Sections 1, 3.1,
3.3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9.2, 10, 11, and 12.
7. SUPPORT. The Software license fees do not include support, installation or training. Support,
installation and training services, to the extent offered by Honeywell, may be separately pur-
chased at Honeywell then-current rates.
43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK xi

8. LICENSEE OBLIGATIONS.
8.1 Records. Licensee shall maintain complete, current and accurate records docu-
menting the location of the Licensed Software (in all forms) in Licensee’s possession.
8.2 Compliance Verification. To ensure compliance with the terms of this Agreement,
Honeywell or its designated representative shall have the right to: (i) request that Licensee
send a written certification of compliance with the terms and conditions of this Agreement
within thirty (30) days of Honeywell’s request; and (ii) conduct an inspection and audit upon
reasonable notice of the records set forth in Section 8.1 of this Agreement, electronic logs of
access to the Software, and the relevant books and records of Licensee, and to obtain true
and correct photocopies thereof, during regular business hours at Licensee’s offices and in
such a manner as not to interfere unreasonably with Licensee’s normal business activities.
In no event shall such certifications be requested or audits be conducted hereunder more
frequently than once every six (6) months. If any such audit should disclose any underpay-
ment of fees, Licensee shall promptly pay Honeywell such underpaid amount, together with
interest thereon at a rate of one and one-half percent (1.5%) per month or partial month dur-
ing which such amount was owed and unpaid, or the highest rate allowed by law, from the
date such amount originally became due until finally paid. If the audit reveals that Licensee
has underpaid Honeywell by five percent (5%) or more of the amount owed, Licensee shall
immediately reimburse Honeywell for its reasonable costs and expenses associated with
such audit.
9. LIMITED WARRANTY; WARRANTY DISCLAIMER.

9.1 Limited Warranty. If the license to the Licensed Software was purchased from a
party other than Honeywell. Honeywell disclaims all warranties for the Licensed Software
(as further described in Section 9.2) and the warranty, if any, shall be provided solely by the
party from which the license was purchased. If the license to the Licensed Software was pur-
chased directly from Honeywell, Honeywell warrants that the media on which the Licensed
Software is delivered will be free from defects in materials or workmanship for a period of
ninety (90) days from the date of shipment of such media to Licensee (“Warranty Period”). If
during the Warranty Period the media on which Licensed Software is delivered proves to be
defective, Honeywell will repair or replace such media, at Honeywell’s option, as Licen-
see’s sole remedy for any breach of warranty hereunder. Licensee assumes full responsibil-
ity for: (i) the selection of the Licensed Software; (ii) the proper installation and use of the
Licensed Software; (iii) verifying the results obtained from the use of the Licensed Software;
and (iv) taking appropriate measures to prevent loss of data. Honeywell does not warrant
that the quality or performance of the Licensed Software will meet Licensee’s requirements
or that Licensee will be able to achieve any particular results from use or modification of the
Licensed Software or that the Licensed Software will operate free from error.
9.2 Warranty Disclaimer. EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY SET FORTH IN THIS SECTION 9,
HONEYWELL AND ITS LICENSORS DISCLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS, IMPLIED
AND STATUTORY INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NON-
INFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION
OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONEYWELL, ITS DEALERS, DISTRIBUTORS, AGENTS OR
EMPLOYEES SHALL IN ANY WAY INCREASE THE SCOPE OF THIS WARRANTY. Some
jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or how long an
implied warranty may last, so the above limitations may not apply to Licensee. This warranty
gives Licensee specific legal rights and Licensee may have other rights that vary from juris-
diction to jurisdiction.
xii 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

10. INFRINGEMENT INDEMNITY. Honeywell will defend any suit against Licensee to the extent
based on a claim that the Licensed Software as delivered by Honeywell infringes a valid
United States patent or copyright, and indemnify for any final judgment assessed against
Licensee resulting from such suit, provided that Licensee notifies Honeywell at such time as it
is apprised of the third-party claim, and agrees to give sole and complete authority, informa-
tion and assistance (at Honeywell’s expense) for the defence and disposition of the claim.
Honeywell will not be responsible for any compromise or settlement made without Honeywell’s
consent. The foregoing notwithstanding, Honeywell shall have no liability for any claim of
infringement based on: (a) use of other than the current release of the Licensed Software if
such claim would have been avoided by the use of the then-current release provided Honey-
well has announced the release prior to the initiation of the infringement claim; (b) any modifi-
cation of the Licensed Software by an entity other than Honeywell; (c) any use or combination
of the Licensed Software with any program, data or equipment not supplied by Honeywell; (d)
any use of the Licensed Software other than as expressly permitted in this Agreement; (e)
products or processes developed pursuant to Licensee’s direction, design, or specification; or
(f) any settlement or compromise of such claim made without Honeywell’s written consent.
Further, Licensee agrees to indemnify and defend Honeywell to the same extent and subject
to the same restrictions set forth in Honeywell’s obligations to Licensee as set forth in this
“Infringement Indemnity” section for any suit against Honeywell based upon a claim of
infringement resulting from (a), (b), (c), (d), (e), or (f) above. In the event that the Licensed
Software is held in any such suit to infringe such a right and its use is enjoined, or if in the
opinion of Honeywell the Licensed Software is likely to become the subject of such a claim,
Honeywell at its own election and expense will either (i) procure for Licensee the right to con-
tinue using the Licensed Software or (ii) modify or replace the Licensed Software so that it
becomes non-infringing while giving substantially equivalent performance. In the event that (i)
or (ii) above are not, in Honeywell’s sole determination, obtainable using reasonable commer-
cial efforts, then Honeywell may terminate this Agreement and refund the amount Licensee
paid Honeywell under this Agreement for the Licensed Software which is the subject of such
claim, less a reasonable charge for Licensee’s past beneficial use based on depreciation of
the Licensed Software on a straight line basis over a period of five (5) years from the Effective
Date. THIS SECTION STATES LICENSEE’S SOLE RECOURSE AND EXCLUSIVE REM-
EDY AND HONEYWELL’S ENTIRE LIABILITY FOR ANY CLAIM OF INFRINGEMENT.
11. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY. HONEYWELL AND ITS LICENSORS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE
FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL OR INDIRECT DAMAGES OF ANY
KIND (INCLUDING DAMAGES FOR INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS, PROCUREMENT OF
SUBSTITUTE GOODS, LOSS OF PROFITS, OR THE LIKE) REGARDLESS OF THE FORM
OF ACTION WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE), STRICT
PRODUCT LIABILITY OR ANY OTHER LEGAL OR EQUITABLE THEORY EVEN IF HONEY-
WELL HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. IN NO EVENT
WILL HONEYWELL’S AGGREGATE CUMULATIVE LIABILITY FOR ANY CLAIMS ARISING
OUT OF OR RELATED TO THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE AMOUNTS PAID BY LICEN-
SEE FOR THE LICENSED SOFTWARE. THE LIMITED WARRANTY, LIMITED REMEDIES,
WARRANTY DISCLAIMER AND LIMITED LIABILITY ARE FUNDAMENTAL ELEMENTS OF
THE BASIS OF THE BARGAIN BETWEEN HONEYWELL AND LICENSEE. HONEYWELL
WOULD NOT BE ABLE TO PROVIDE THE SOFTWARE WITHOUT SUCH LIMITATIONS.
43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK xiii

12. GENERAL.
12.1 Governing Law and Forum. This Agreement shall be governed in all respects by
the laws of the United States of America and the State of New York without regard to con-
flicts of law principles. The parties agree that the United Nations Convention on Contracts for
the International Sale of Goods is specifically excluded from application to this Agreement.
All disputes arising under this Agreement shall be brought exclusively in the state or federal
courts in New York, New York, as permitted by law. Licensee consents to the personal juris-
diction of the above courts.
12.2 Injunctive Relief. It is understood and agreed that, notwithstanding any other provi-
sions of this Agreement, breach of the provisions of this Agreement by Licensee may cause
Honeywell irreparable damage for which recovery of money damages would be inadequate,
and that Honeywell shall therefore be entitled to obtain timely injunctive relief to protect
Honeywell’s rights under this Agreement in addition to any and all remedies available at
law.
12.3 Notices. All notices to Honeywell shall be in writing and shall be directed to:
Honeywell International Inc.
Honeywell Process Solutions
2500 West Union Hills Drive
Phoenix, AZ 85027-5139
Attn: General Counsel
12.4 No Agency. Nothing contained herein shall be construed as creating any agency,
employment relationship, partnership, principal-agent or other form of joint enterprise
between the parties.
12.5 Force Majeure. Neither party shall be liable hereunder by reason of any failure or
delay in the performance of its obligations hereunder (except for the payment of money) on
account of strikes, shortages, riots, insurrection, fires, flood, storm, explosions, acts of God,
war, governmental action, labour conditions, earthquakes, material shortages or any other
cause which is beyond the reasonable control of such party. Except for payment obliga-
tions, neither party will be liable to the other for any failure to meet its obligations due to any
cause beyond the non-performing party’s reasonable control. If the inability to perform con-
tinues for longer than 90 days, either party may terminate this Agreement by providing writ-
ten notice to the other party and Licensee will pay Honeywell for products delivered and
services performed prior to termination. Force majeure events may include but are not lim-
ited to: (1) government embargoes, (2) blockades, (3) seizure or freeze of assets, (4) delays
or refusals to grant an export license or the suspension or revocation thereof, (5) any other
acts of any government that would limit the ability for contract performance, (6) fires, earth-
quakes, floods, severe weather conditions, (7) any other acts of God, (8) quarantines or
regional medical crises, (9) labour strikes or lockouts, (10) riots, strife, insurrection, civil dis-
obedience, armed conflict, terrorism or war, declared or not (or impending threat of any of
the foregoing, if such threat might reasonably be expected to cause injury to people or prop-
erty), (11) shortages or inability to obtain materials or components and (12) inability or
refusal by Licensee’s directed third party suppliers to provide Honeywell parts, services,
manuals, or other information necessary to the goods or services to be provided by Honey-
well under this Agreement.
12.6 Waiver. The failure of either party to enforce at any time any of the provisions of
this agreement shall not be construed to be a continuing waiver of any provisions hereunder
nor shall any such failure prejudice the right of such party to take any action in the future to
enforce any provisions hereunder.
12.7 Severability. In the event any provision of this Agreement is determined to be ille-
gal, invalid, or unenforceable, the validity and enforceability of the remaining provisions of
this Agreement will not be affected and, in lieu of such illegal, invalid, or unenforceable pro-
vision, there will be added as part of this Agreement one or more provisions as similar in
terms as may be legal, valid and enforceable under applicable law.
xiv 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

12.8 Headings. The section headings appearing in this Agreement are inserted only as
a matter of convenience and in no way define, limit, construe, or describe the scope or
extent of such section or in any way affect this Agreement.
12.9 Government End Users. The Software is a “commercial item” as that term is
defined in 48 C.F.R. 2.101, consisting of “commercial computer software” and “commercial
computer software documentation” as such terms are used in 48 C.F.R. 12.212. Consistent
with 48 C.F.R. 12.212 and 48 C.F.R 227.7202-1 through 227.7202-4, Licensee will provide
the Software to U.S. Government End Users only pursuant to the terms and conditions
therein and herein.
12.10 Assignment. Licensee may not delegate, assign or transfer this Agreement, the
license(s) granted or any of Licensee’s rights or duties hereunder, including by way of
merger (regardless of whether Licensee is the surviving entity) or acquisition, and any
attempt to do so, without Honeywell’s express prior written consent, which shall not be
unreasonably withheld, shall be void. Honeywell may assign this Agreement, and its rights
and obligations hereunder, in its sole discretion. Any attempt to assign or delegate in viola-
tion of this clause will be void.
12.11 Compliance with Laws Software and technical information delivered under this
Agreement is subject to U.S. export control laws and may be subject to export or import reg-
ulations in other countries. Licensee agrees to strictly comply with all such laws and regula-
tions. Licensee will obtain import, export, re-export approvals and licenses required for
Software, services and technical data delivered and will retain documentation to support
compliance with those laws and regulations. Honeywell will not be liable to Licensee for any
failure to provide Software, services, transfers or technical data as a result of government
actions that impact Honeywell’s ability to perform, including (1) the failure to provide or the
cancellation of export or re-export licenses; (2) any subsequent interpretation of applicable
import, transfer or export law or regulation after the date of any order or commitment that
has a material adverse effect on Honeywell’s performance; or (3) delays due to Licensee’s
failure to follow applicable import, export, transfer, or re-export laws and regulations. Licen-
see shall not sell, transfer, export or re-export any Software, services or technical data for
use in activities that involve the design, development, production, use or stockpiling of
nuclear, chemical or biological weapons, or missiles, nor use Software, services or technical
data in any facility which engages in activities relating to such weapons or missiles. In addi-
tion, Software, services or technical data may not be used in connection with any activity
involving nuclear fission or fusion, or any use or handling of any nuclear material until Licen-
see, at no expense to Honeywell, has insurance coverage, indemnities, and waivers of lia-
bility, recourse and subrogation, acceptable to Honeywell and adequate in Honeywell’s
opinion to protect Honeywell against any type of liability.
12.12 Language. This Agreement is in the English language only, which language shall
be controlling in all respects, and all versions of this Agreement in any other language shall
be for accommodation only and shall not be binding on the parties to this Agreement. All
communications and notices made or given pursuant to this Agreement, and all documenta-
tion and support to be provided, unless otherwise noted, shall be in the English language.
Entire Agreement; Modification. This Agreement constitutes the entire agreement between
Licensee and Honeywell and supersedes in their entirety any and all oral or written agree-
ments previously existing between Licensee and Honeywell with respect to the subject mat-
ter hereof. The terms and conditions of any purchase order or other instrument issued by
Licensee in connection with this Agreement shall be of no force or effect. This Agreement
may only be amended or supplemented by a writing that refers explicitly to this Agreement
and that is signed by duly authorized representatives of Licensee and Honeywell.
THE LICENSED SOFTWARE AND ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION ARE PRO-
TECTED BY UNITED STATES COPYRIGHT LAW AND INTERNATIONAL TREATY. UNAU-
THORIZED REPRODUCTION OR DISTRIBUTION IS SUBJECT TO CIVIL AND CRIMINAL
PENALTIES. BY INSTALLING OR USING THE LICENSED SOFTWARE, YOU ACKNOWL-
EDGE THAT YOU HAVE READ THIS AGREEMENT, UNDERSTAND IT AND AGREE TO
BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS AND CONDITIONS.
43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK xv

Year 2000 Compliance Statement
The TrendManager Suite is Year 2000 compliant in accordance with the BSI DISC PD2000-
1 definition, provided that the host PC, its BIOS, operating system and any other active appli-
cations are also Year 2000 compliant.
xvi 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

Chapter 1: Welcome to the
TrendManager Suite
Features
Features TrendViewer TrendManager TrendServer
Data Conversion Tool to import, graph, save and export data from (no export
 
other Honeywell devices into the TrendManager Software mode)
Full Configuration of TrendView recorders  
Import data from removable media   
(graph
Print all graph data and recorder configurations  
data only)
Operates in Windows 10, Windows 8 (32 and 64 bit-Profes-

sional, Enterprise and Ultimate Edition), Windows Server
2012, Windows 7 (32 and 64 bit - Professional, Enterprise   
and Ultimate Edition), Windows Server 2008***, 2012*** and
2016***
Password protection - Full user traceability 
Archive data on integral secure database  
Concurrent Batch Mode  
Export using CSV format files  
Enable Fuzzy Logging  
Events system including user counters and reports  
Export using OPC links 
Communicate with recorders using RS485 interface * 
Communicate with recorders using Ethernet TCP/IP 
Distribute all recorder data over LAN plant-wide 
FTP or secure Communication Interface over Ethernet 
Web browse a recorder 
Send setup to recorder via Ethernet 
Audit trail manager 
Relating data retrieval used for graphing & logging 
Replay of historical and Realtime data using a split screen format. 
Ethernet/RS485 communications* 
43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK 1

Features TrendViewer TrendManager TrendServer
Enable Modbus and Modbus X via Ethernet or RS485* 
Comms Server manages the communication status of the recorder 
Remote access to other servers via Ethernet 
Modbus Master and Communication with Slave over RS485 or Ether-


net
IQOQ Protocol Documentation 
AMS2750 survey setup  
View Archived Databases 
* RS485 is available as an option on the eZtrend QXe
** not featured on the X Series and GR Serie s recorders
*** Secure Communication Interface is supported by Windows 7 or higher.
2 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

Chapter 2: Introduction to the
TrendManager Software Suite
Introduction
The TrendManager Suite software is a Windows™ based PC package
which accompanies the Honeywell TrendView recorders as a data
acquisition and configuration tool. The mouse and keyboard operations are
Windows™ orientated and this manual is written under the assumption that the user is
familiar with Windows™.
TrendManager Suite is designed and written for, Windows 7 (32 and 64 bit - Profes-
sional, Enterprise and Ultimate Edition), Windows 8 and Windows 10(32 and 64 bit-Pro-
fessional, Enterprise and Ultimate Edition), Windows Server 2008, Windows Server
2012, Windows Server 2016 . *Note: Secure Communication Interface is supported by
Windows 7 or higher.
Any technical terms peculiar to the Honeywell range of recorders should be referred
to in the “Glossary” on page 283.
Software Options
TrendManager Suite software is available listed below. The attributes of
each level are listed in “Features” on page 1.
TrendViewer
This software is available free of charge and allows the user to view, graph and print
data from a Floppy disk or PCMCIA memory card interface on the V5 recorders and
from Compact Flash and USB key on the X Series recorders. And from SD Card and
USB key on the GR Serie s recorders.
TrendManager Pro
A stand alone package which allows the user to fully configure recorders, as well as
archive, graph, print and export data. Total recorder control and simulation within an
integrated secure data base.
TrendServer Pro
A fully network aware package which allows data viewing, archiving and communication
with other recorders. The number of recorders that can be networked for communica-
tions is limited by the specification of the PC that is acquiring the data and the capabili-
ties of the network itself.
All software in the TrendManager Suite has a comprehensive on-line help system
with context-sensitive help built in. Just hit the F1 key to call up the specific help file rel-
evant to where you are in the software application.
Recorder types:
X Series recorders include: eZtrend QXe, Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX
recorders. GR Series of recorders consist of the eZtrend GR, Minitrend GR, Multi-
trend GR and DR Graphic recorders.

Database Management Tool
Data archive tools are included as standard as well as the ability to E-mail, graph, print
and export data. Database Management Tool software is available as a separate soft-
ware application that comes with TrendServer software.
Communication Service
The TrendServer Pro software has an integral Communications Server that manages
the communications status of recorders on a serial port (RS485) or through an Ethernet
connection. Honeywell V5 recorders with an RS485 card can use an RS485 to RS232
converter (eg. Westermo: Model No. MA42, Serial No. 4908) for RS232. Recorders are
held on databases and the databases are held on servers. By accessing other comms
servers remotely it is possible to receive data from other recorders held on databases
on other servers - known as remote servers.
The comms server uses IP Addresses to locate recorders on local and remote servers.
All logging configuration for comms logging and logging to a database is set up from the
Comms Server.
Recorder data can be entered into any PC on the LAN (Local Area Networks) and auto-
matically viewed and graphed at any other PC. TrendServer offers the ability to down-
load and import data from Ethernet connected remote recorders.
Honeywell X Series and GR Serie s recorders have Modbus and Modbus X capabili-
ties via Ethernet and RS485 comms.
OPC 2.0 DA and A&E server are provided for third party clients to get the real time data
and events.
NB. *Only Ethernet communications available as standard on the eZtrend V5.
IQOQ Protocol Document

Custom built IQOQ reports can be gererated based on the configuration of the recorder.
The configuration can be validated as a process of confirming that a piece of equipment
or process meets the stated requirements to produce a regulated product. See “Appen-
dix H - IQOQ Protocol Document” on page 339.
AMS2750 Capabilities
Specific funtionality has been aded to the software to allow configuration of Process
mode and TUS mode in line with AMS2750 specifications. AMS2750 is the specification
that covers pyrometric requirements for thermal processing equipment used for heat treatment.
Trendview Historian Software

Trendview Historian function uses OPC HDA to acquire the data, refer to 43-TV-25-41,
Trendview Historian User Guide. A Windows-based Client application is be used to
view and access historical data from Trendview OPC Historian Server.
Trendview Batch Report Tool

A tool that improves on the creation of specific Batch reports from TrendManageror
TrendServer database makes it easier to analyze and document specific batch process.
This tool uses the recorder batch information that has been imported into the TrendMa-
nager software, eliminating the error prone steps of manually entering the data into a
spreadsheet application.

The Batch Report tool allows a user to easily generate separate batch report in a secure
PDF format to document the final results of the batch process.
Golden Batch comparison feature can be used to compare the batch data with a refer-
ence batch. This feature can be used to analyze the deviations of the current batch with
reference batch information.
Honeywell V5
Honeywell V5 recorders require a separate comms card fitted with an Ethernet and the
FTP option installed. Many communication protocols are now available including:
RS485 Trendbus (including web browser), Ethernet (using FTP), RS232 (web browser).
Plus RS485 Modbus and Profibus options on the recorder. For a standard barcode
reader that provides an ASCII output use the standard Ethernet/RS232/RS485 comms
card.
On Minitrend V5 recorder and Multitrend Plus V5, an optional communication card
is available featuring RS-485 trendbus in addition to ethernet. Another optional commu-
nication card features RS-485 Modbus and Modbus-X communications.

This page has been intentionally left blan

Chapter 3: Installation
Installation
InstallationTrendManager Suite :
Prerequisites:
• Close all the Windows applications before starting TrendManager Suite.
• It is not recommended to load multiple installation programs on the same PC.
• You must be a member of Administrators group to install/uninstall TrendManager
Suite.
NOTE: Steps to check the Administrator rights for any user:

1. Please go to the Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management.
2. Select the Local Users and Groups.
3. Go to Groups.
4. Right Click on Administrators group.
5. Select Properties. List of the users will be populated.
6. Add any user for whom Administrative privileges are required (in the below diagram,
“RECORDER\Operator150” has been added in the Administrators group).

To Install TrendManager Suite:
• Load the DVD into the drive and wait for the autorun sequence to start. If the auto-
run does not commence, follow these instructions Go to My Computer->DVD ROM
drive.
• Right Click setup.exe
For Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012 and
2016-
a) Click on “Open” if you are logged on with Administrative privileges.
b) Or click on “Run as Administrator”.
.
The TrendManager Suite - InstallShield Wizard appears.

1. It will check for .Net Framework 3.5.

If it is not installed below screen appears and installation will be aborted.
• Click Next and accept the terms of “License Agreement of TrendManager Suite”
to proceed further.
• Click Next. The Choose Destination Location window appears, displaying informa-
tion about the default destination folder. If you want to change the default destina-
tion folder, click on Browse to specify a different destination folder.
• Click Next. The Language window appears, displaying default “English” language.
Other languages supported are German and French. Choose the appropriate lan-
guage pack.
• Click Next. The Package Selection window appears.

The TrendManager Suite has three different versions to install:
1. TrendViewer - This software is a free version that is part of the Recorder software.
2. TrendManager Pro - This can be purchased and has added features.

3. TrendServer Pro - This can be purchased and has a complete set of features.
Select the required version, and depending on the version chosen the installation steps
will be different.
TrendViewer Installation:
• Click Next. The “Start Copying Files” window appears for reviewing the settings
before it starts copying the files.
• Click Next. Installation will progress during this process it creates “TMSApplicatio-
nAccessGroup”.
The above groups can be checked only after completion of installation and
restart of machine, for more details please refer to “TrendManager Suite User
Groups after Installation” on page 16.
• The installation complete window appears with a message to restart the machine or
not. It is preferred to restart the machine before using the application.
• Click Finish.
(License code is not required for TrendViewerInstallation)

TrendManager Pro and TrendServer Pro Installation
• Click Next. The License window appears, enter the code and organization as sup-
plied with each specific version of software. The code can be found inside the
DVD case.
• Click Next. The below User Account Information Window appears and then follow
the on-screen instructions.

a) The default user account “TMSUser” is shown. If the “TMSUser” local user account
already exists then provide a password for it, if not enter a new password to create the user
account.
b) The default user account can also be changed. You can provide either an existing or new
local user account. For new user account, you need to enter a new password.
c) When default user account are edited and a new account details are entered, a warning
message will popup. User can press Yes to continue or press No to use the default user
account details.
d) The password must comply with the local security password policy otherwise you will see
the below message box :
e) If you have a domain, you can also enter the domain user account and password. If the
domain user account is not found then installation will display the below message.

f) If the administrator wants to change the default user account from "TMSUser" to a
domain user account, the Administrator should ensure the domain account is a service
account (when the password never expires for such accounts).
g) It is not recommended to use a domain user account for which there is a password expi-
ration policy. The "TMSUser" services does not run when the password expires for such
accounts.
Note (For TrendServer Pro only): The user account entered in the above window is used
for setting the Communications Service (and processes) to run under it. The password
entered will expire as per local security policies after this TrendServer Pro may stop func-
tioning. Please ensure passwords are updated regularly as per your security policies using
Security Configuration Utility which comes along with the installation of TrendManager
Suite. For more details, refer to the ““Security Configuration Utility” on page 38”.
NOTE (For TrendServer Pro only): The user account entered in the above window is
used for setting the Communications Service (and processes) to run under it. To run
Communications Service under a different account or on expiry of password, use the
Security Configuration Utility which is part of the TrendManager Suite installation. For
more details, refer to the ““Security Configuration Utility” on page 38”.
NOTE (For TrendManager Pro only): The user account entered in the above window is
used for setting Database process to run under it. To run the Database process under a
different account or on account of expiry of password, use the Security Configuration Utility
which is a part of the TrendManager Suite installation. For more details, refer to the
““Security Configuration Utility” on page 38”.
• Click Next. The Start Copying Files window appears for reviewing the settings before
starting the copy of files.
• Users should be part of TMSApplictaionAccessGroup to access TrendManager
Suite. TrendManager Suite Admin Console window will allow to add new users.

Click on the “Add Users” button to add new users. Click on “Skip” to continue with
installation.
• Click “Add Users” to launch Configure Users window to add users to TMSApplicatio-
nAccessGroup.

• Select a user in the Users Tab or a group in the Groups Tab and click on the right fac-
ing arrows to add the user/group TMSApplicationAccessGroup.
• Click on left facing arrows to remove the user/group from TMSApplicationAccess-
Group.
• A user can also be added by using the Add button.
• After adding the users/groups, click on Close button to exit User Configuration win-
dow.
• Installation will progress. For TrendServer Pro it creates “TMSApplicationAc-
cessGroup” and “TMServiceAccessGroup” groups and for TrendManager Pro it
creates only “TMSApplicationAccessGroup”. These groups can be checked only
after completion of installation and restart of machine, for more details please
refer to “TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation” on page 16.
• The installation complete window appears with message to restart the machine or
not. It is mandatory to restart the machine before using the application.
• Click Finish.

Post installation checks for using TrendServer Pro :
1. Ensure that Communications Service has started.
Steps to check for Communications Service:

1. Please go to Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Services.
2. You will see below window
In the above window you will see that Communications Service started.
For real time data logging the communication server uses a local machine date and time.
Make sure you have set the correct date, time and time zone settings on this machine.
After completing post installation checks, TrendServer Pro can be configured for data
acquisition.
Please refer to ““Comms Server Logging” on page 229 for ““Logging Configuration” on
page 230 Steps. Please refer to “Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface”
on page 175 for ““Schedule Setup” on page 178” Steps.

TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation
During TrendManager Suite installation it creates one common group for all the variants
i.e. TMSApplicationAccessGroup and for TrendServer Pro it creates another group
called TMSServiceAccessGroup.
NOTE (For TrendServer Pro only): TMSServiceAccessGroup is required for Communi-
cations Service (and processes) runs under it. Do not delete this user group and also do
not modify/delete the user in the user group.
1. The user account provided during installation should be part of TMSApplicationAccessGroup for
TrendManager Pro and will be part of TMSServiceAccessGroup in case of TrendServer
Pro .
2. Users can be added to the TMSApplicationAccessGroup by launching the TMS Admin Console
from the location C:\Program Files\TrendManager Suite\TrendServer\ TMSAdminConsole.exe
3. Click on Add Users to launch User Configuration Window and users can be added to TMSApplica-
tionAccessGroup.
4. Users can be added manually by following the below mentioned steps.
a) Please go to Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Computer Management.

b) Select Local Users and Groups.
c) Go to Groups. And check for TMSApplicationAccessGroup.

d) Right click on TMSApplicationAccessGroup.
e) Select Properties. A list of users will be populated who are authorized to access
TrendManager Suite application.
f) Add any user you want to give authorize to access TrendManager Suite application.
(In below diagram, “Recorder\Operator155” has been added to TMSApplicationAc-
cessGroup).

NOTE: Ensure below steps once user is added to “TMSApplicationAccessGroup” to
access TrendManager Suite application:
1. Check for “TrendManager Suite ”, ”TMP” and “CommsServ” folders are present in the virtual
store of given user. After locating the given folders in virtual store, take backup and delete those
folders from virtual store. The virtual store is applicable for Windows Server 2008, 2012, 2016,
Windows 8 and Windows 7.
Steps are given below to locate virtual store folder for the user who is currently logged in
the system. By default virtual store folder is hidden.
Steps to show hidden files
• Open explorer
• Go to the Tools -> Folder
• Click on View tab

• Check the “Show hidden files, folders, and drives”. Click Ok. please see above
image for reference
• Now, go to “C:\Users\<User Name>\ AppData\Local\VirtualStore. Under VirtualStore
folder, “\Program Files \TrendManager Suite\TMP5DB”, “\Program Data\TMP” and
“\ProgramData\commsserv” will be present. Or in case of 64 bit, this will be “\Pro-
gram Files (x86) \TrendManager Suite \TMP5DB”.
• After locating them take backup and delete the folders “TrendManager Suite”,
“TMP” and “Commsserv” from virtual store.
2. Please logoff and login into the machine to access TrendManager Suite application.
g) Any user trying to use the TrendManager Suite Application from remote machine
should be part of the “TMSApplicationAccessGroup” on the remote system.
For ex: If TrendServer Pro is running under Domain\User1 user on Machine A wants
to access communications server of TrendServer Pro running under Domain\User2
user on Machine B. Then Domain\User1 should be part of TMSApplicationAccess-
Group of Machine B.
If a local user does not exists on the remote system then a new user with same user-
name and password can be created on the remote system and be added to the
TMSApplicationAccessGroup of the remote system in order to access communica-
tions server of the remote system.

Steps to create a new user:
c) Right click on Users and Select “New User”. Below “New User” dialog appears.
d) Provide User Name and Password. The new user will get created.
h) The Administrator/Non-Administrator users who are not part of TMSServiceAccess-
Group or TMSApplicationAccessGroup will be able to use the TrendManager Suite
application if they are already configured with required settings like Windows privileges,
folder access permissions and DCOM access permissions similar to the configured set-
tings during TrendManager Suite application installation.
i) During uninstallation, the TMSServiceAccessGroup and TMSApplicationAccess-
Group are not deleted.

Migration
Migration of TrendManager Suite :
Prerequisites:
• Close all the Windows applications before starting TrendManager Suite.
• It is not recommended to load multiple installation programs on the same PC.
• You must be a member of Administrators group to install/uninstall TrendManager
Suite.
Migration of TrendManager Suite:

• Load the DVD into the drive and wait for the autorun sequence to start. If the autorun
does not commence, follow these instructions Go to My Computer->DVD ROM drive.
• Right Click setup.exe
For Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012-
a) Click on “Open” if you are logged on with Administrative privileges.
b) Or click on “Run as Administrator”.
.
Or provide the Administrative privileges for the “The following user” option.
The TrendManager Suite - InstallShield Wizard appears.
• Click Next and accept the terms of “License Agreement of TrendManager Suite” to
proceed further.
tion about the default destination folder. If you want to change the default destination
folder, click on Browse to specify a different destination folder.
• Click Next. The Language window appears, displaying default “English” language.
Other languages supported are German and French. Choose the appropriate lan-
guage pack.

• Click Next. The Package Selection window appears.
The TrendManager Suite has three different versions to install:

1. TrendViewer - This software is a free version that is part of the Recorder software.
2. TrendManager Pro - This can be purchased and has added features.

3. TrendServer Pro - This can be purchased and has a complete set of features.
Select the required version, and depending on the version chosen the installation steps will
be different.
TrendViewer Migration:
• Click Next. The “Start Copying Files” window appears for reviewing the settings
before it starts copying the files.
• Click Next. Installation will progress during this process it creates “TMSApplication-
AccessGroup”.
The above groups can be checked only after completion of installation and restart
of machine, for more details please refer to “TrendManager Suite User Groups after
Installation” on page 16.
• The installation complete window appears with a message to restart the machine or
not. It is preferred to restart the machine before using the application.
• Click Finish.
TrendManager Pro and TrendServer Pro Migration

• Click Next. Migration-Prerequisite window appears to follow the prerequisite to take
the backup of the folders.

• Click Next. The below User Account Information Window appears and then follow the
on-screen instructions.
a) The default user account “TMSUser” is shown. If the “TMSUser” local user account
already exists then provide a password for it, if not enter a new password to create the user
account.
b) The default user account can also be changed. You can provide either an existing or new
local user account. For new user account, you need to enter a new password. It’s recom-
mended to have the default user account on all the TSP’s which are being installed on the
site/plant for data-sharing.
c) When the default user account is edited and a new account details are entered, a warn-
ing message will popup. User can press Yes to continue or press No to use the default user
account details.

d) If you have a domain, you can also enter the domain user account and password. If the
e) Ifyou have a domain, you can also enter the domain user account and password. If the
f) If the administrator wants to change the default user account from "TMSUser" to a
domain user account, the Administrator should ensure the domain account is a service
account (when the password never expires for such accounts).
g) It is not recommended to use a domain user account for which there is a password expi-
ration policy. The "TMSUser" services does not run when the password expires for such
accounts.
Note (For TrendServer Pro only): The user account entered in the above window is used
for setting the Communications Service (and processes) to run under it. The password
entered will expire as per local security policies after this TrendServer Pro may stop func-
tioning. Please ensure passwords are updated regularly as per your security policies using
Security Configuration Utility which comes along with the installation of TrendManager
Suite. For more details, refer to the ““Security Configuration Utility” on page 38”.
NOTE (For TrendServer Pro only): The user account entered in the above window is
used for setting the Communications Service (and processes) to run under it. To run
Communications Service under a different account or on expiry of password, use the
Security Configuration Utility which is part of the TrendManager Suite installation. For
more details, refer to the ““Security Configuration Utility” on page 38”.
NOTE (For TrendManager Pro only): The user account entered in the above window is
used for setting Database process to run under it. To run the Database process under a
different account or on account of expiry of password, use the Security Configuration Utility

which is a part of the TrendManager Suite installation. For more details, refer to the
““Security Configuration Utility” on page 38”.
• Click Next. The Start Copying Files window appears for reviewing the settings before
starting the copy of files.
• Users should be part of TMSApplictaionAccessGroup to access TrendManager
Suite. The TMS Admin Console window will allow to add new users. Click on the
“Add Users” button to add new users. Click on “Skip” to continue with installation

• Click “Add Users” to launch Configure Users window to add users to TMSApplicati-
onAccessGroup.
• Select a user in the Users Tab or a group in the Groups Tab and click on the right fac-
ing arrows to add the user/group TMSApplicationAccessGroup.
• Click on left facing arrows to remove the user/group from TMSApplicationAccess-
Group.
• A user can also be added by using the Add button.
• After adding the users/groups, click on Close button to exit User Configuration win-
dow.
• Click on “Start Migration” to migrate the data from previous TrendManager Suite
installation. The following dialog comes up prompting the user to select a destina-

tion folder to backup the data from the previous users of TrendManager Suite.
User has option to select a destination folder of his choice to backup.
• Click on “Start Copy” to initiate the backup of data.

• If there is not enough space on the destination to backup data, there would be a noti-
fication to the user about the same and user needs to select a different location to
backup data.

• Once backup is complete click on “Continue” button to launch Migration Window.
• Depending on the number of users from previous TrendManager Suite installation,

the user list of populated in the drop down list. User can select a particular user to
complete migration of his data to the latest TrendManager Suite application to
work with. User can also select “Keep the existing TrendManager Suite data and
configuration” of the administrator who used to use the TrendManager Suite
application from the previous installation.
• Click on Apply to complete migration of data.
• After successful completion click on “Close” Button.
• Installation will progress. For TrendServer Pro it creates “TMSApplica tionAc-
cessGroup” and “TMServiceAccessGroup” groups and for TrendManager Pro
it creates only “TMSApplicationAccessGroup”. These groups can be checked
only after completion of installation and restart of machine, for more details please
refer to “See “TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation” on page 16.”..
• The installation complete window appears with message to restart the machine or
not.
• Click Finish.

Post migration checks for using Trend Server Pro:
1. Ensure that Communications Service has started.
2. Launch the TrendServer Pro and check for configured database servers and realtime comms
servers.
And also check for the configured FTP schedulers.

If you are not able to see the above configuration then follow the below steps:
• Shut down Communications Service, please refer “Shutdown Server” for more
details.
• To restore the backedup files by following the below steps
• Start the Communications Service by opening Comms UI.
3. Check for “Archive Database Server” feature in database server list.
Steps to check for “Archive Database Server” feature:

a) Launch Trend Server Pro UI.
b) Click on Servers button.
c) We will see Archive Database Server along with Local Server. See the image below:
If “Archive Database Server” is not shown, please do the below steps:

1. Shut down Communications Service, please refer “Shutdown Server” for more details.
2. Start the Communications Service by opening Comms UI.

TrendManager Suite User Groups after Migration
During TrendManager Suite installation it creates one common group for all the variants
i.e. TMSApplicationAccessGroup and for TrendServer Pro it creates another group
called TMSServiceAccessGroup.
NOTE (For TrendServer Pro only): TMSServiceAccessGroup is required for Communi-
cations Service (and processes) runs under it. Do not delete this user group and also do
not modify/delete the user in the user group.
1. The user account provided during installation should be part of TMSApplicationAccessGroup for
TrendManager Pro and will be part of TMSServiceAccessGroup in case of TrendServer
Pro .
2. Any user who wants to accessTrendManager Suite application or permissions to enable the
communication across computers should be added to the TMSApplicationAccessGroup.
Steps to check the group and add user to TMSApplicationAccessGroup:

c) Go to Groups. And check for TMSApplicationAccessGroup.

d) Right click on TMSApplicationAccessGroup.
e) Select Properties. A list of users will be populated who are authorized to access
TrendManager Suite application.
f) Add any user you want to give authorize to access TrendManager Suite application.
(In below diagram, “Recorder\Operator155” has been added to TMSApplicationAc-
cessGroup).
NOTE: Ensure below steps once user is added to “TMSApplicationAccessGroup” to

access TrendManager Suite application:
1. Check for “TrendManager Suite ”,”TMP” and “CommsServ” folders are present in the virtual
store of given user. After locating the given folders in virtual store, take backup and delete those
folders from virtual store. The virtual store is applicable for Windows Server 2012, Windows
Server 2008, Windows 8 and Windows 7.
2. Any user trying to use theTrendManager Suite Application from remote machine should be
part of the “TMSApplicationAccessGroup” on the remote system.
TrendServer Pro is running under Domain\User1 user on Machine A wants to access
3. For ex: If
communications server of TrendServer Pro running under Domain\User2 user on Machine B.
Then Domain\User1 should be part of TMSApplicationAccessGroup of Machine B.
4. If a local user does not exists on the remote system then a new user with same username and
password can be created on the remote system and be added to the TMSApplicationAccess-
Group of the remote system in order to access communications server of the remote system.

Steps to create a new user:
c) Right click on Users and Select “New User”. Below “New User” dialog appears.
d) Provide User Name and Password. The new user will get created.
g) The Administrator/Non-Administrator users who are not part of TMSServiceAccess-

Group or TMSApplicationAccessGroup will be able to use the TrendManager Suite
application if they are already configured with required settings like Windows privileges,
folder access permissions and DCOM access permissions similar to the configured set-
tings during TrendManager Suite application installation.
h) During uninstallation, the TMSServiceAccessGroup and TMSApplicationAccess-
Group are not deleted.

Troubleshooting for TrendManager Suite Application:
During the launch of TrendManager Suite Application UI, if you see any of the below
messages:
The above messages can be due to:

a) Password expiration for the given logged on user account, Use Security Configura-
tion Utility for this. For more details, refer to““Security Configuration Utility” on page 38”.
b) If the user is not part of “TMSApplicationAccessGroup”. For more details please
refer to “TrendManager Suite User Groups after Installation” on page 16.
c) TrendServer Pro Application, if Commnunications Service is still not started after
steps 1 and 2 have been applied, then copy the “TMS” folder of the logs for further
understanding of the issue.
1. The TrendServer Pro uses Microsoft's DCOM to allow remote users to access data on other
copies of the Manager and the Server software across networks Using TCP/IP. Please troubleshoot
below steps if you are experiencing issues with remote communications.
a) For all Windows versions : From "Start" select "Run" and type dcomcnfg.This will start
"Component Services".Go to Component Services->Computers->My Computer. Right
click on “My Computer” and select “Default Properties” tab. Ensure “Enable Distributed
COM on this computer” is checked.

b) Add TrendServer Pro client user or OPC client user to “TMSApplicationAccess-
Group” who wants to access TrendServer Pro or TrendViewHistorian server machine.
Refer to ” for more details.
c) Try restarting both client and server; a restart should not be necessary if only the fire-
wall option has changed, but a restart is needed to ensure that any DCOM configuration
changes have been applied.
d) Temporarily switch off any firewall. If a firewall is in use, it must be restored after test-
ing. Switching the firewall off will eliminate it is as a possible problem source.
e) Check network security settings and ensure DCOM traffic (port 135) is being allowed.
f) Attempt to establish a direct connection between the client and server by accessing
the shared folder on either of the machines.
g) If the client will communicate only with a direct connection (as above) the security
settings used on the client network need to be reviewed to ensure DCOM traffic is being
allowed.
h) As a final check that DCOM traffic is not being blocked by the client network, a port
scanner may be used to check the state of and access to port 135; this is not recom-
mended for anyone unfamiliar with network technology. A basic (and safe) port scanner
(PortQry) is available for down-load from Microsoft’s web site; a search on Micro-
soft.com for Portqry will locate the instructions for down-load and use, down-loading
from any third party web site is not recommended.
i) Check to see if the client and server are in the same domain. If they are not in a
domain,then following applies.
• Simple File Sharing (SFS) should be switched off on both client and server
machines. Follow below steps to switch off SFS.
•• Open windows explorer, go to the “Tools” menu and select the “Folder options…”
menu item. This will present a dialog box as follows:

•• Select the “View” pane in order to be able to see some advanced settings. The
“Folder Options” window will change to look something like the following:
•• Scroll to the bottom of the “Advanced settings:” area of the window and make sure
that the “Use simple file sharing (Recommended)” option is not enabled. It has been
disabled in the example screenshot above.
• The server machine must have the same user account configured as the client machine
that is currently trying to run the TrendServer Pro software. The password for the user
account must be the same on both machines.
j) Make sure the below ports are not blocking while doing related actions.
They are:
Port 25 for Email, Port 80 for HTTP, Port 20 for FTP, Port 21 is for both FTP and TCP (as
FTP exchange is executed at the beginning of the connection) , Port 8955 for Peer to Peer,
Port 502 for Modbus, Port 123 for SNTP,Port 130 is for both OPC2.0 & OPC 3.0, Port 5001
is for Trendbus, Port 135 is TCP ( used to identify the recorder type), Port 976 is for remote
control activeX

Installation or Migration of TrendView Historian:
Prerequisites:
Ensure that TrendManager Suite is installed in your machine.
To Install/Migrate TrendViewer Historian:
• Log in with Administrative privileges.
• Launch Setup.exe. The TrendView Historian - InstallShield Wizard appears.
• Click Next and accept the terms of “License Agreement of TrendManager Suite
Software” to proceed further.
tion about the default destination folder. If you want to change the default destina-
tion folder, click Browse to specify a different destination folder.
• Click Next. The Edit Data window appears to enter the code and organization as sup-
plied with each specific version of software. The code can be found inside the DVD
case for TrendView Historian.
• Click Next. The below User Account Information Window appears, then follow the
on-screen instructions.
It is preferred to use the same user account that TrendManager Suite application is
running.

Check the User account where Communications Service is running. It can be found by
going to Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Services and will see below screen where
you can see the user account under “Log On As”.
To run TrendView Historian under a different account or on account of expiry of a pass-

word, use Security Configuration Utility which is a part of the TrendManager Suite instal-
lation. For more details, refer to ““Security Configuration Utility” on page 38”.
• Click Next. The below Ready to Install the Program Window appears.
• Click Install. The setup starts installing all the prerequisites if they are not installed.
The Setup Status page appears displaying the installation status. After the installa-
tion is complete, the Setup complete page appears. Click Finish.

Security Configuration Utility
This utility is available as part of the installation of TrendManager Pro and TrendServer
Pro. It is present in the TrendManager Suite installation folder. i.e. for Honeywell variant
it is located at C:\Program Files\TrendManager Suite\TMSSecurityCfg.exe.
Before launching Security Configuration Utility follow the below instructions:
1. Ensure that you have Administrative privileges.
2. Ensure that TrendManager Suite application is not running and also services are stopped. To
shut down the services, please refer to “Shutdown Server”.
3. Check for the VirtualStore folder for the given user and take back up of it. For more details refer to
the virtualstorebackup.
4. Check for user account under which Communications Service is running. It can be done by going to
Control Panel -> Administrative Tools -> Services and will see below screen where you can see the
user account under “Log On As”.

About Security Configuration Utility:
1. The TrendManager Suite Security Configuration Utility (TMSSecurityCfg.exe) is a standalone
application intended to reset an existing account in case the password has been changed or another
account needs to be set for TrendManager Suite Application or TrendView Historian. The
Security Configuration Utility is shown below.
2. You need to provide valid user credentials that are intended to use with TrendManager Suite
or TrendView Historian.
3. To change the user account under TrendManager Suite or TrendView Historian it should be
provided in the following format:
a) For Local user account format –“User Name” or “Machine Name\User Name”.
Steps to check for “Machine Name”:
• Go to Start Menu>Control Panel> Start > Control Panel > System.
• You will see “Computer name” which is also “Machine Name”.
b) For Domain user account format – “Domain Name\User Name”. For this account if you
provide wrong password depending upon the domain policy, the account may get locked
after multiple tries.
4. On change of password for the given user account, under which TrendManager Suite or
TrendView Historian is running, it should be changed using the Security Configuration Utility to
make them run under that user account.
NOTE: Re-start of the system is mandatory to apply above changes.

Note : If TMS Database is residing on a shared network drive, make sure the new
TMS service account user has the permissions to access share network drive before
there is a change in the service account user in the security configuration utility.

Access OPC DA/HDA Server
TrendServer Pro has an OPC DA Server named ‘ TrendView .OPC.1’ and TrendView
Historian has an OPC HDA server named ‘Hci. TrendView -Historian’.
Follow below steps to connect to either of these servers using an OPC Client
1. If the OPC client is installed on the TrendServer Pro machine, ensure that the windows user try-
ing to launch OPC client is added to “TMSApplicationAccessGroup”. Refer to TrendManager
Suite User Groups for more details.
2. If the OPC client is trying to connect to the OPC server, from a remote machine, please follow guide-
lines provided by OPC vendor. The following additional steps should be completed before accessing
OPC server.
NOTE: For Matrikon OPC Client, the documents and guidelines can be found at following
location “http://www.matrikonopc.com/dcom-configuration-opc.aspx”
a) Add OPC client users to “TMSApplicationAccessGroup” on the TrendServer Pro/
TrendView Historian Server machine. Refer to “TrendManager Suite User Groups after
Installation” on page 16 for more details.
b) If OPC client is still not able to access OPC server, please refer to “TrendManager
Suite User Groups after Installation” on page 16:

Firewall settings on Windows 7
1. Select “Advanced settings”.

2. Click on Inbound Rules -> New Rule
3. Select Port and click on Next

4. Select TCP Port, specify port no 135 and click on Next
5. Select “Allow the connection” and click on next

6. Select the profile and click on Next
7. Specify name and description for the port rule and click on Finish

8. Make sure “File and Printer sharing” allowed
Machine Name
The Machine name (Computer name), can be found by going to the computer properties.
On your PC go to Start > Control Panel > System, This will produce the Computer proper-
ties screen.
On this screen you will see the Computer name (Machine name): Eg. IE1FLT4XDW9R1
Documentation
A full set of manuals for the software and the recorders (including some language versions)
are available on the DVD provided and from our website www.honeywellprocess.com.
Also Application Notes and Installation Instructions, first time password setup and database
tool information.
Batch Mode
The Batch Mode functionality will automatically install as a part of TrendManager Pro and
TrendServer Pro. Batch is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system
in the X Series and GR Serie s recorders.
The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis. Setting
up a batch requires information to identify and control batches of data. Batch data can also
be paused, for viewing, and resumed. Batch mode allows concurrent batches, where each
batch is associated with a group, so all pens within Group 1 will belong to the batch that is
controlled by Group 1. *Concurrent batch is not available on V5 recorders.
Database Management Tool

The Database Management Tool software is a separate software application that is pro-
vided for use with TrendServer Pro. It provides the user with the ability to back up, sort,
archive, move and copy the data stored by TrendManager Pro and TrendServer Pro
software.
From the DVD the Database Management Tool will automatically install. Follow the on
screen instructions. Enter your organisation and code (code found on the DVD case). From
the three types of installations Typical is recommended. The software will install into
C:\Program Files\ TrendManager Suite\Database Tool.

Modbus Profile Tool
The Modbus Profile Tool can be used to edit existing Modbus profiles or create new Mod-
bus profiles. It can also be used to export Modbus profiles from one system so that they
can be imported into another system. It is generally aimed at enabling the setup of Modbus
communications with non-Honeywell devices that support floating point input registers in
their Modbus memory map.
The Modbus Profile Tool is available with TrendServer Pro. It will install automatically and
can be activated from the same location as TrendServer Pro software.
The Modbus Profile Tool can be opened by going to Start > Programs > Trendview
Recorders Modbus Profile Tool. The Modbus Profile Editor window will open with
empty files ready for a new profile to be created. For more information, see “The Modbus
Profile Tool” on page 326.
Report Generation Tool

This is a separate software package, it is not part of TrendManager Suite and uses its
own install process and codes
PC software that uses a TUS data file generated by either Multitrend SX or MultiTrend
GR and DR Graphicrecorders to generate a temperature uniformity survey report. It pro-
duces a report that documents the uniformity performance of a furnace based on the
AMS2750 specification.
Trendview Historian
PC software that extracts data from TrendManager Suite databases and communicates
with various OPC HDA Clients (e.g. Matrikon) to analyze the Historical data of recorder. A
separate unlock code is required to activate this software.
TrendManager Suite installation is mandatory when using Trendview Historian.
Start Up
The TrendManager Suite has been installed on the Hard drive of your computer in ‘pro-
gram files’ unless during set up you have changed the destination folder.
To re-start the software, click on ‘Start’, go to Programs and select TrendManager Suite,
then select either TrendServer Pro, TrendManager Pro or TrendViewer according to
which type of software option has been purchased. A shortcut for your desktop is automati-
cally created.
Comms Server - Start up

The Comms server can only be opened using Start Menu of your PC, follow the path shown
in “Comms Server - Start up” on page 217. Select Communications Server, then once
opened it will appear as an icon in the system task bar in the bottom right of the PC Screen.
Note: Data will not be gathered until the Comms Server is activated from the Start
Menu.
Help
The TrendManager Suite has a comprehensive on-line Help facility which includes
detailed instructions on ‘How to do things’ and explanations of all application areas. The
help system is generic to product names and there is a section at the beginning of the help
files on identifying recorders. There is also advise on how to use the Help system included
in the TrendManager Suite Help Index.

System Requirements
TrendViewer requires the following minimum specification:-
•• 1GHz Pentium lV processor or higher
•• CD - ROM drive, a mouse
•• Monitor recommended screen resolution 1024x768
minimum requirement, high colour.
•• Windows 7 (32 bit – Professional and Ultimate Edi-
tion - 64 bit), Windows 8 (32 bit- Enterprise, Profes-
sional and Ultimate Edition -64 bit), Windows Server
2008, 2012 and 2016.
•• 4GB or more of RAM (min 4GB recommended)
•• 16 bit colour graphics, 24 bit recommended
(Screen Designer only)
•• 50 Mbyte hard disk free disk space
•• Flash card reader or USB port for
X Series recorders
•• 3.5” floppy disk drive or PCMCIA for V5 recorders
For TrendServer and TrendManager the following minimum specifications apply:-
•• 1GHz Pentium lV processor

•• CD ROM drive, a mouse
•• Monitor recommended screen resolution
1024x768 minimum requirement, high colour.
•• , Windows 8 (32 bit- Enterprise, Professional and
Ultimate Edition - 64 bit. Window 7* (32 and 64 bit -Pro-
fessional, Enterprise and Ultimate Edition)**, Windows
Server 2008, 2012 and 2016.
•• 4GB or more of SRAM (min 4GB recommended
for generating IQOQ reports)
•• 2 Gbyte hard-drive free disk space
•• TCP IP installed
•• Flash card reader or USB port for
X Series recorders.
•• 3.5” floppy disk drive or PCMCIA for V5 recorders
*Note (For TrendServer only) :
1. Secure Communications Interface is supported by Windows 7 and higher. This Secure Communica-
tion Interface only work with GR Serie s recorders with "SecureWSD" credit option enable.
2. For Windows 7 : We need Win 7 SP1(32 bit - Enterprise, Ultimate, Professional-64bit) as a prereq-
uisite for Secure Communications Interface.
3. To use Secure Communications Interface we need to download the required OS 32 or 64 bit patch
as per your machine OS from the link "http://support.microsoft.com/kb/2860842" and install it.
Below are two links to Microsoft Patch's for Secure Communication between recorders and
TrendManager Suite . These need to be installed on Win-7, SP1. Once the installation is
completed on Win-7 PC, this patch needs to be installed.
Microsoft Link to download the patch: "http://support.microsoft.com/kb/2860842"

After download. Double Click the zip file. Provide a path to extract the application to install
the patch. Once done double the application to install the patch.
TCP/IP = Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol is the main transport proto-
col used on the Internet for connectivity and transmission of data across heterogeneous
systems.
With all Honeywell software, performance improves with more RAM, faster CPUs, and
faster and larger hard disk drives.
NB. It is recommended that at least 100 Mbyte of free hard disk space is available for
archiving data. Please note the more logging and data being stored, the more free space
on the hard disk is required. This is not required with TrendViewer.

Chapter 4: Operation
Operation
When the TrendManager Suite is first opened, most of the PC screen will be blank apart
from a Button bar down the left side of the screen.
Button bar
The Button bar appears down the left hand side
of the screen. From here recorders can be fully
configured (not available on TrendViewer).
This is the main control area for the recorder,
graphs and databases. Clicking on either the
Graphs button or the Recorder button will reveal
a slide out pane from which further selections
can be made.
The Graphs button in TrendViewer will reveal a
slide out pane from which further selections can
be made (To show one graph).
Realtime (available on TrendServer) lists
recorders available on the communications
server. Both the Import and the Help button will
produce message boxes.
The System and Server buttons, available on TrendServer only.
Graphs button
Activate this button to show the Graphs Slide out Pane . From here graphs
can be added and stored. Click on Add new Graph and instructions will
appear. Click on the Folders heading and a further slide out bar appears.
This is a list of Folders in which the user can organise their graphs.
Recorder button
The recorder button activates the Recorders Slide out Pane which is the
main area of control for the recorder and databases. Click on Add New
Recorder and a Select new device box will appear. Click on the Database
heading and select Add New Database , a message box will appear for the
new details to be entered. This will help the user organise their recorders.
Realtime Communications
Available with TrendServer only.
Left click on the Realtime icon from the tool bar down the left side of the
main screen. This will produce the Recorders pane displaying the record-
ers that are available on the communications server. From here the user
can also see which server the comms server is using, which pens are avail-
able on each recorder and the comms server status.

Import button
Use the Import button to retrieve data or import a setup from an external
storage device only. This button will implement the Import Settings Window
which will allow the user to browse for network data or data from a device
media (disk) and import into a database. Before importing a setup or data
please read “Importing” on page 173. For TrendServer only, the facility to Import data
from other recorders using TCP/IP Ethernet connection is available see “Importing via FTP
or Secure Communications Interface” on page 175.
Data Conversion Tool
The Import function has a built in Data Conversion Tool facility that allows the data to
be imported from other Honeywell devices for use in the TrendManager Suite. See
“Importing Data from other Honeywell devices” on page 174.
Help button
The TrendManager Suite Help Index contains everything you need to
know for configuring the recorder, including a How to do things section,
Parts of the program , plus Technical papers and Contact information . This
Help button will access the general help file. For recorder specific help,
select the item on the screen under enquiry and press F1 on the keyboard. See “Help Files
- TrendManager Suite” on page 57.
Trash Can button

Drag items such as recorders, pens or graphs, over the Trash icon and let
go to delete. Note there is no undo facility.
Batch button
The Batch button will open the Batch View window. This will display the
Batch data for all the recorders in the currently selected database.
Not available on TrendViewer.
System button
The System button, only present on TrendServer, produces the System
Control pane giving three options. First is the Password , click anywhere on
the icon or the text. This will generate the Password control message box.
Click on the Status icon or text to generate the System Status message
box. Select the E-mail icon to produce the E-mail settings window.
Server button
This is the central control area for the remote connections, only available
with TrendServer. Click on this button to reveal the Server Slide-out
pane . This is a list of servers available, click on Add New Server to gener-
ate the Add New Database Server message box. Click on Database to pro-
duce the Server Database List . This list displays the databases available on the current
server. After installation of TrendServer, the server tab will dispaly both Local server and
Archive Database Server by default. Select Archive Database server and click on Data-
base to add a archive database.

Chapter 5: Help in the
TrendManager Suite
Help Files - TrendManager Suite

This Help system has been created in a generic format for use with various applications.
Take a moment to look at the first page few pages of the help system to identify which type
of software and recorder you have.
Help in TrendManager Suite can be used in various ways. The
help button takes you to the TrendManager Suite Help Index.
This consists of:
• How to do things
• Parts of the program
• Technical papers
Place the cursor over the desired heading, TrendManager Suite changes the appear-
ance of the cursor to a finger pointing hand. Click on any of these headings in the help
menu to activate the list.
Context sensitive help files

The method of entry through using the Help button will access the general help file. For
specific help relating to a particular feature of the software application, click in the area on
the screen and press F1 on the keyboard.
How to do things
This section is divided into two categories: ‘General Things’ and ‘Graphing Things’ .
Select the desired help option by passing the cursor over the top, it will turn into a hand.
Click on the required option to reveal detailed instruction on your chosen task. Follow the
instructions shown and press X in the top right corner to close.
Parts of the program

Click on this to reveal the Application Areas split into the following categories. Button Bar,
Message Boxes, Graphing and General . Place the cursor over the help topic desired and
click to activate the instructions on that particular task.
Technical papers
This will access technical information relevant to your particular software.

Searching in Help
Within each help topic there are different ways to search for information. The top of each
help screen shows the same menu bar throughout.
Find
This takes you to the ‘Find set up Wizard’, follow the on screen instructions. This will
enable the user to find a particular word or scroll through the alphabetical topic screen. By
clicking on the tags at the top of the Help Topic menu the user can view the Index or Con-
tents file.
Help Topics
This takes the user to the Help Topics menu where Find, Index and Contents files can be
accessed. Select option and press display.
Back
This takes the user back to the previous screen.
Print
Direct access to printing any of the help screens.
Options
• Annotate allows the user to
type any additional information
associated with this topic.
• Copy allows the user to copy
the screen.
• Print topic gives direct access
to print the screen.
The final two options at the top of the help menu • Font size can be changed.
are shown as arrow direction buttons, these will • Help can be set on top or not
take you either to the previous page or the next
on top.
page.
• Use system colours will require
help to be re-started.

Chapter 6: Recorder Configuration from
TrendManager Suite
X Series and GR Recorders

TrendManager Suite allows you to set up a recorder from your PC.
NB. If any function is denied by a flashing padlock, this is because a password is required to be entered
to proceed any further, see “Passwords” on page 208.
All areas are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help. Click in any area on the screen and
press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files.
Recorder Setup
With the software open, the main screen will be blank with a tool bar down the left hand side. To start a
new recorder configuration first select the Recorder button on the main button bar down the left side
of the screen. An empty recorders pane will be displayed. Click on Add New Recorder.
Add New Device

Select Add New Device from the Recorders pane and select an X Series and GR device from the
list of all types and press OK, the Add New Device box will appear. Enter the Device Name and
Description in the boxes provided to identify the recorder setup. The ID number of the unit must be set
by the user. If this setup is going to be transferred to a recorder enter the same ID number as the
recorder. It is important that all of the user’s recorders have different ID numbers.

An alternate method is to go to the recorder, save the setup on a media (even if it is blank), and import
the setup to the TrendManager software. This way the hardware configuration, number of virtual
pens, modbus number, and the serial and ID numbers are correct form the beginning. It also helps
reduce setup time if the customer wants to do real-time communications.
NB. Add New Device functionality is not applicable for the Archived Databases from the Archive Data-
base Server.
Hardware Setup
In the “Add new device” box there are slot references that co-ordinate with the slots on the rear panel of
the recorder. Select the drop down list in each slot for Analogue IO/ Pulse In cards, this hardware-
setup must match the recorder configuration. Select the correct card description for each slot and the
channels number, if there is no card fitted Select None.
(Analogue Output and Pulse input cards are not available for the eZtrend recorder)
Alarm/Digital IO Card Setup

If fitted, select the type of Alarm/Digital IO cards that will match the recorder’s set up. Select the cor-
rect card description for each slot and the channel numbers, if there is no card fitted select None.
Recommended Card Positions

Table 6.1 : Card/Slot positions
Multitrend
Slot position Card type Channel numbers
Slot A 8 Analogue In 1 to 8
Pulse Input 1 to 4
Slot B 8 Analogue In 9 to 16
Pulse Input 9 to 12
Slot C 8 Analogue In 17 to 24
Pulse Input 17 to 20
Slot D 8 Analogue In 25 to 32
Slot E 8 Analogue In 33 to 40
4 Analogue Out 33 to 36
Slot F 8 Analogue In 41 to 48
Slot G 4 Relay Output 1 to 4
8 Relay/2 Digital In 1 to 8
8 Digital Input/Output 1 to 8
Slot H 4 Relay Output 17 to 20
Slot I 4 Relay Output 33 to 36

Minitrend
Pulse Inputs 1 to 4
Pulse Inputs 9 to 12
eZtrend
Channel
Slot position Card type
numbers
Slot A 3 Analogue Inputs 1 to 3

6 Analogue Inputs 1 to 6
Slot B optional 3 Analogue Inputs 9 to 11
card 6 Analogue Inputs 9 to 14
DR Graphic
Pulse Inputs 1 to 4
Pulse Inputs 9 to 12
To fit the Analogue Input option card (Slot B) or a Relay Alarm or Digital IO card into the eZtrend
recorder you will require an expansion card to interface to the recorder.
Extra Pens
Extra Pens is an option that is available using the Firmware credit system in the recorder. Extra pens
can be set up here to reflect the recorder setup. If a setup is going to be transferred to a recorder,
ensure that the same amount of extra pens are available in the recorder. These extra pens are used
mainly for displaying maths functions and the totaliser. Extra pens can also be used as Comms variable
pens.
When the Hardware details have been entered click on the OK button. This will save the new recorder
details and the Setup Window is displayed.

AMS2750 Mode
AMS2750 is an option that can be enabled in the credit system. AMS2750 is the specification that cov-
ers pyrometric requirements for thermal processing equipment used for heat treatment. TrendMa-
nager Suite has 2 capability modes to match with the mode set in the recorder.
In process mode sets of timers are configured to inform and alert the user to the status of
certain conditions, these include: Temperature Uniformity Survey (TUS), System Accuracy
Tests, Instrument Calibradtion due date, Control TC due date and TC Status.
In TUS mode the recorder is configured to run a survey based on sensor and furnace set-
tings in the recorder. These must be configured in line with AMS2750 specification.
Refer to the Recoredr manual for more details.

Setup Window
General Setup
This is a list of areas for configuration in the Setup Window.
General - See “General button” on page 64
Field IO - See “Field IO” on page 72
Pens - See “Pens” on page 84
Comms - See “Comms” on page 93
Event/Counters - See “Events/Counters” on page 103
Screen - See “Screen” on page 114
Recording - See “Recording tab” on page 116
Transfer - See “Transfer” on page 120
Hardware - See “Hardware” on page 121
Reports - See “Reports” on page 122

General button
The General button contains the following tabs:
• General tab - Check and edit the recorder information here. Name, Description, ID and
Serial Number. The Media Life Calculations will work out the amount of time it will take
to fill the USB key, Compact Flash or SD card in the recorder. Select the size of the card
and calculations will be based on the current set up eg. how many pens are logging.
• Pens - Displays information for each pen available in the recorder. Including which pens
are enabled, logging type, rate, method and units of measure
• Groups - Displays groups of pens that can be renamed here
• Batch - Enable the batch information that is required before running a batch
• Credits - Displays all the Firmware options available in the recorder’s credit system
• Printer - This tab is used to set up the printer configuration
• Error Alert - Setup and customise the Alert box information.
Pens tab
Displays the details of each available pen on the recorder. From left to right this screen shows if the pen
is enabled, the Pen name, the Logging Type, logging Rate, logging Method and the Units of measure
for each pen.

Groups tab
This menu is used for re-naming the groups. The same pen can only be associated in one group. To add
a pen to a group see “Pens” on page 84.
You may want to create groups of pens in order to:
• Acknowledge Alarms by pen groups
• Reset Max/Min, Reset Max or Reset Min by pen groups
• Reset Counter Alarms by pen groups
• Start, Stop or Reset Totals by groups

Batch tab
Batch is a firmware option is a firmware option that needs to be activated in the recorder.
The Batch function allows the user to segment portions of data for further analysis. Setting up a batch
requires information to identify and control batches of data. Batch data can also be paused, for viewing,
and resumed. A batch can be aborted at any time, if so this will not register as a batch, a batch is only
complete when it has been stopped.
This Batch menu is the setup menu where you can configure all the Batch and Group properties before
starting a batch.
Concurrent Batch Mode
Batch mode allows concurrent batches, where each batch is associated with a group, so all pens within
Group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by Group 1. Screens can now be set to display
groups, in this mode only messages associated with that group (i.e. pens within that group, or batch
messages for that group) will be shown on the chart.
Remember when you have set up your batch requirements you need to assign pens to the batch group.
General Batch Properties - General

• Pause Chart@Finish - Enable this if you require the chart to be paused at the end of the
batch. The chart will restart when another batch is started for that group.
• Start Log @ Start - Enable this if you require logging to start when the batch starts.
• Batch logging control – Pen logging can be controlled by batch start and stop, the stop
and start logging can be independently controlled so a batch could start the pens logging
but choose not to stop them logging when the batch stops, or start logging independently
of a batch but have all pens stop logging when a batch stops. Only pens within the group
of the associated batch will be controlled.
• Stop Log @ Finish - Enable this if you require logging to stop when the batch ends. See
Start Log @ Start for details.
• Allow Direct Input - Enable this to allow the Batch control properties (listed below) to be
edited directly from the batch control screen. A barcode reader can be plugged into the
front of the recorder and the barcodes scanned in directly.
• Single Screen Batch (available for GR Series recorders only) allows you to view and
enter all the batch details on a single screen. If this is not selected the Batch Wizard will
enable separate screens to enter the same information. The batch fields are: Batch Name,
User Id, Lot Number, Description and Comment are available for viewing and entering
details on a single page using the Single Screen batch enabled, if disabled a separate
screen will be required for each field. The Lot number is unique for each batch on a
recorder and user cannot modify the Lot number. The Lot number starts at 1 and incre-
ments by 1. This is irrespective of whether the user is using Batch Wizard or Single
Screen Batch to enter the batch details. The user can also set the above fields except Lot
Number from a set of predefined list. Groups must be set up, see See “Pens” on
page 84.

NOTICE
List driven data fields – The next 5 fields are available for data entry associated with a batch. The
names can be overridden to suite the end user application, all fields are now 69 character long
with the exception of the User ID which is 32. A pre-defined list of up to 30 items can be config-
ured to allow users to select input for these fields from a list rather than type them in every time.
E.g. a user might have 8 different products running though the same process, these can be pre-
configured so when starting a batch the user can pick from a list of products. The pre-defined lists
have to be enabled in the individual group screen, eg. Show *** List.
A set of functions are available to retrieve the list index from within Maths, allowing state based
processing during user selection. See Table 13.7 on page 296.
Properties
• Name Props. - Enter the name of the batch name and setup a list of additional names to
appear as a pick list as a part of the Batch Control screen in the recorder.
• User ID Props. - Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch. The
User ID display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to
appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup. If Passwords are active on the
recorder then the User ID page will be skipped for user entry and the name of the person
logged in through the password system will be automatically entered.
• Field 1 Props. - Defaults to Lot No. Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a
new batch. The Lot number display name can be renamed and a list of additional names
can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup. The addition list
names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable
Show “n” List in the group properties menu. See “General Batch Properties- Group
#” on page 67.
• Field 2 Props. - Defaults to Description. Enable this to make this a requirement when
starting a new batch. The Description display name can be renamed and a list of addi-
tional names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup. The
addition list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless
you enable Show “n” List in the group properties menu. See “General Batch Proper-
ties- Group #” on page 67.
• Field 3 Props. - Defaults to Comment. Enable this to make this a requirement when start-
ing a new batch. The Comment display name can be renamed and a list of additional
names can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup. The addition
list names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you ena-
ble Show “n” List in the group properties menu. See “General Batch Properties-
Group #” on page 67.

General Batch Properties- Group #
Automated batch counters – Each group can maintain its own batch counter, this can be configured to
start at any desired value and be incremented by any set amount. The batch counter can be included in
the batch name which itself can contain additional information.
• Auto Pop. Wizard - When enabled this will automatically populate the Batch Control
screen with the properties entered into that specific Group.
• Auto Pop Name - This is the name of the group that will have it’s properties populate the
Batch Control screen
• Zero Pad Count - This refers to the amount of zeros that will be added to the embedded
batch counter. Eg. BATCH -2 -[[GC.000001]]. This has to have the same amount of digits
to accommodate the largest number the counter will reach, which will be the Rollover
value. If this is not enabled the leading zeros will not be shown.
• Ctr. Start - This refers to the number at which the batch counter will start.
• Ctr. Increment - This is how much the counter will increase or increment by.
• Ctr. Rollover - Enter the number at which you want the counter to reach before it starts
again.
• Show *name* List - (only appears when Auto Pop Wizard is off). Enable this to allow any
additional list item names to appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen. *See
below.
• Show *id* List - Enable this to allow any addition list item id’s to appear in a drop down list
in the Batch Control screen. *See below.
• Show *Field 1* List - Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 1 to appear in a
drop down list in the Batch Control screen. *See below.
• Show *Field 2*List - Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 2 to appear in a
• Show *Field 3* List - Enable this to allow any addition list item for Field 3 to appear in a
*Additional list items are entered in “General Batch Properties - General” on page 65. Ensure you
have the pens you require assigned to a group, see “Pens tab” on page 64.
At the bottom of the screen is the Ctr. Reset button, this will produce a warning dialog asking if you want
to reset group # counters.
When the configuration is complete select the Finish button to Commit, Discard or Commit Later. Select
the Back button to return to the previous menu.
Batch mode state and count in scripts, see “Maths Variable and Function Tables” on page 296.
Batch mode state and count in embedded variables, Table 6.6 on page 109.
Note: batch mode no longer operates on pens that do not belong in a group, so when upgrading to the
new version existing users need to add pens to a group to use the batch functionality

Credits tab
Displays a list of available firmware options. All options are shown as enabled for a new recorder setup.
When this set up is sent to the recorder only the firmware options enabled on the recorder will be active.
You cannot add or remove firmware credit options in TrendManager Software Suite .
When importing a setup from a recorder this screen will display the firmware credit options that are
active in the recorder.
Notes
Password CFR - (ESS - Extended Security System). This will only appear in the list on the recorder if this feature is
enabled in the recorder. It cannot be enabled by the firmware credit system - contact Honeywell for details.
Scripting, Fast Scanning and Custom Screens are not available for the eZtrend .
For software version R200 onwards Secure WSD will be enabled by default and no credits will be consumed. Check
the “About” section in the application software to determine the software version.
Printer tab
The Printer function is a firmware option that is selectable from the Factory menu in the record-
er. The screens on the recorder that currently can be printed are all Status screens, Message
lists, Process screens and Replay screens.
The printer network information should be entered prior to printing, see “Network Admin tab”
on page 101. If the information is not entered in the Network Admin menu a dialog box will ap-
pear prompting you to enter Username, Password and Domain. Entering this information into
the dialog will not populate the Network Admin menu. It is recommended that you fill in this
information into the Network Admin menu as it will not be affected by firmware upgrades in the
recorder.

The Printer menu allows configuration for setting up a printer. The printer option displays a
Print button from various screens using a basic USB standard PCL printer. For details on suit-
able printer types refer to the installation section of the User manual.
• Allow Printing - Tick to enable On and Off
• Paper Size - Toggles between A4 and Letter
• Orientation - Toggles between Landscape and Portrait
• Port Type - Toggles the type of connection used by your printer. The available port options
are USB and Network. In case of Network port the printer can be connected to the Ether-
net port of the recorder and Printer Name should be provided.
• Printer Name - Enter the printer name as found on the network. For a local printer that is
connected directly to the recorder via USB, ensure the printer name is set to the default
(LPT1:). Shared printers on a domain or work group require the network path to be
entered in the Printer name. The file path will contain the server name (this could be the
PC the printer is connected to or a print server) and the printer name.
Eg. \\PC or print server name\printername
• Protocol (PCL) - Select the protocol supported by the printer. The available PCL options
are PCL3 ,PCL3GUI and PCL5.
• Colour Printer - Tick if a colour printer is being used for the screen capture facility. Screen
captures can be printed as an Effect of an Event. See “Events - Cause and Effect” on
page 104.
• • Fit to Page - Tick if recorder screen printing to be stretched to Paper Size selected
If in doubt, contact your IT Administrator for advice.

Error Alert tab
A new alert system has been implemented to allow on screen alerts to be displayed for seri-
ous errors and for early warning on potentially serious issues like available media space.
When an alert is detected a large message box will be displayed on the screen, it has a flash-
ing border for which colours are user defined and will display the current error state. An
acknowledge button is available and a re-flash can be set to warn the user again if the error
condition is not rectified.
• Error Types - The following conditions are available to be enabled:
• • Network Unplugged (will detect hub/switch failure also)
• • Internal Memory Alarm – Display when internal memory is going to start over-
writing non-exported data within a defined period of time. Storage Alarm level
must be set.
• • Export Alarm – Where external media capacity will run out within a defined
period of time. Storage Alarm level must be set.
• • Media Missing – External media is missing so a scheduled export is not possible.
• • FTP Memory Low - Display when internal memory is going to start overwriting
non-FTP’d data within a defined period of time. Storage Alarm level must be set.
• • CJC Missing – CJC Sensor is not plugged into AI Card.
• • TC Burnout - A TC burnout has been detected.

Storage Alarm Levels need to be set as to when the system is alerted that the three differ-
ent memory areas as low. See “Storage Alarm” on page 117

• Border Colour - Use the on-screen colour palette to change the message border colour.
• Background Colour - Use the on-screen colour palette to change the message back-
ground colour.
• Auto Clear - When Auto clear is switched on the recorder will automatically detect if
something has been done to rectify the problem and the message will disappear. Eg. if the
removable external storage media being used for a scheduled export is full and is
replaced with media that has sufficient memory available then the error alert box will dis-
appear. If Auto Clear is switched off you will be required to press OK on the screen error
alert message
• Enable Reflash - If Reflash is enabled and a time set the error alert message will appear
again at the time specified until the error is resolved. With Reflash enabled pressing the
OK button on the recorder’s screen message will only make the message disappear until
the next reflash time occurs.
• Reflash Time - Set this to how often you want the error alert message to repeat until the
problem is solved.
Display alert as an event effect

This feature is available from within the event system where the Alert Display can be used as
an event effect to display a preset or user defined marker. See “Event Effects” on page 108.
Media Configuration tab

This menu contains the list of Storage media with Store and Load options.

Enable this option if you want to allow the user to access specified storage device or disable if you want
to restrict the user from accessing the device.
Load NAS, Save NAS- Only available if “ User Share Path” is enabled in the Network Admin Screen.
NOTE: If device is already configured for Scheduled Export or Report, then user will not be able to
restrict access to that device. For restricting access to that media device, user needs to go to Scheduled
Export or Report and change the Export device.
Field IO
When AMS2750 mode is enabled extra tabs will appear for added configuration. Listed under the Ana-
logue Inputs tab will be displayed Sensors" (only certain selections will be available).
Analogue In tab
Press the Analogues button to display all the analogue inputs available.
Click on the individual Analogue In number to set up each channel profile. Each channel has a list of
menu items to be configured.
• Enabled - Tick to Enable.
• Type - Select this for a list of available signal inputs:Volts, Amps and Ohms RT (Resist-
ance thermometer or TC (Thermocouple).
• Sample Rate - Select this for a list of available Analogue Input sample speeds. A Fast
Scanning range of 50Hz (20mS) is available as a firmware option (not available on the
eZtrend ). Refer to “Credits tab” on page 68 for Firmware options.
• Range (Ohms, Volts and Amps only) - Toggle between Preset and User Defined. The Pre-
set option will make available a list of Range Types or select User Defined to specify High
and Lower Limits.
• Range Type (Ohms, Volts and Amps only) - Only available when Range is set to Preset.
Select for a list of available ranges. The factory default range is +/-12V.
• Damp Level (Ohms, Volts and Amps only) - Damping filters for noise reduction to smooth
any significant or sudden change in the signal. Damping looks at the previous and current
readings, executes an algorithm depending on how large the difference is between the
two readings and then calculates a new position immediately. Damping is only enabled
when a thermocouple or RT is selected. Enter the Damp level in Engineering Units.

• Linearisation Tables (Ohms, Volts and Amps only) - Select a table from the drop down
list if required. See “Linearisation tab” on page 78.
• Use Pen Scale - Toggle On and Off, this is enabled by default. Analogue # defaults to the
corresponding Pen #, eg. A1 will default to Pen 1. If you change A1 to use another pen
scale eg.Pen 3, you must go into Pen 3 and change the maths to A1. This will ensure that
Pen Scale 3 will display A1 input. With this enabled the Engineering Zero and Span is the
same as the pen scale. Disable this and the Engineering Zero and Span will not reflect the
pen scale. This is not available when using Linearisation Tables.
• Units - This is the Units of Measurement for each input. Select and enter a value. Max 13
characters.
• Label - Select and enter an identification label for the input. Select and enter a label. Max
15 characters.
• SQRT Extract - Toggle On and Off. The Square root extraction in the analogue input is
used to linearise certain sensors that have a non linear output - for example in the calcula-
tion of flow. So when you check the Square root extraction in the Analogue input section it
carries out the following calculation. It ratios the analogue input range that you set, to 0 to
1. So any sensor input is represented by a number from 0 to 1. We then take the square
root. We then re ratio the result back to the user set range.
• Comp Type* - select from None, Single Point or Dual Point compensation.
Sensor Compensation may be required to improve accuracy on a sub range. This is an
adjustment to the value of the signal input on each channel, based on the Engineering
units settings.
Single Point

Set the Comp Type to Single Point to adjust the signal input reading by an offset amount
determined by the user. Enter the Eng Offset adjustment required and this is added or
subtracted for all future readings.
Dual Point
Select Dual Point to change two points on the signal input reading. The Dual Point adjust-
ment works in the same way but at two different points on the signal input. The two points
must be more than 50%, of the engineering units, away from each other.
• • Low Eng - Set the low limit for the engineering units.
• • Low Offset - enter an offset value that is offset against the low eng value.
• • High Eng - Set the high limit for the engineering units.
• • High Offset - enter an offset value that is offset against the high eng value.
• High Limit - Available when Range Type is set to User Defined. Select and enter the high
limit value.
• Lower Limit - Available when Range Type is set to User Defined. Select and enter the
lower limit value.
• RT Type - Only available when Type is set to RT (Resistance Thermometer). Select this
for a list of available RT types.
• Burnout Type - Only available when Type is set to TC (Thermocouple). Toggle between
Active and Passive. Active means it will send out a current to the TC. Set to Passive
means it takes a reading without sending out a current. The T/C is wired differently for
Active and Passive Burnout.
• Show Burnout - Only available when Type is set to TC. Toggle between Upscale and
Downscale Burnout.
• TC Type - Only available when Type is set to TC. Select this for a list of available TC
types.
• CJ Comp - Only available when Type is set to TC. Select this for a list of available CJ
Compensation.
• • Int Automatic - Uses the cold junction sensor in the recorder as a variable refer-
ence temperature
• • Ext 0 Deg C - Assumes the cold junction is held at 0°C to provide a 0mV reference,
external to the recorder
• • Ext with Spec Temp - Uses a reference junction held at a constant temperature.
Specify the temperature that the cold junction sensor id to be set at.
• • Ext Input - Use a thermocouple or resistance thermometer from another channel to
measure the cold junction sensor
• External Input - Only available when CJ Compensation is set to Ext Input. Select the
input required as an external input.
• Eng. Span - (Ohms, Volts and Amps only). Only available when not using “Use Pen
Scale” option. This is the highest value of the engineering range and corresponds to the
top of the input range. Select and enter a value using the on-screen keyboard.
• Eng. Zero - (Ohms, Volts and Amps only). Only available when not using “Use Pen Scale”
option. This is the bottom of the engineering scale and represents the bottom of the input
scale. Select and enter a value using the on-screen keyboard.

Analogue Out tab
Only available when a Analogue Output card is a part of the Setup. Press the Analogue Out button to
display all the analogue outputs available. Click on individual Analogue Out number to set up each
channel profile. Not available on the eZtrend .
• Enabled - Tick to enable.
• Overrange - Tick to enable, enabled as default. This will allow the output signal to go
overrange to 21mA, if disabled the maximum is 20mA.
• Transmit - Select a pen to output 4-20mA loop. This will take the scale value from the pen
it is transmitting and convert to 4-20mA output signal. eg if the scale is 0-50% this signal
will fit the scale so 4mA = 0% and 20mA =50%.
• Output - Select either 4-20mA or 0-20mA.
• Label - Select and enter an identification label. Select and use the on-screen keyboard.
Up to 16 characters.
Pulse In tab
Only available when a Pulse Input card is part of the Setup. The Pulse Input card operates up to a fre-
quency of 25kHz max. Not available on the eZtrend
If a Pulse input card is fitted the first 4 pens will display the maths function of HPULn in the Maths tab in
the Pens section as default to display the pulse reading.
Click on individual Pulse Input number to set up each channel profile.
• Enabled - Tick to Enable.
• Update Rate - Fixed at 1Hz
Label - Select and enter an identification label for the pulse input. Select and enter a label. Up to
16 characters.
Alarm/Digital IO tab
The Alarm/Digital IO button will display all the digital inputs/outputs available. Click on each individual
Alarm IO or Digital IO number to set up each channel profile.
2 types of Alarm Relay cards: 4 Alarm Relay Output card and an 8 Alarm Relay Output with 2 Digital
Inputs card.
2 types of Digital IO cards: 8 Digital Inputs or Outputs card and a 16 Digital Inputs or Outputs card.
(Not available for the eZtrend recorder)
Alarm Relay Card
4 Alarm relay output card or 8 Alarm relay Output with 2 Digital Inputs (6 fixed outputs
and 2 configurable Digital Input or output) cards.
Digital IO Card
There are 8 or 16 Digital channels per card that can be setup as inputs or outputs. The
Digital I/O card also has 4 channels that can be set as pulse inputs (channels 1 to 4). The
operating frequency for pulse inputs on the Digital I/O card is 1kHz max.
To view and log a channel selected as a Pulse input, set up an extra pen with a Maths function of
LPULn in Edit Maths in the Pens menu.

For all cards select each Alarm/Digital # to display the configuration. Each channel has a list of items to
be configured.
• Enabled - Tick to enable.
• Digital Type - This is set to Output Relay contact (Power) for the Alarm Relay cards. Tog-
gle between Input and Output or Pulse Input for the Digital IO card. On the 4 Relay Alarm
card, only output type is available. Channels 1 to 6 on the 8 Alarm Relay card are outputs,
channels 7 & 8 can be either inputs or outputs.
Note: Pulse Input only available on channels 1 to 4 for slot G, 14 to 20 for slot H and 33 to
36 for slot I.
• Output - (Output only). The relay outputs can be set to be either Latched or Single Pulse.
A Latched relay will be maintained in its active state until the trigger source has returned to
a non-alarm state. For Single Pulse the relay will go active for a period of time, specified
by the user, then return to a non active state. The time out period remains independent of
the length of time the active state remains. If the output is set to Single Pulse, when the
alarm is activated the signal will display a single pulse for the duration set. See Pulse
Duration. The alarm will trigger again when it goes into an active alarm state.
NOTICE
Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of a maths
expression as it can cause spurious values.

• Pulse Duration - (Output only). Available when Single Pulse is selected. Specify the pulse
length in seconds from 0.1 (100ms) to 6480 (108 minutes) in 0.1 second increments.
Select and enter the pulse length.
• Fail Safe- (Output only). Tick to enable. Each relay channel can be independently
selected with the fail safe option. This will invert the state of the relay output. With Fail
Safe Off, normally open (NO) relays have open contacts when the power is off, and open
contacts when there is no active alarm. The contacts will close when an associated alarm
goes active. With Fail Safe On, normally open relays have closed contacts when the
recorder is powered on and there are no open active alarms, and the contacts open with
an alarm active or when the power is removed..
Table 6.2 : Fail Safe Relay positions
Trendview recorder Relay Positions (no alarms active)
NO NC
Normal
Relay Output Power On Open Closed
States
Power Off Open Closed
NO NC
Failsafe
Relay Output Power On Closed Open
States
Power Off Open Closed
• Label - Select and enter an identification label. Select and enter a label. Up to 16 charac-
ters.
• Active Label - (Input and Output only). This is the label that is shown when an alarm
becomes active. Select and enter a label. Not available for Pulse Input. Up to 12 charac-
ters.
• Inactive Label - (Input and Output only). This is the label that is shown when an alarm
becomes inactive. Select and enter a label. Not available for Pulse Input. Up to 12 charac-
ters.
• Reports To - This will acknowledge the Alarm/Digital IO to a selected destination. Select

User message to add the Digital IO occurrence to the messages list only. Select Mark On
Chart to display the occurrence on a chart and to the messages list.

Linearisation tab
The Linearisation tab can be located as part of the Analogue In setup.
Linearisation Tables - To be used with Analogue Input type Volts, Amps or Ohms.
These are user defined tables that can be set up to allow a non-linear input signal to be dis-
played on the recorder. By entering a set of non-linear signal input values (X) into the lineari-
sation table, the recorder will use the table to generate linear output (Y) in engineering units,
to be displayed and/or log on the recorder.
• Select the next available table and rename it for ease of identification.
• Click on the Add button to insert the first line
• Click into the text entry boxes under the X and Y boxes and enter the required values (or
leave if your table starts at 0). The Signal Input (X) goes in the first column and the Engi-
neering units (Y) in the second column.
• To add more lines, click on a line and use the Insert Above and Insert Below buttons. To
add a line at the bottom, click on Add. To delete a line, click in the line and select Delete.
When you have finished your table it will be saved automatically.
Data Error box

If there is a mistake in the table a Data Error box will appear saying “Data line * is invalid”. This will
appear when you select another table or another function. The error box will indicate which line has the
error. There may be more than one error in the table, if so the data error message box will appear for
each error starting from the top line down going to the next as each error is fixed.
Linearisation Table examples

Figure 6.1 shows an example of a set of non linear signal inputs (X) and the required values
in engineering units (Y) that have been entered into a linearisation table. They would produce
the following curve.

Figure 6.1 Example of a 0-10V non-linear input signal
10
6
Y
(Eng. Units)
4
0
0 2 4 6 8 10
X
(Input Signal)
A straight line is drawn between each point, as shown by the continuous (red) line in Figure
6.1. For a more accurate curve, as shown by the dotted line (blue), add more data points into
the linearisation table.
If the full input range is greater than the range used in the linearisation tables then the signal
will carry on following the slope of the last two inputs. For example if we had a -50 to +50V
range and just used the 0 to 10V linearisation table then the signal would look like Figure
6.2.

Figure 6.2 Linearisation table used for part of the range
50
The last two points are used to
follow the slope for the rest of 40
the signal. 30
At the bottom of the 0-10V table
the last two inputs are X=0, Y=0 20
and X=2, Y=6. At the top of the
10
0-10V table the last two points
are X=8, Y=9.8 and X=10, 0
Y=10. Figure 6.2 shows these Y
last two inputs at the top and -10
bottom of the 0-10V signal.
-20
-30
-40
-50
-50 -40 -30 -20 -10 0 10 20 30 40 50

AMS2750 Furnace (Process and TUS)
Up to 6 furnaces or ovens can be configured and fed into one recorder. Furnaces 1 to 6 relate directly to
Groups 1 to 6 configured in the recorder. Select each furnace in turn and configure as required.
For Process Furnace set up and TUS Furnace set up the screens are similar, with a few additions to the
TUS Furnace, see below.
• Name - Name or tag used to identify this furnace. 40 characters of Alphanumeric.
• Manufacturer - Enter the manufacturer of the furnace.
• Model No. - Unique Model or Serial number of this furnace. 20 characters Alphanumeric
• Class - Enter the Furnace class, 1 to 6 numeric
• Mat. Type - Enter the type of material or load, Parts or Raw material furnace
• Shape - Furnace shape, rectangular, cylindrical or other (TUS mode only)
• Meas. Units - Furnace measurement units,Metres and millimetres or feet and inches. (TUS
mode only)
• Height, Width, Depth - Furnace dimensions dependent on shape (TUS mode only)
Note. these are the dimensions for the qualified working area
• Inst. Type - (A to E) Refer to AMS2750. (Process mode only)
• Into cycle at - used to define a temperature cycle for a certain number of uses. When the fur-
nace has reached the high temperature set here and then falls below the Low temperature set
in the menu below, this is a complete temperature cycle. Eg. Into cycle is set to 110 (can go
higher) in use, once it drops back to the Out of cycle set eg. Out of cycle is set to 90, the cycle
is complete.
• Out of cycle at - Set Out of cycle as explained above in Into Cycle.

AMS2750 Setpoint (TUS mode)
The configured setpoint or soak level, this is the level configured for each thermocouple configuration as
per AMS2750. Up to 6 setpoints can be configured individually as a part of a single survey. The set-
points must be done in an increasingly progressive order.
Select a Setpoint
• Enabled - Default is off. Check to enable.
• Setpoint - Enter the survey setpoint value as a temperature.
• Stable Soak Time - soak time for the actual survey period. Per AMS2750, the minimum survey
soak time is 30 minutes.
• Tolerance Override - Check to enable. This will become the working tolerance for the soak in
the TUS as opposed to the tolerance for the class.
• Tolerance - set a tolerance override temp value.
AMS2750 Furnace Stability Detection (TUS mode)

During the TUS the recorder starts to monitor all sensors for stability, all sensors must remain stable for
a minimum of 2 minutes in order to progress to “in soak, in stability” mode. no TC’s can drift by more
than “X” degrees within a 2 minute period for stability to be achieved” (X defaults to 0.5 Dec C). Refer to
the User manual for more details.
This time is determined by how you set up the stability parameters whether you base it on time or the
degree (temperature) variation
The tolerance/hysteresis of the soak stability detection can be adjusted to suite the user, this defines
how stability is determined in the soak.
Stability detect is measured in 3 ways.
1. Timeout, see below
2. Automated detection, see below
3. Manual stability, the user can determine when stability has been achieved and can use the manual
override button on the TUS screen to register stability.

• Timer Enable - Default is off. Check this to enable the Stability Detect Timer
• Time - (default 10 mins). Timer based stability, the system will be deemed stable after the
defined period of time that all TC’s remain within tolerance from the point at which they all
enter the soak band.
• Auto Enable - Default is off. Automatic stability, Stability will deemed to be achieved when all
TC’s are within tolerance band required for soak for class and no TC continues to change in
temperature by more than a user defined degree step between readings.
• Degree Change - This becomes enabled when Auto Enable is activated. Default is 0.5 degree
over 2 mins, looks for an amount of temperature drift on any TC.

Pens
Select the Pens tab to display all the pens available and the associated pen tabs, including:
General - Enter individual pen information. See “General tab” on page 84
Scales - Set up scale parameters for each pen. See “Scales tab” on page 85
Logging - Set up logging configuration for each pen. See “Logging tab” on page 86
Maths - Edit the maths or this particular pen. See “Maths tab” on page 87
Totals - Set up Totaliser settings for each pen. See “Totals tab” on page 89
Alarms - Set up the alarm profiles for each pen. See “Alarms tab” on page 91
RAV - This will display the Rolling Average for this pen. See “RAV” on page 93
General tab
• Enabled - Tick to enable
• Tag - Select and use the on-screen keyboard to type in an identifier for the pen. Up to 48
characters.
• Description - (Screen Designer screens only) Enter a screen description in this field that
will then be displayed on the Screen Designer screen.
• Group - This pen can be allocated to a group of pens. If you select a group here this pen
will be added to it. The group can then be renamed, to rename these groups, see
“Groups tab” on page 65. The AMS2750 screen has a group name selection where
you can select the groups 1 to 6. Screen setup is done in the recorder. Groups 1 to 6
relate directly to furnaces 1 to 6.
• Line Options - Select and set the Trace Width for this pen when it is displayed on a chart.
The default trace width is 1 with a maximum of 7.
• Change Colour - Each Pen has a Default Pen Colour but this can be changed if
required. Select and use the colour palette to set the pen colour.

Scales tab
Individually configure each scale per pen in the scale menu. Select a pen from the list of available pens.
• Scale Type - Select this for a list of available scale types; Linear or Logarithmic (Log).
• Units - Scale measurement Units. Select this and enter the units. Up to 16 characters.
• Zero - This is the bottom of the scale. Select and enter a Zero value.
• Span - This is the highest value of the scale. Select and enter the Span value.
• Divs Select - Only available with Linear Scale Type. Toggle between Auto or User
Defined.
• Major Divs - Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined. Select and enter
the major division position.
• Minor Divs - Only available when Divs Select is set to User Defined. Select and enter
the minor division position.
• Start Decade - Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log. Select and enter the
start value of the first decade.
• No. Decades - Only available when the Scale Type is set to Log. Select and enter the
number of decades required. Max 99 decades (although not all will be displayed).
• Number Format - Displays the Notation of the number format, Scientific or Normal.
• Notation - Toggle between Scientific or Normal number format.
• Auto - Toggle between Auto and User Defined.
• After Decimal - Only available when User Defined is selected. Select and enter the
number of decimal places. (up to 15 decimal places)

Logging tab
Click on Logging to set up each logging profile per pen..
• Enabled - Tick to activate or de-activate logging for this pen.
• Type - Toggles between Continuous or Fuzzy logging.
• • Continuous logs every value based on the Method chosen (Sample, Average or
Max/Min).
• • Fuzzy Logging has been developed as a secure data storage technique which has
a self teaching data storage algorithm so the recorder stores data at a variable rate
to match the process being monitored. Fuzzy Logging has intelligent resources to
enable the most effective and efficient way of using the scan rate, storage capacity
and recording time.
• Rate Units - Set the Units for the logging rate to be displayed. Select and choose the log-
ging rate units from the drop down menu.
• Rate (***) - This is the speed at which data is required to be logged. If the Millisecond
option is selected as the Rate Units for the logging, then a drop down menu of options will
appear. When all other Rate Units are selected a keypad will appear for user entry. Fast-
est rate is 20mS and slowest is 60 hours.
• Alarm Rate Units - Set the Units for the Alarm Rate Logging to be displayed. Select and
choose the alarm logging rate units from the drop down menu.
• Alarm Rate - This is the new logging rate used when this pen goes into an active alarm
state. To enable this feature to change the logging rate in an alarm state, see Change Log
in the Alarms menu. Change Log must be active in the Alarms tab.
If the Millisecond option is selected as the Alarm Rate Units for the logging, then a drop
down menu of options will appear. When all other Alarm Rate Units are selected a keypad
will appear for user entry.
• Method - Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous. Select from a list of
Methods.
• • Sample: logs the last sampled reading.
• • Average: logs the average of all the samples taken since the last log.
• • Max/Min: logs the highest and the lowest of the sampled readings since the last log.

• Align - Only available if the logging Type is set to Continuous. Select and enter a value
from the list to align the logging at specified intervals. This will hold the start of logging
until the aligned time selected occurs based on the recorders real time clock.
• PreTrigger - activate pre-triggering for that pen, any alarm on that pen will cause the pre-
trigger system to be activated. Only the first 16 pens can be configured for pre-triggering.
For details on the Pre-Trigger function and configuration for the pre-trigger time is held in
the recording menu in the setup configuration, see “Pre-Trigger” on page 118.
The alarm rate for each pen will be used for the pre trigger rate. The alarm rate must be
set to less than 10 seconds per sample for pre-triggering to operate.
Pre trigger will only operate when the logging is in continuous sample mode, pre-triggering
will not be available with fuzzy logging or MaxMin.
• Auto Fit - Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy. Toggles On and Off. AutoFit
ensures that the last sampled data point is logged before the signal goes out of the toler-
ance set in Band 1 or Band 2. When displayed on a graph, the input signal will automati-
cally fit to this last logged point. This gives a better fit for stepped input changes.
• Band 1 % - Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy. This is where the tolerance
is set for the input signal. Specify, as a percentage of the scale range, the tolerance band
allowed above and below the input signal. Select and enter a value.
• Fuzzy Band 2 - Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy. Toggles On and Off.
This is to enable a second tolerance to be set, configure it to be On to activate. Only used
in conjunction with Autofit On, to specify the Band 2 %.
• Band 2 % - Only available if the logging Type is set to Fuzzy. This is where a tighter toler-
ance can be specified which must be set within the limits of Band 1. Specify, as a percent-
age of the scale range, the tolerance band allowed above and below the input signal.
Select and enter a value.
Maths tab
Analogue signals may have a mathematical calculation performed on them before they are represented
as a pen. Basic Maths is standard in all recorders. Full Maths or Scripting are options that must be
activated in the recorder.
• Maths Type - Analogue signals may have a mathematical calculation performed on them
before they are represented as a pen. Basic Maths is standard in all recorders. Full Maths
and Scripting are Firmware credit options that must be activated in the recorder. If your
recorder setup has Full Math or Scripting enabled basic maths is disabled.
• Edit Maths - Edit the Maths for this particular pen. If a Pulse input card is fitted the first 4
pens will display the maths function of HPULn as default to display the pulse reading. For
details see “Appendix B - Maths Expressions for X & GR Series Recorders” on
page 295.

Maths expressions can be applied to extra pens. Up to 12 extra pens are available on the eZtrend
QXe, , 16 for the Minitrend QX, and up to 48 extra pens on the Multitrend SX, and DR
Graphic recorder. Go to the credits tab to check if the recorder has any extra pens.

Totals tab
To use the Totals option on the recorder it must be enabled as a firmware credit option.
FIGURE 6.1 Totals tab set to Normal
For example the Totaliser function is associated with flow monitoring applications. The input to the
recorder would be a measure of flow rate (ie. In litres per second) and the total amount that has flowed
over a specified time period. Multiple totalisations are possible with the use of extra pens (firmware
Credit option). Totalisation values are 10 digits plus exponent.
Select a pen from the list.
• Enabled - Tick to activate or de-activate totalising for this pen.
• Type - Select this for a list of Types of totalising. Normal or Sterilisation. Normal totaliser
function is usually associated with flow monitoring applications. See “Sterilisation varia-
tions” on page 90.
Sterilisation* is where items are subjected to heat over a period of time. Each pen can be
totalised according to the Fo or Po sterilisation* function at 250 °F (121.11°C). The Stand-
ard Reference Temperature and Thermal Resistance (Z Value) are adjustable. All temper-
ature limits are adjustable. Start temp, Reference temp and Z factor are all user defined,
allowing support for many different types of sterilisation applications. See “Sterilisation”
on page 91.
• Tag - Select and enter an identifier for the pen. Up to 17 characters.
• Add to Msgs - Toggles On and Off. Select this to add a totaliser to the messages screen.
• Units - Normal Totaliser only. This is the Units of Measurement for the totaliser. Select
units from the drop down menu or click in the Units window and type in text. Click on Add
Units to add your units to the list, up to 12 characters.

• Time Factor - Normal Totaliser only. Time factor – Totaliser adds a value once per second,
so you need to Divide by this factor. For example:
If your flow meter is in units/second Time factor is 1.
If your flow meter is in units/minute, the unit will DIVIDE by the time factor, in this case 60
– so every 1 second, 1/60th of the unit is added.
If your flow meter is in units/hour, the unit will DIVIDE by the time factor, in this case 3600
– so every 1 second, 1/3600th of the unit is added.
• Unit Factor - Normal Totaliser only. The Totaliser adds the engineering unit from the
instrument, onto the total (after the time factor is applied). You then need to Divide by the
unit factor. For example:
If your flow meter is in litres/time and you want to Totalise in litres – there is 1 litre in
1 litre, so your unit factor would be 1, so every 1 second 1/1 unit is added.
If your flow meter is in litres/time and you want to Totalise in Cubic meters – there
are 1000 litres in 1 cubic meter, so your unit factor would be 1000, so every 1 sec-
ond 1/1000th of a unit is added.
• No Backflow - Normal Totaliser only. If the flow reading should go into a negative value,
eg. The flow meter has been switched off, and “No Backflow” is inactive, the totaliser will
subtract from the total value. When “No Backflow” is active any negative values are
ignored and the total value is held while the flow meter is off until the backflow level is
exceeded.
• Backflow Level - Only active when No Blackflow is set. Set the level at which totalising
will stop if the signal flow goes below this limit and if the No Backflow option is active.
• Restrict Range - Normal Totaliser only. Toggles On and Off. When active this will allow
access to the Min and Max Ranges to be set.
• Min. Range - Normal Totaliser only. Only available when Restrict Range is active. Select
and enter the minimum limit for the totals to range from.
• Max. Range - Normal Totaliser only. Only available when Restrict Range is active. Select
and enter the maximum limit for the totals to range from.
• Notation - Toggle between Scientific or Normal number format.
• Auto - Toggle Between Automatic number formatting and User Defined.
• Use Remainder - If the total exceeds the maximum scale limit, the total will reset to the
minimum limit. When Use Remainder is active, it will carry over any amount in excess of
the maximum scale limit.
• After Decimal - Only available when User Defined is selected. Select and enter the
number of decimal places. (up to 15 decimal places)
Sterilisation variations
• Temp Input Units - For Sterilisation Type, select the temperature input units.
• Start Temperature - For Sterilisation, select the Start Temperature.
• Reference Temp. - For Sterilisation, select the Reference Temperature.
• Z Factor Temp. - For Sterilisation, select the Z factor temperature
• Include Cooling - For Sterilisation, Include Cooling if required
• Completion Value - For Sterilisation, if cooling is not required, enter a Completion Value.

Sterilisation
*Specification for Sterilisation. The definition Fo/Po is the sterilisation/pasteurisation time in minutes
required to destroy a stated number of organisms with a known z at temperature T. For example, "F18/
250" represents the time in minutes required to destroy a stated number of organisms at a temperature
of 250F (121.11C) with a z = 18 degrees F. F values are used to compare the sterilizing values of differ-
ent processes, however, F values cannot be compared unless the z values are the same. When temper-
ature is not specified (for example, F = 8.6) it is understood that the temperature is 250F (121.11C); the
subscript O (as in the term Fo = 7.4) is used to indicate that the z = 18 degrees F and the temperature is
250F (121.11C)
Alarms tab
Select from the list of available pens in the window. You will be setting up alarms on this pen only.
Select the first available alarm eg. Alarm 1 and configure each alarm as required for each pen.
When an alarm has been configured an Alarm Marker or Pen Pointer will appear on the
recorder for each alarm depending on the type of process screen.
• Enabled - Select Enable to see a list of ways to enable or disable the alarm. Disable, Ena-
bled Always or Dig Enabled.
• Enabled by Digital - Only available when Enabled is set to Dig Enabled. Select and
choose which digital signal(s) will enable this alarm (on this pen only).
• Type - Select this to display a list of different types of Alarms. High, Low, Deviation, Rate
Up or Rate Down. Set a High alarm to activate when the signal goes above the Alarm
Level, or set a Low alarm to activate when the signal goes below the Alarm Level. Devia-
tion is the how far this pen can deviate from the Ref Pen before triggering an alarm. See
Deviation Level and Ref Pen.

Rate Up and Rate Down Alarms are used to trigger an alarm when the signal changes a
defined amount over a specified time. See Deviation Level and Time Period.
• Level - Select and enter a figure at which the alarm is to be triggered.
• Deviation Level - Only available when Alarm Type is set to Deviation, Rate Up or Rate
Down. Select and use the numeric keypad to enter the amount of deviation (in engineering
units). For Deviation enter the amount of deviation allowed on a designated pen (Ref Pen)
before an alarm is triggered.
For Rate Up and Rate Down enter, as a percentage, how far the signal can deflect before
an alarm is triggered. rate Up and Rate Down are tied to a time period and it doesn’t stand
alone - it is a rate of increase or decrease.
• Ref Pen - Only available when the alarm Type is set to Deviation. Select and enter the pen
that this alarm is referenced to. This works like an actual pen that dynamically tracks a
designated pen.
• Time Period - (Only available when the Alarm Type is set to Rate Up or Rate Down).
Enter (in seconds) how long the signal is allowed to deviated, at the specified deviation
level, before an alarm is triggered.
• Tag - Enter a Tag or name to identify this alarm. Up to 17 characters.
• Allow Change - If activated this will allow quick configuration changes to this alarm level
from the alarm button found in the top menu bar on a process screen in the recorder, with-
out having to enter the setup. This does not change the original setup.
• Relays Out - Select and choose which Relay Output(s) is triggered by this alarm (on this
pen only). The Fixed button will use the common relay output on the power board (24V
relay).
• Latched - A latched alarm will maintain in its active state until the trigger source has
returned to a non-alarm state and the alarm has been acknowledged. A latched alarm will
continue to flash, if an alarm marker or pen pointer is displayed, until it is acknowledged
and in a non-alarm state. A Reflash option is available to keep the alarm flashing whilst in
an alarm state even after it has been acknowledged. See Reflash.
• Change Log - Toggles On and Off. Select this to change the Log speed when an alarm
occurs. The Log rate changes when alarm is active and stays at the alarm rate for as long
as the alarm is active then returns to the normal logging rate. Set up the new alarm log-
ging rate in Alarm Rate in the Logging Tab.
• Mark Chart - Toggles On and Off. Selecting On will place a Mark on the Chart with auto-
mated messages when the alarm becomes active.
• Email Alarm - Enable this to send an email when any alarm is triggered on this pen.
This function is a firmware option that is activated in the recorder.
• Set/View Recipients - Only available when email has been enabled. Select your recipi-
ents from the list provided. Email addresses and Server names must be entered in “Email
tab” on page 97.
• Hysteresis - (not available for Deviation). Toggles On and Off. When this is activated, you
can set a tolerance level for an alarm. It allows a specific percentage value of the span of
the scale to be added to the alarm level.
• Hyst Level % - (not available for Deviation alarm). Enter as a percentage of the span of
the scale. This is how much tolerance the signal can have past the set alarm activation
point until the alarm is de-activated.
• Damping - Toggles On and Off. When switched On, the alarm level must be breached for
a specific period of time before an alarm is triggered. Damping works going into alarm
only.
• Damping Time - Set the amount of Damping Time in seconds

• Reflash - Toggles On and Off. Activate this to re-enable an active alarm that has been
acknowledged. Set the Reflash Time.
• Reflash Time - Only enabled when Reflash is active. Set the time period after the alarm
has been acknowledged for the alarm to reflash if it is still in an alarm state.
Up to 144 integral “soft” alarm set points are available for the eZtrend, 192 for the Minitrend and 576
for the Multitrend and DR Graphic recorder (6 per pen).
RAV
This will display the Rolling Average for this pen. The recorder takes an average of the number of sam-
ples entered.
• Enable the RAV function
• Number of Samples. For example a 1 hour rolling average made up of 1 minute averages
it would be 60 seconds per sample with 60 samples, and you can increase the time span
accordingly, so 1440 samples at 60 seconds per sample would give you a 24 hour rolling
average made of 1 minute averages.
• Sample Interval, or how often a reading is taken, in seconds.
• Prefill works as follows, if you setup a 60 sample rolling average a 10 second samples
that will create a 10 minute rolling average, with each sample being accumulated as an
average from the current recorder processing rate (10Hz say), so each 10 second sample
is added to a queue of 60 samples, and each 10 seconds the new rolling average is calcu-
lated. The prefill simply takes the current pen value and fills the queue with that average,
causing the "damping" effect to be baselined at the current reading. No prefill will cause
the first few samples to have a greater effect on the average, as they will not be diluted by
60 samples but 1, 2, 3, 4 up to 60 after the 10 minutes.
Comms
• Modbus - Communications protocol for Ethernet and RS485.
• Web - Browse your recorder using the web browse feature. See “Web tab” on page 97.
• Email - Setup email accounts to send alarm and event information. See “Email tab” on
page 97.
• SNTP - Simple Network Time Protocols is a protocol for synchronising the clocks of
computer systems and other devices over ethernet networks. See “SNTP tab” on
page 98.
• TCP/IP - Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A protocol for communica-
tion between computers, recorders and other devices. See “TCP/IP tab” on page 99.
• Network Admin - Network Admin is required for printers on a network and shared
or work group printers. See “Network Admin tab” on page 101.
• FTP - File Transfer Protocol. Used to transfer data to and from the recorder. See “FTP
tab” on page 101.
• Peer to Peer - Sets up the recorder to be identified on a network. See “Peer to Peer
tab” on page 102.

Modbus tab
Modbus can be used with RS485 or Ethernet ports. The Modbus protocol defines a message structure
that controllers will recognise and use, regardless of the type of network over which they communicate.
(RS485 is a hardware option for the eZtrend QXe recorder).
.
FIGURE 6.2 Modbus Master Configuration
Modbus Master Communications

The recorder can communicate with up to 32 slave devices on both RS485 and/or Ethernet at a maxi-
mum poll rate of 1 second (slowest 1 hour). Each slave up to 8 “transactions” can be performed where a
transaction can retrieve 1 or more registers from a slave or send one or more Pens to a slave.
Access to slave registers within the maths function has been provided using scv[x,y,z] where x = Slave
number, y = Transaction Number, and z is the each successive register retrieved starting from 1.
The Modbus master can be used in conjunction with the Modbus slave functionality of the recorder, or
OPC to enable the recorder to act as a communications bridge. Data from the slaves connected to a
Modbus master is made available as a map on the slave side of the Modbus master; this allows another
master to get access directly to another master’s slaves data without the master having to re-process
that information. Or a Modbus master can process the data and expose it to the network as its own pens
in Modbus or OPC.
Modbus master must be enabled as a firmware option and requires Full Maths or Scripting to assign
values to a pen, see See “Credits tab” on page 68.
Refer to Modbus communication application notes on your CD or on our website

Other Master Master
RS485 to TCP/IP Slave network
TCP/IP
Slave
Refer to the Modbus Master Installation Instructions that are on the CD to help set up various Honeywell
devices to talk to the recorder. (43-TV-33-89 - 43-TV-33-102).
Master
• Enabled - Toggle On to make this recorder a Master device
• Poll Rate - Enter a time period in seconds of how often there is a request for data
• Legacy Ethernet - Tick this to connect to Honeywell V5 recorders.
Slave 1 ..32 - Up to 32 slaves can be setup per master device. Setup each Slave in turn starting
with number 1.
• Enabled - Toggle On to enable Slave #
• Friendly name - Enter a name to easily identify this slave device
• ID - This is to connect to slave ID
• Port - Select this for a list of available ports, either Ethernet or RS485. For port configura-
tion see “Ports” on page 101.
• Network Name - (Ethernet only). Enter the recorders IP address or the Network name,
eg. xs-nnnnnn, where nnnnnn is the recorder’s 6-digit Serial number. See “TCP/IP tab”
on page 99 for the recorder’s IP address and serial number.
• Protocol - Select this for a list of available protocols. Modbus or Modbus X*. Modbus and
Modbus X can both use Ethernet or RS485 Ports. Protocols define the format in which the
data is transferred from the recorder to a PC or transfer between other devices and
peripherals. FPLB – Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format & FP B - Floating
Point Big Endian Format are standard notations.
• Static - Transaction 1 ..8 is a request for a register or set of contiguous registers
• • Enabled - Toggle On to enable the first transaction request
• • Direction - Direction for the data to flow; In to or Out from the recorder
• • Command - This is the type of Registers used by the slave device. Refer to the indi-
vidual memory map for the register type used for each type of device.
• • Data Type - Refer to individual memory maps for each type of device to determine
the type of data. Eg. signed 16-bit int, unsigned 16-bit int or IEEE float. X Series
and GR Series devices use IEEE float.

• • Dec.Start Addr. - This is the register address number to start the transaction from
• • No. Of Items - Enter the number of items from the start address that are included in
the transaction. For example displayed here will be:
10 SCV[1,1,1] - [1,1,10].
This means the transaction will take 10 items from the start address with a Serial
Comms variable of Slave [1], Transaction [1], Register [1] - to Slave [1], Transaction
[1], Register [10].
*Modbus X - Modbus X protocol differs from standard Modbus by the 4 floating point order that is
reversed for application compatibility.
Slave
• Enabled - Toggle On to make this recorder a Slave Device
• Port - Select this for a list of available ports, either Ethernet or RS485. For port configu-
ration “Ports” on page 101.
• Protocol - Select this for a list of available protocols. Modbus or Modbus X*. Modbus and
Modbus X can both use Ethernet or RS485 Ports. Protocols define the format in which the
data is transferred from the recorder to a PC or transfer between other devices and
peripherals. FPLB – Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format & FP B - Floating
Point Big Endian Format are standard notations.
• Slave ID - This is a unique Modbus ID/Address used by the recorder to identify Modbus
messages. Applications that talk to the recorder with Modbus will need to know this
number to return messages to the device. If you are using the Communication Server on
TrendServer Pro the same Slave ID number must be entered. (1-254)
*Modbus X - Modbus X protocol differs from standard Modbus by the 4 floating point order that is
RS485
• Baud Rate - (Only available when the RS485 port in selected). Select this for a list of
available Baud Rates. This is the speed, in bps (bits per second), at which data is trans-
ferred.
• Byte Options - (Only available when the RS485 port is selected). Select this button for a
list of available Byte Options. The Byte Options consist of 3 digits comprising of Parity (set
to None N, Even E or Odd O), 8 Data Bits and Stop Bits, signifying the end of the charac-
ter string, 1 or 2. The default is N-8-1 which means no parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit.
This is currently the only byte option supported by Comms Server.
• Line Turn Around - (Only available when the RS485 port in selected). This is for a 2-wire
line type. Data has to be fully transmitted before the line can be turned-around and data
can be received, or vice versa.
• Reply Delay - (Only available when the RS485 port in selected). Enter a delay time, in
milli seconds, before the recorder sends a reply. Recommended delay should be set to
12mS (min.) if using the Comms Server.
To check communications connections and trouble shooting network settings versus SCV
parameters go to the recorder menu Status > Diagnostics > Comms. This screen will help to
identify which area to focus on if the recorder connections are not doing what you expected.

Web tab
The Web browse function is enabled/disabled from the recorder. Select this to enable and allow the
recorder to be browsed on a web page. Internet access is required. The Web function is password pro-
tected if passwords are enabled. For web browsing information refer to the recorder user manual. The
recorder must have the Remote View option active which is a firmware credit option.
Email tab
Set up this email menu in order to send emails for the following:
When an Alarm is triggered
As an Effect of an Event occurring, such as:
• Alarms – In to, Out of or Acknowledged
• Totaliser – Start, Stop or Reset
• Digital Inputs – On, Off or State change
• TC Burnout – on a specific Analogue Input channel
• Scheduled Events – Once, Interval, Specific days, Month End.

For more information on setting up events that will send emails, see “Events/Counters” on
page 103.

• Server Name - Enter your server name that will handle the transfer of the emails. Ask your
IT Admin for the server details. One method of finding this information is to go to Microsoft
Outlook, Tools, Email Accounts, select “View or change existing email accounts”. Select
your email server from the box eg. Microsoft Exchange Server and click on the Change
button. The server name you require is displayed in the Exchange Server Settings dialog.
Enter this name exactly using the on-screen keyboard.
If in doubt, contact you IT Administrator for advice on entering Server name requirements.
• Authentication - Enables/Disables the Username and Password which may or may not
be required by the server. Check with your IT Admin.
For network printers and drivers, if you intend to connect the recorder on a Micro-
soft network administered as a domain, you may have to authenticate the
recorder as a user with sufficient permissions to use the resources that you want
(network printer, network drive). Usually, several devices (computers or record-
ers) can be authenticated on the same network with the same name.
• Username - Enter your Network Logon Username, this may include your Domain Name
• Password - Enter your Password associated with your user name. If you have a
system where the log in password expires and requires you to change it periodi-
cally, you will need to update the logon password in the recorders when you are
forced to change your PC password.
• User Address - Your Network Email Address. (or this could be a generic name used
to identify the recorder). No spaces!
• Recipients - Enter up to 12 email addresses of the destination you want the email to be
sent to.
• Port – Email port number can be configured.
• Templates - These are user defined templates containing email text. If you require stand-
ard text to be sent out in an email then set them up here and give it a template name.
These templates can be used with the events function to send an email as an effect of an
occurrence. See “Events/Counters” on page 103.
• Subject - add a subject heading (up to 50 characters), this will appear as the heading for
your email.
• Message Body - Default to Empty Email. Click in here to open the Email text box.
Type into the message body text box up to 80 characters per line and up to 100 lines of
text can be entered including Embedded Process Values. This will include specific pen
data to your email. The template can be used as a part of the event function to email infor-
mation to a recipient using maybe using a Schedule also set up in the Events menu. See
“Events/Counters” on page 103.
SNTP tab
Simple Network Time Protocol is a protocol for synchronising the clock on the recorder with a Net-
work Server.
• Server Enable - Tick to enable. Activate this to make this recorder the server. Other
recorders, set up as Clients, can synchronise their time to this server recorder.
• Client Enable - Tick to enable. Activate this to set this recorder to synchronise time with
the server. Figure 6.3 on page 99.
• Server Name - Only available when Client Enable is active. This is the name of the Net-
work Server that can be used for time synchronisation. Enter the server name to be used
for time synchronisation (this could be a Time Server on the internet or on your network).
If a recorder is acting as the server, the client recorders must have the recorder’s network

name as the Server Name (up to 32 characters). This is “xs- nnnnnn” where “nnnnnn” is
the 6 digit serial number of the recorder.
• Period - Only available when Client Enable is active. Select and enter the time period in
seconds required between checking and updating the time. This will default to 120 sec-
onds. X Series recorders have a period limit of 60 to 3600 seconds, GR-Series
recorders have a period limit of 600 to 3600 seconds.
• Threshold - Only available when Client Enable is active. This is a specified amount of
time (in seconds) that the recorder clock must be within to ensure synchronisation with the
network server. Eg. if set to 3600 the recorder time must be within 1 hour of the network
server to ensure time sync will take place.
FIGURE 6.3 Network Server and Client/Server recorders
Client/Server Network
Figure 6.3 shows a Network Server (PC) at the top, a recorder acting as both a server and a client in
the middle and a string of client recorders at the bottom. A recorder can be set up to be a server and a
client. Setting it as both means this recorder will synchronise time with the network server. But will also
allow other recorders to time sync with it. This saves many recorders trying to time sync with the net-
work server.
TCP/IP tab
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol.
A protocol for communication between computers, recorders and other devices.
• Static IP - Tick to enable. This is an IP Address which is the same every time. With this
feature Off, the recorder’s IP address is created dynamically using a DHCP Server. with
this feature On the IP address can be fixed by entering a known available IP address
below.
• IP Address - (Available when Static IP is On). This is an identification address for commu-
nications between two devices. The IP Address identifies a specific recorder. When a
recorder setup is loaded the IP address will be transferred.
• Sub Net Mask - (Available when Static IP is On). Acts as a filter when identifying an IP
address

• Gateway - (Available when Static IP is On). A configuration parameter transmitted to each
network device
• DNS/WINS/MDNS - Set to Automatic, click on this to activate and de-activate options.

DNS = Domain Name System, WINS = Windows Internet Name Service, MDNS = Man-
aged Data Network Services.
Available when setting DNS/WINS/MDNS
Automatic DNS Names

The recorder will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number. The for-
mat is xs-nnnnnn, where nnnnnn is the serial number of the recorder. This allows you to
locate the recorder for browsing if you are using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
DNS/WINS/MDNS
Defaults to Automatic, select Set to activate the options. DNS = Domain Name System, WINS = Win-
dows Internet Name Service, MDNS = Managed Data Network Services. When complete select Done.
• Auto DNS - This is a sub menu for DNS/WINS/MDNS. Tick to activate. With this deacti-
vated the DNS Server address can be changed from the default, if required.
• Pri. DNS Address - This is a sub menu for DNS/WINS/MDNS. Only available when Auto
DNS is deactivated.
• Sec. DNS Address - This is a sub menu for DNS/WINS/MDNS. Only available when Auto
DNS is deactivated.
• Auto WINS - This is a sub menu for DNS/WINS/MDNS. Tick to activate. With this deacti-
vated the Windows Internet Name Service can be changed from the default, if required.
• Pri. WINS Address - This is a sub menu for DNS/WINS/MDNS. Only available when Auto
WINS is deactivated.
• Sec. WINS Address - This is a sub menu for DNS/WINS/MDNS. Only available when
Auto WINS is deactivated.

• Auto MDNS - This is a sub menu for DNS/WINS/MDNS. Tick to activate. This will deacti-
vate the Managed Data Network Services.
Ports
Defaults to 80, 502, select Set to activate the options. The port settings are associated with the IT sys-
tem in use. Port settings are set to a default but can be changed by the user to allow data traffic to use
a specified port. When complete select Done.
• HTTP - HyperText Transport Protocol is the communications protocol that enables Web
browsing. Select and enter the desired port number if required.
• Modbus - communications protocol used for automation applications. Select and enter the
desired port number if required.
Network Admin tab

This must be set up to ensure network printing can be performed without being prompted for this infor-
mation each time you want to print. This information will remain after a firmware upgrade.
Network Admin is required for printers on a network and shared or work group printers.
Shared or work group printers must contain the correct file path, see “Printer tab” on
page 68.
• Username - Enter your network Logon/Username
• Password - Enter you Network Password. For a local printer connected directly to the
recorder via USB no domain is required. Ensure the printer name is set to the default
(LPT1:), see “Printer tab” on page 68.
• Domain - For network printers enter your network domain. No domain is required for Local
printers connected directly to the recorder via USB.
If in doubt, contact you IT Administrator for advice on entering Network Admin requirements.
FTP tab
File Transfer Protocol
This is a method of transferring data and setups to and from TrendManager Software Suite and
the recorder.
• Enabled - Tick to enable FTP transfer
• Allow Upload - Tick to allow FTP transfer and Secure Communication Interfacefrom
TrendManager Software Suite to the recorder.
• Allow Download - Tick to allow FTP transfer and Secure Communication Interface from
the recorder to TrendManager Software Suite .
• Log Messages - Tick to add a message to the messages list when an FTP transfer is per-
formed
• Mark Chart - Can only be active when Log Messages is enabled. Tick to mark the chart
when an FTP transfer is performed.
Refer to the Communications section in the User manual and “Importing via FTP or Secure
Communications Interface” on page 175 for setting up FTP transfer.

Peer to Peer tab
The Peer services communication function sets up the recorder so it can be recognised on a network
containing X Series and GR recorders. This means that multiple recorders will be able to discover
other recorders on the same local network in order to share data between them. For example basic unit
information such as firmware version, recorder name and network identity. This will be used mainly with
the Trend Server software to allow discovery of recorders in order to transfer data via FTP or Mod-
bus.
• Enabled - tick to enable
• Set Number – Default to set 1, this should not have to be changed unless a lot of record-
ers are being used on the same network.
• Start Port - Default port number 8955
• End Port- Default port number 8970

The port numbers have been specially selected for this type of network communications. It is
recommended that the ports are not changed unless specifically requested by your IT net-
work administrator. If this is changed on the recorder it must also be changed on all other
recorders, TrendServer and Comms Server.
OPC UA tab
The OPC UA (Unified Architecture) server function sets up the recorder so that OPC UA cli-
ents can connect to it to access data made available in the recorder’s address space. OPC
UA is a platform independent service-oriented architecture that integrates all the functionality
of the individual OPC Classic specifications into one extensible framework.
When the OPC UA server is enabled, OPC UA clients can easily connect to the recorder’s
OPC UA server, and subsequently monitor/subscribe to recorder data.

• Enabled- Tick to enable.
• Port – Default port number for the OPC UA server is 4840

The default port number corresponds to OPC UA’s registered port number with IANA (Inter-
net Assigned Numbers Authority), and is a standard default used by clients as well. It is rec-
ommended that the port not be changed unless specifically requested by your IT Network
administrator.
Events/Counters
See “Counters” on page 113
See “Preset Markers” on page 113
See “Time Sync” on page 114
Events tab
Events is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system in the recorder.
Events are certain conditions or operations which can be set up and logged according to the time and
date of the occurrence. Subsequently events can be reviewed in a list or represented on a graph.
An event is made up from a Cause and an Effect. Set up a cause such as Pen 1 going into an alarm
state and the effect of this could be to start a totaliser or acknowledge the alarm.
Select the first available event eg. Event 1. Tick to Enable and change the Event Tag if required. Each
Event has two Causes and two Effects available, these can be used in different combinations:
• An event can have up to 4 causes that triggers just one effect eg. A pen going into alarm,
a Totaliser starts, Max/Mins reset and a Batch starts. This could have the effect of starting
Logging.
• An event can have one cause that has up to 4 effects, eg. A pen could go into alarm and
the effects could be that the alarm is acknowledged and a Totaliser is started, there is a
Mark placed on the chart and an Alarm is sounded.
• An event can have up to 4 causes that have up to 4 effects, eg. A pen goes into alarm and
a Totalisers is started, A scheduled export starts and Max/Min values are reset. The
effects could be the alarm is acknowledged and a mark on chart is displayed to show the
start of the totaliser, an Email is sent to notify a scheduled export has been made and a
sound effect is played to identify the Max/Min values have been reset.
In summary Cause 1, 2, 3 or Cause 4 will trigger Effect 1, 2, 3 and Effect 4.

Table 6.3 : Events - Cause and Effect
Cause Effect
Into Alarm
Alarm Out of Alarm Mark on Chart
Acknowledge Alarm
Logging
Start
Stop Totaliser
Totalisers
Reset Digital Outputs
Rollover
Alarm Acknowledge
On
Digital Inputs Email
Off
State Change Screen Change
T/C Burn Out Analogue Input # Print Screen

Once
Counters
Scheduled Interval
Max Mins (Reset)
Specific Days
Month End Chart Control
User Counters User Counter #

Clear All Messages
Max Mins (Reset) Reset Max/Min values
Delayed Event
Power On
Setup Change Script Timers

System
Internal Mem. Low Play Sound
Export Mem Low
Display Alert
FTP Mem Low
Batch
User Action Mark Chart
Hot Buttons (x4) Reports
Batch Start Batch Update Tabular Readings

Stop Batch
Enter Replay Screen
Pause Batch
Exit replay Screen
TUS Start
Stop Change Chart Speed

AMS2750 Timer TC Timers
Process Timers
For Maths variable for counters, see “Maths Variable and Function Tables” on page 296
When selecting Totalisers and Alarms etc. ensure they are enabled and configured in the Pens tab.

Setting up an Event
• Select an Event # from the Events list and click in the Enabled box.
• Set the Tag or name of the Event for identification
Event Causes
Click in Cause # and select the Set button and choose the cause of the event from the list provided:
• Alarms - Set to cause an event when a pen goes Into Alarm, Out of Alarm or an Alarm is
Acknowledged. Set the pen number and the Alarm that will trigger this event.
• Totalisers - Set to cause an event when a totaliser Starts, Stops, is Reset or a Rollover is
required. Select which pen has been set up as a totalise pen to trigger this event.
The upper limit for the totaliser count is fixed to 16777215 to prevent an inaccuracy in the
calculation above this upper limit.
The Totaliser Rollover occurs automatically once the count reaches the accuracy limit and
totalizser starts counting from zero. If user fails to configure the event totaliser will auto
reset.
The Rollover cause gets triggered each time the totaliser rollover occurs, above the accu-
racy limit.
• Digital Inputs - Set to cause an event when a Digital Input is turned On, Off or has a State
Change. Select the Digital to trigger this event.

• TC Burn Out - Click in the text box to select which analogue input has a thermocouple on
that will trigger this event when it goes into a burnout state.
• Scheduled - See “Scheduled Events” on page 106
• User Counters - See “User Counters” on page 108
• MaxMins(Reset)- A manual reset of the Max/Min values by the user can be used as a
cause to then trigger an effect. Max Min values can be reset in the process menu on the
recorder.
• System - An occurrence in the system can be used as a cause to trigger an event

effect. System occurrences include Power On, Setup Change, Internal Memory
Low, Export Memory Low and FTP Memory Low. The system monitors the mem-
ory storage levels and triggers the alert when the low level set is reached. To set
the memory low level go to “Storage Alarm” on page 117.
• User Action - Select a User action such as placing a mark on the chart as a cause to trig-
ger and event. Or add a Hot Button which can be displayed on an active Trend screen on
the recorder.
• • The Hot Button function, when active as a cause.
The user can click the Hot Button on the active screen
and the corresponding event (that the user needs to set)
will be triggered. The hot button will display on active
trend screens in top right of screen if enabled.
• Batch - Use a batch control as a cause to trigger an event effect. An event cause
can be set up so that when you Start, Stop or Pause a batch it will cause an
effect to occur. Batches work using groups of pens so when setting up an event
with a batch control as a cause you must assign a group of pens. See “General
tab” on page 84.
• TUS (Temperature uniformity Survey) - This will only be enabled if the AMS2750 TUS or
TUS Process option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu. Select either Start or
Stop TUS. When a TUS is started or stopped this can be used to trigger and effect. Refer
to the User manual for more details.
• AMS2750 Timer - This will only be enabled if the AMS2750 TUS or the TUS Process
option has been enabled in the recorder credits menu. Select TC Timers or Process Tim-
ers as a cause and set the Alert Type to Warning or Expired. Refer to the User manual for
more details.
Scheduled Events
A scheduled event can be set up as a cause so that when a scheduled event occurs it trig-
gers an effect. With scheduled events you can specify the time and date for something to
happen. Eg. A schedule can be setup every weekday at 12.00pm to send an Email.
• Type - Scheduled
• Sub Type - Set Once, Interval, Specific Days or Month End

Once – This is a once only occurrence
Interval - A scheduled can be setup at timed intervals eg. every 12 hours.
Specific days - Select the day(s), time and how often (count) the schedule will occur. Eg.
Friday at 12.00 with a count of 10 will carry on for 10 weeks or Monday through to Friday
at 12.00 with a count of 10 will carry on for two weeks.
Month End - If Month End is selected with a count of 10 it will carry on for 10 months. The

recorder refers to a built in calendar and clock and will schedule the event to occur at mid-
night on the last day of each month.
• Date/Time - Only available when Once is selected as a Sub Type. Select the time and
date for a one off occurrence.
• Period - Only available when Interval is selected as a Sub Type. Set the time interval for
how often this event should occur, eg. every hour would be 1h:00m:00s
• Alignment - Only available when Interval is selected as a Sub Type. Select and enter a
value from the list to align the scheduled event at specific intervals.
For certain applications it maybe desirable for a relatively fast schedule interval event, for
example every 10 minutes, to be aligned with a particular time. For example on the hour.
When the alignment function is not used, the schedule interval starts immediately on com-
mitting the configuration. When the alignment function is used, the schedule interval starts
when the first interval event coincides with a subsequent interval that lines up with the
desired alignment ie. Top of the hour.
Figure 6.3 shows if a 10 minutes schedule is required to align with a whole hour, and the
configuration is committed at 17 minutes past, the recorder will wait until 20 past before start-
ing the schedule interval. As starting at 20 past with 10 minute increments will ensure align-
ment with a whole hour.
Figure 6.3 Interval alignment
Time 1.00 1.10 1.20 1.30 1.40 1.50 2.00 2.10 2.20 2.30 2.40 2.50 3.00
non aligned
aligned to
the hour
Example of a schedule interval event

started at 17 minutes past the hour
Figure 6.3 shows if a 10 minutes schedule is required to align with a whole hour, and the con-
figuration is committed at 17 minutes past, the recorder will wait until 20 past before starting
the schedule interval. As starting at 20 past with 10 minute increments will ensure alignment
with a whole hour.
• Count - Only available when Interval, Specific Days or Month End are selected as a Sub
Type. This is how often you want this to occur. The recorder will carry on with this sched-
ule for the amount entered in the count. Eg. If 24 is entered into the count the scheduled
event will occur at the specified time for 24 hours. A count of zero will carry on indefinitely.
• Days of the Week - Only available when Specific Days is selected as a Sub Type. Select
the days of the week when this scheduled event is to occur.
• Time of Day - Only available when Specific Days is selected as a Sub Type. Select the
Time Of Day when this scheduled event is to occur.
When the Event cause is finished click on the Done button. Now go to set up the Effect of the Event.

User Counters
User Counters are quite simply counters that are set up by the user. User Counters can be
used as a Cause to trigger an Event Effect. The User Counter information must be setup be-
fore it can be used as a part of the event system. See “Counters” on page 113.
For a User Counter to be used as a Cause, a User Counter must already be set up and be
counting something. eg. a User Counter as an Effect of another Event.
An example of this could be:
First setup your counter in the Counters menu. Enable it, Name it, enter what number it will
Start At and enter at what number it will Rollover and start again. Event 1 has been set up with
Cause 1 as a Scheduled interval every 30 seconds. The Effect is that User Counter 1 is set to
increment by 1. When the scheduled interval occurs, every 30 seconds, Counter 1 will incre-
ment by 1.
A second Event can then be set up using the User Counter Effect in Event 1 as the Cause for
Event 2. In this example the Cause will be triggered by User Counter 1 (in Event 1) reaching
an increment of 50. The Effect of this will be a Mark on Chart.
In summary, what will occur from the two Events is: every 30 seconds a scheduled interval will
cause a counter to increment by 1. When the increments reach 50 a mark will be placed on
the Chart.
Event Effects
Click in Effect # and select the Set button and choose the effect of the event from the list provided:
• Type – Choose from Mark on Chart, Logging, Totaliser, Digital Outputs, Alarm Ack, Email,
Screen Change, Print Screen, Counters, Max Mins (Reset), Chart Control, Clear All Mes-
sages, Delayed Event, Script Timers, Play Sounds, Display Alert, Batch and Reports.
• Mark on Chart - Is an effect if a pen goes into an alarm state a mark will be placed on a
chart and will display, for example: “Pen 2 Alm 1: Into Alarm (37)”. Select Marker Type as
Preset to display a list of all available markers that have been previously added to the
recorder. To add Preset Markers go to “Preset Markers” on page 113. Select the
Marker Type as User Defined to add pen information using Embedded Process Variable.
Embedded Process Values

Adding Embedded Process Values in a Mark on Chart means you can display other informa-
tion such as pen information, Toltalisers, Digitals. See full list in Table 6.6 on page 109.
Table 6.4 :
Variable Description
V Value
T Tag
Z Zero range
S Span range
U Unit Text
time.v Time in HH:MM:SS format

Table 6.4 :
Variable Description
date.v Date in DD:MM:YY format
td.v Time and Date in HH:MM:SS and DD:MM:YY format
name.v recorder name
id.v recorder ID
serial.v serial number
Table 6.5 : Adding Embedded Process Values
Text Entry Function Examples
[[P1.V]] will embed the current Value of P1 <<16.233>>
[[P1.T]] will embed the current Tag of P1 <<Pen 1>>
[[P1.Z]] will embed the Zero point of P1 <<0>>
[[P1.S]] will embed the span point of P1 <<100>>
[[P1.U]] will embed the Unit text of P1 <<deg C>>
[[time.v]] will embed the current time <<11:51:23>>
[[date.v]] will embed the current date <<10:11:06>>
[[td.v]] will embed the current time and <<11:51:23 10:11:0>>

date
[[name.v]] will embed the current recorder <<Furnace1>>
name
[[id.v]] will embed the current recorder ID <<21>>
[[serial.v]] will embed the recorder serial 200034

number
[[BATMD1.v]] will embed the batch mode. 1 = <<Batch-1- 0001234 Stopped
Running, 2 = Stopped, 3 = Paused >>
[[BATMD1.t]] will embed the batch name <<Batch-1-0001234 Group 1>>
Batch mode is for each group BATMD1 to BATMD6. Used in embedded variables as
[[BATMD1.v]], will also allow the current batch name to be embedded using [[BATMD.t]].
Table 6.6 : more embedded variables
Syntax Syntax Syntax
An GLBVn HPULn
BATMDn HPC1 LPULn
BLKVn INTHRS RAn
CFFREE IOC1 RTCOMPn

Table 6.6 : more embedded variables
Syntax Syntax Syntax
CJCn LPC1 RTCALn
CJCnC Pn Tn
CVn PnAnL UC1
Dn PnMINU USB1FREE
DIOn PnMAXU USB2FREE
EC1 PSTVn UV1
FTPHRS PRC
This example shows pen information can be used as an embedded variable. Other information
can be accessed by exchanging the Pn with the following variables, see Figure 6.6.
In Mark on Chart enter: [[name.v]] [[P1.T]] is [[P1.V]] [[P1.U]
Embedded variable must be in CAPITALS, spaces are allowed.
Event Effects (continued)

If the recorder name is Furnace1, Tag is “Temperature”, the current value is 14.81, and the
Unit text is “Deg C”. The recorder will insert the name, pen tag, current pen value and units
into the Mark on chart. The Mark on Chart will display: Furnace 1 Temp 41.81 deg C.

• Logging - Is an event effect that can Start or Stop logging, enter which one in Sub Type.
From Selection Type choose either Multiple pens, Pen group or All Pens and select the
relevant pen(s) below.
• Totaliser - Is an event effect that can Start, Stop, Reset or Reset and Start a Totaliser in
Sub Type. From Selection Type choose either Multiple pens, Pen group or All Pens and
select the relevant pen(s) below.
• Digital Outputs - Is an event effect that can switch a Digital Output On or Off. Enter which
one in Sub Type and select the relevant relay output(s)
• Alarm Acknowledge - this is an effect of an event that can acknowledge a latched alarm
on a Single Pen, Pen Group or All pens. Select the pen and the alarm. Select the pen and
the number of alarm to be acknowledged.
• Email – Is an event effect that will send an Email when triggered by a Cause. Eg. Cause =
Totaliser Starts, Effect = Email is sent.
• • Sub Type - Auto, Single Line User or Multiline User. Auto will enter what the Event
was eg. Scheduled or Alarm triggered. Single Line User can have up to 69 charac-
ters of text or use “Embedded Process Values” on page 108. Multiline User
can have up to 80 characters per line with up to 1000 characters including spaces,
carriage returns and line feed. They can also include embedded process variable.
• • Recipients - Enter email recipients from the list. If no email recipients are present in
the list, they must be entered first in the Email menu, see “Email tab” on page 97.
• • Email Text - Only available when Single Line User is selected as a Sub Type. Enter
text here to add a Mark on Chart when the Email is sent.
• • Email Template - Only available when Multiline User is selected. These are sets of
text scripts that can be pre-written and assigned to an Email. Select a template from
the list. To set up templates for multiline text, see “Email tab” on page 97.
• Screen Change- (or Backlight On/Off) Select Screen Change as an effect to change the
screen when triggered by a cause. Eg. Pen 1 goes into Alarm and the screen changes
from a chart to a DPM screen where Alarm markers are visible. Or choose to have the
Backlight: select On or Off. When the Event is triggered the effect is to turn the backlight
to what state has been selected, On or Off.
• Print Screen– As an Effect, this will print the current process screen when triggered by a
Cause. Eg. Cause = Digital turns on, Effect = Print Screen. To set up network printer infor-
mation see “Network Admin tab” on page 101.
• Counters- Counters can be used as an Effect of an Event to count an occurence or to

reset different types of counters. A User Counter must be set up first before it can be used
as a part of an Event. See “Counters” on page 113.
• • Enabled - Tick to enable Event
• • Type - Counters
• • Event Action - Increment will add by whatever value is entered in “Increment By”.
Reset will restart the counter to whatever number is entered in Reset To.
• • Sub Type - (only available when Reset is selected as the Event Action). Select to
reset User, Pulse, Events, Digital Inputs, Relay Outputs or Alarm counters. Selecting
any of these Sub-Types will activate the corresponding menu item(s) so you can
then specify the number of the Sub-Type to be reset.
• • User Counters - (only available when Sub-Type is set to User). Select the User
Counter number to be used from the available list. Counters will only be available if
they have first been set up in the User Counters Menu.
• • Increment By - (only available when Increment is selected as the Event Action).
Enter the number at which you want the counter to increment by when the event
cause is triggered.

• • Reset To - (only available when Reset is selected as the Event Action and Sub-Type
is set to User). Enter the number at which you want the counter to reset to when the
event cause is triggered.
• Max Mins Reset Use this as an effect of an event to reset all Max Min values.
• Chart Control- The chart activity can be controlled as an effect of an event. The chart
control options are; Pause, Stop, Resume, Clear and Prefill
• • Pause - this will pause the chart until it is resumed. Resuming a paused chart will
display continuous chart data from when it had been paused. The chart can be
stopped if in a paused state.
• • Stop - this will stop the chart and no chart data will be displayed for the length of
time the chart is stopped. If a stopped chart is resumed there will be a gap in the
displayed chart data.
• • Resume - this can be used after the chart has been stopped or paused. The chart
data will continue from where it has been paused with no gaps displayed. But if
the chart has been stopped the displayed data will display a gap in data until it is
resumed
• • Clear - this will clear all the data being displayed. Data will not be cleared if the
chart has been stopped
• • Prefill - this will clear the chart and then fill it with the current reading.
• Clear All Messages - this will clear all the messages in the message list.
• Delayed Event - This will allow one event to trigger one or more other events after a spec-
ified period of time. The time period can be set in seconds from 1 to 3600 (1 hour). Select
Delayed Event and select the event(s) this will apply to. Enter the time delay.
• Script Timerst - Script timers provide 20 independent timers to be used as desired, previ-
ously control and access of script timers was limited to maths functions for use in script
but this has now been extended allowing the timers to be controlled using the event sys-
tem, allowing them to be stopped, started and reset. Access to timers via the Maths script-
ing feature is still available, see Figure 13.10, “Timers,” on page 301.
• Play Sound - Sound effects can be used to alert the user that an event effect has
occurred. Set the Sub Type to Start to reveal two more menu options, Sound name and
Play Mode. The user can pick from a list of 20 different sounds these can be configured to
play a single time or repeat continuously. Please be aware that continuous mode will
repeat continuously until a corresponding “stop” event is triggered for that sound. Also like
ring tones the sounds themselves can be replaced on the recorder with custom sounds.
To add sounds refer to the Recorder User manual.
• Display Alert - Display alert as an event effect – this feature is available from within the
event system where the Alert Display can be used as an event effect to display a preset or
user defined marker. Select Message Type as Preset to display a list of all available mark-
ers that have been previously added to the recorder. To add Preset Markers go to “Preset
Markers” on page 113. Select the Message Type as User Defined to enter your own
text. For more information on the Alert system and how to customise it see “Error Alert
tab” on page 70.
• Batch- Batch controls can be used as the effect of an event occurring. An event cause
must be set up so that the effect of the event is to Start, Stop or Pause a batch. Batches
work using groups of pens so when setting up an event with a batch control as a cause
you must assign a group of pens. See “Groups tab” on page 65.
• Reports - A report can be created as an effect of an event. Reports can be generated on a

periodical basis using event system to show daily/weeks/monthly totals, max mins, aver-
ages etc. the reports can be printed, e-mailed as attachments or exported to external
media. Before a report can be run the report details must be entered in “Reports” on
page 122.

• Update Tabular Readings - Triggering this event causes the tabular display to update
and show the latest set of readings.
• Enter Replay Screen - An event can be set so that the effect is to change the screen to
enter the Replay Screen.
• Exit Replay Screen - An event can be set so that the effect is to change the screen so
that the recorder will Exit the Replay Screen.
• Change Chart Speed - An event can be set so that the effect is to change the Change
Chart Speed. The speed of the chart can be set in the Sub Type section for Fast
(6000mm/h), Medium (120mm/h) or Slow (10mm/h). When that event gets triggered,
selected chart speed will be set to the current active screen.
Counters
Up to 16 User Counters are available and can be used as a part of the Events system. User
Counters can be set up as a Cause or an Effect of an Event.
Setup a User Counter

Select the next available Counter number.
• Enabled - In the Counter # menu tick to Enable.
• Name - Name the counter for ease of identification.
• Start At - Enter the number at which you want the counter so Start At
• Rollover At- Enter the number at which you want the counter to Rollover At. The default
maximum Rollover value is 3.3e+38.
Once a User Counter is setup it has to be assigned something to count eg. as a part as an
Event. See “Events tab” on page 103.
Preset Markers
Set up marker text that can be used to mark the chart as a part of an Event Effect or manual
added from the process screen as a Mark on Chart.
The mark on chart functionality has been extended to include the use of 20 separate preset
markers. With some markers configured when using mark on chart the user has the option of
starting with blank text, the previously entered text or one of the preset markers. Preset mark-
ers are also used in the Mark on chart effect and the Alert system effect. See “Error Alert tab”
on page 70.
To add text to a marker, select the next available marker and enter the text via the on screen
keypad.

Time Sync
This provides Time Synchronisation on recorders on a Digital Input.
• Enabled - Select the tick to enable Time Sync.
• Trigger - When recorder receives the Digital Input and there is a state change, i.e. On or
OFF, then the recorder time will be synchronized to the nearest hour.
• Digital Input - only on Digital Input configured as pulse input. Choice the input pulse
through one of the channels supported (1 to 4). Time sync will only happen on the config-
ured channel when digital input is received on that configured channel.
• Sync time - this defaults to synchronise the time every hour.

Once the time synchronization is complete, message will be send in the system messages to show time
changed on digital input. This will notify the user that system time has been synchronized to the nearest
hour due to digital input.
Screen
• Screen tab- Brightness Control and Screen Saver Settings
• Charts tab- Set up the chart speeds in three categories; Fast, Medium and Slow
Screen tab
Setup the recorder’s screen configuration.
Brightness Control
Adjust the brightness of the screen using the instant brightness slider. Default screen brightness is 80%.
Adjustable between 10% and 100% of full brightness. Move the slider to adjust the brightness.
Screen Saver Settings

Configure the screen display and Screen Saver functions. The default state for the Screen Saver is dis-
abled. The Screen Saver function helps to reduce backlight wear. When active, the back light is off and
nothing on the display is visible. The screen saver will not function in Setup Menus or in test mode.
• Timeout (Mins) - Only available when the Screen Saver function is active. This is how
long the Screen Saver will display on the screen. Programmable between 1 and 720 min-
utes in software, when disabled the screen will remain on permanently (enter 0 to disable).
• Saver Type - Only available when the Screen Saver function is active. This is set to Nor-
mal.

• DimSaver - Only available when the Screen Saver function is active. Dim Saver will help
to increase the life of the backlight and lower the screen brightness for night time use. Use
Saver Brightness or Off Always.
• Saver Level - Only available when the Dim Saver function is set to Use Saver Bright-
ness. Select this to use the instant dimming slider which lowers the screen brightness.
Default screen brightness is 80%. Adjustable between 10% and 100% of full brightness.
This works on a square law rule that means if you reduce the saver level by 25% you will
double the backlight life. If you reduce the saver level by 50% you will quadruple the back-
light life.
Exit Screen Saver

If the screen saver is active on the recorder, any of the following will deactivate the screen saver.
• User touches the recorder screen.
• Any USB device is plugged in or unplugged.
• On alarm - An alarm is triggered, the unit will not return to screen saver till the alarm state
is inactive and another screen saver time-out period has expired.

Charts tab
A Chart speed is the time it takes the data to travel from one side of the screen to the other. The
recorder has up to 10 different chart speeds. There are 3 categories that can be set; Slow, Medium and
Fast (default). Set up each category to display the desired chart speed.
• Fast Speed – 60mm/h, 120mm/h, 300mm/h, 600mm/h 1200mm/h and 6000mm/h
• Medium Speed - 10mm/h, 20mm/h, 30mm/hr, 60mm/hr and 120mm/h
• Slow Speed – 1mm/h, 5mm/h and 10mm/h, 20mm/h

Once the charts speeds have been set up in this menu go to a process screen displaying data on a
chart and touch the screen. This will activate the Settings menu in the top right of the screen, select this
to display the 3 categories set.
Recording tab
Scheduled
Use this screen to set up a scheduled export of data
• Schedule Export - Tick to enable.
• Export Device - Select the device you wish to export data to. USB1 is the first USB device
to be fitted and USB2 is the second one fitted, front or rear of the recorder. Compact Flash
not available for the eZtrend QXe and the rear USB port is only available as an option.
For Multitrend GR2 and Minitrend GR3 recorder configuration via front SD card
is supported. DR Graphic - USB ports are internal to the recorder and can be accessed
by opening the door.
• Update Period - Select how often you wish data to be exported from the list provided, 10
minutes to 24 hours.
• Log Messages - Tick to add a message to the messages list when a scheduled export
has been performed

• Mark Chart - Only active when Log Messages is enabled. Tick to mark the chart when a
scheduled export has been performed.
Storage Alarm
The storage alarm function is linked to the Error Alert system when there is a requirement for
a time period to be set to alert the user before the storage media is full.
• Internal memory - Set the amount of time before the internal memory becomes full and
data is lost and for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen. Enter a time period of
between 0.5 and 48 hours.
• Export media - Set the amount of time before the data being exported to a media
becomes full, and data is lost, for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen. Enter
a time period of between 0.5 and 48 hours.
• FTP Memory - Set the amount of time before the FTP memory becomes full, and data is
lost, for the Error Alert Message to display on the screen. Enter a time period of between
0.5 and 48 hours.

Pre-Trigger
The pre-trigger functionality function captures a high resolution trend leading up to an event
triggered by an alarm, and optionally after the event (Post-Trigger), where the information
can then be viewed in TrendManager Pro for analysis.
Configuration
The pre-trigger system is simply configured by selecting which pens they wish to be included
in the pre-trigger by enabling the Pre-Trigger item in the pen logging menu, see “Logging tab”
on page 86, and setting the desired pre-trigger time which is common to all pens, this is done
here in the recording menu.
• Pre-Trigger Time -The pre-trigger system can be configured to allow between 1 and 10
minutes at whole minute increments of pre-trigger data to be stored for each pen, each
pen will store the same time span. The default will be set to 5 minutes.
• Post-Trigger Time - specified in seconds from 0 (disabled and the default) to 3600 for 1
hour of post trigger time, extending the alarm log rate for all pre-trigger pens by the speci-
fied time after the last pre-trigger pen alarm has cleared.
Acquiring
In the running state the pre-trigger buffers are being filled with pen readings dependant on the alarm
logging rate when no pre-trigger pen alarms are asserted. The buffer will cycle when they reach the
maximum pre-trigger time as configured.
If power is lost when the pre-trigger is acquiring then the pre trigger information will be lost.
Event processing
All pens enabled for pre-trigger will be put into their alarm logging rate and remain in the alarm logging
rate while any pre-trigger pen alarm is asserted.
Once one or more alarms on a pre-trigger enabled pen(s) fire, the readings in the pre-triggered buffers
will be saved to internal flash memory. The pre-trigger system will request an export to be performed if
scheduled export is enabled. If Post trigger is enabled, the alarm log rate will continue for this period
after all alarms have cleared.

If during the post trigger time a pre-trigger alarm re-occurs, but the previous pre-trigger event has not
been exported then the post trigger timer will be reset and will start again after all pre-trigger alarm have
cleared.
Pre trigger information is only secure when it has been saved into the internal flash memory or
exported. If the power fails before the Pre-Trigger alarm is activated data will be lost and the recorder
will restart.
Export
The pre-trigger files are exported from the internal flash memory via the scheduled or manual export to
the externally selected device, OR when an FTP download occurs. The pre-trigger data is appended to
the Pen data files during export. It is recommended to set up a scheduled export as the pre-trigger files
will only be exported once and to the first device on which an export occurs following a pre trigger event
occurring.
If power fails when the pre-trigger information is waiting to be exported or is being exported, then the
system will restart into the export state, allowing the files to be exported.
Restart
Once the files for a pre-trigger have been exported and all alarms on pre-trigger enabled pens have
cleared, the pre-trigger buffers are reset and the existing pre-trigger information has been exported,
then the system returns to the acquiring state.
If a configuration change is performed then the pre-trigger system will be restarted, the user will be
warned before committing that they will restart the pre-trigger buffering, if an export is pending they will
also be asked to perform the export procedure or lose the existing pre-trigger information.
Importing
Once exported the import into TrendManager Pro can be performed from removable media or via
FTP, the imported information will show the pre-trigger pens as overlapped data, this will automatically
be displayed utilising the TrendManager Pro overlapped pens feature to clearly show the pre-trig-
ger data. See “Pre-Trigger Data” on page 242.

Transfer
This is where the Setup configuration can be imported from a recorder or exported to other recorders
via removable media. Click on the Transfer button and select either Import or Export.
To import a setup enter the location from where the imported setup file is to be extracted from in the
Path box or use the Browse button to search for the location of the setup file to be imported.
To export a setup enter the location to where the setup is to be exported to in the Path box, or use the
Browse button to search for the location for the setup file to be exported to.
If importing data from removable media eg. USB key, SD memory card or Compact Flash card, and
there are multiple sub directories (one for each recorder), point at a specific sub-directory to import just
that recorder or the root to import all the recorders. Choose a folder to import from or export to.
Compact Flash is not available on the eZtrend QXe . SD Card is available as an option on the
eZtrend GR .
.

Hardware
The Hardware window displays the current hardware status of the recorder. If the recorder hardware is
changed and new cards are added or removed or moved position then this screen should be updated to
reflect the new changes.
For example; when adding or removing options cards such as an Relay Alarm card, Digital IO card,
Analogue Out or Pulse card. (Analogue Out and Pulse In cards are not available on the eZtrend)

Reports
Reports can be generated manually or on a periodic basis using the event system to show dai-
ly/weekly/monthly totals, max mins, averages etc., the reports can be printed, e-mailed as at-
tachments or exported to the external media. The reports will be in RTF format for use in MS
Word or other compatible word processors.
Before a report can be run the report menu must be configured here.
In the Reports Menu select the first or next available Report #.

Enabled - Set to a tick to enable
Name - Enter an identifiable name of your report
Style - Select Batch for running reports on current batches. Select Normal to run reports on
specific pens, all pens or groups. A TUS report is for a Temperature Uniformity Survey that
can only be used if this option is enabled in the credits menu.
This type of TUS report is condensed and should not be used as the final report to comply with
AMS2750 specifications. The full report for a TUS should be generated using the TUS proce-
dure, refer to the User manual.
Selection Type - This will be set to Group if Batch is selected for the Style, select which group
of pens the report will be run on. If the Style is set to Normal the following options will be avail-
able:
• Multiple Pens - This allows you to select which pens to run a report on including Totaliser
pens

• Pen Group - Allows you to select which group of pens to run a report on
• All Pens - This will run a report on all the currently enabled pens
Group - (only available when Pen Group is selected for Selection Type). Select the Pen Group
you wish to run a report on from the available groups list. To have groups of pens available in
this list, individual pens must be allocated to a group, see Group in the “Pens tab” on page 64.
Use Group to produce an AMS2750 summary report.
Current Pen Value - Select whether to include the Current Pen Values, of enabled pens, in
your report.
Averages - Select this to include the Average values of each selected pen, All pens or group
of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option. The report can give
you the pen Average value for every Hour, Day, Week, Month, the Current average pen value
or Do Not Include Average values.
Max/Mins - Select this to include the Maximum and Minimum values of each selected pen, All
pens or Group of pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option. The
report can give you the pen Max/Min value for every Hour, Day, Week, Month, the Current
max/min pen value or Do Not Include Max/Min values.
Pens - (only available when either Curent Pen Value or Max/Mins is set to Included). Select
which pens this report will be run on
Totals - Select this to include the Total values of each selected pen, All pens or group of pens
depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option. The report can give you the
pen Total value for every Hour, Day, Week, Month, the Current total pen value or Do Not In-
clude Total values.
Totaliser Pens - (only available when Multiple Pens is selected for Selection Type). This will
display any pens that have been set up as a totaliser pen.
Messages - Select this to include the Messages of each selected pen, All pens or group of
pens depending what has been chosen in the Selection Type option. The report can give you
the pen Messages for the Last Hour, Last Day, Last Week, Last Month, All messages or Do
Not Include Messages.
Message Lists - (only available when batch is selected in Style). Select which type of mes-
sages are required for your report: Alarm, System, Diagnostic, Security or User messages.
One or more selections can be made.
Counters - Select which type of Counters are required for your report: Alarm, User, Event,
Digital, Digital Input, Relay Output or Pulse. One or more selections can be made. For more
information see “Counters” on page 113
Footer Style - Choose between one or two lines of footer at the end of the report.
Include Digital Inputs - Select to Include or Do Not Include this option.
Include Digital Outputs - Select to Include or Do Not Include this option.
Email - Tick to enable the Email function.
Recipients - (only available when the Email function has been enabled). Select from a list of
email recipients. Email addresses and Server names must be entered in “Email tab” on page 97.
Print - Set to a tick to enable the Print function. The printer settings must be set up before this
feature will operate, see “Printer tab” on page 68.

Export Device - Select from a list of options if you require your report to be exported to an
external media device or select Do not export. The removable media device needs to be fitted
to the recorder when the report is run and have enough memory available.
Run a Report
Once the report details have been completed in the report menu you can run your report either manually
or by using the Event system.
• For a manual report see “Reports (Process)” in the User manual
• For a report triggered using the Event system see “Event Effects” on page 108.
Pen Report Information

Currently pens provide real-time values, max, min and totals. Reports need some history of
these values to be maintained, so a set of period based data is maintained. The periods being
an hour, day, week and month. The recorder builds up the current hour, day, week and month-
ly data and keeps the previous (completed) hour, day, week and month stored.
At anytime it is possible to access the current hour, day, week or month for Max, Min, Average
and Totals, also you can get access to the previously complete whole hour, day, week or
month for each pen.
• An hour is a whole hour starting on the hour eg. 10.00 to 11.00
• A day starts at one second passed midnight.
• A week starts one second passed midnight on Sunday
• A month starts at one second passed midnight on the 1st of the month
Access to this is provided automatically via reports but this information can also be included in maths/
scripts and by using embedded variables.
Pen Report Maths

In maths the following syntax is available:
prmax[x,y,z] = Pen report Max value
prmin[x,y,z] = Pen report Min value
prave[x,y,z] = Pen report Average value
prtot[x,y,z] = Pen report Totaliser value
where ...
x = Pen Number 1 to 96
y = period 1 = Hour, 2 = Day, 3 = Week, 4 = Month,
z = report set 1 = Current, 2 = Previous completed
e.g. P1 =prmax[23,2,1] - Max value so far for current day for Pen 23

Pen Report Syntax
the syntax for the embedded variables is as follows:
[[PRPtttxynn.v]]
ttt is the type of variables required and can be
MAX = Max value
MAT = Time max value was recorded
MIN = Min Value
MIT = Time min value was recorded
AVE = Average Value
TOT = Totaliser value

STM = Start time of the reports set
x is the report set and can be
C = Current working hour, day, week, month
L = Last completed hour, day, week, month

y is the period and can be
H = Hour
D = Day
W = Week
M = Month
nn is the pen number from 1 to 96
e.g. of some embedded variables
[[PRPTOTLM1.v]] Total for last complete month for pen 1
[[PRPMAXCD23.v]] Max so far for current day for pen 23
[[PRPMATCD23.v]] Time max was recorded for current day for P23
[[PRPSTMCD23.v]] Start time of report for current day for pen 23
Recorder configuration complete

When all setups are complete press OK, a prompt to save will only appear if changes have been made
in the setup window.
For Peer communications and Batch settings, see “Peer Services” on page 127 and “Batch Set-
tings” on page 127.

Printing Setups
Select the recorder button on the left and right click on the recorder containing the setup required to be
printed. Select the Print button and choose the setup required and press OK.
From the Select Print Option box select Print Setup. To print an IQOQ report see “Appendix H - IQOQ
Protocol Document” on page 339.
• Go through each tab and select the boxes required to produce a printout of the setup.
• Click Done when each tab is finished and Print when all tabs are completed.
NB. Full recorder configuration can take up many pages. If this is required, select Landscape mode to
cut down the page count. The Font type can be changed if desired.
• Print All - This will select all the areas shown and print them
• Print Selection - Select the areas to print
• Clear All - This will clear all print selections
• Done - Hit this to cancel this screen or when you are finished printing

Peer Services
In the top left will be an Edit button that takes you to Preferences. Select Preferences to produce the
Peer Services dialog and the Batch Settings dialog. .
Peers services is used to find other recorders on the network. The default port settings should only be
changed in consultation with your network security administrator and must be kept consistent with
recorder settings in order to work.
• Start Port - Default port number 8955
• End Port - Default port number 8970
Batch Settings
Concurrent Batch Mode

Batch mode has changed to allow concurrent batches, where each batch is associated with a group, so
all pens within Group 1 will belong to the batch that is controlled by Group 1. Screens can now be set to
display groups, in this mode only messages associated with that group (i.e. pens within that group, or
batch messages for that group) will be shown on the chart.
Remember when you have set up your batch requirements you need to assign pens to the batch group.
• Group name: Enter the group name for the batch run
• Batch name: Enter the name of the batch name and setup a list of additional names to
appear as a pick list as a part of the Batch Control screen.

• User ID: Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch. The User ID
display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup to appear as a
pick list during the Batch Control setup. If Passwords are active on the recorder then the
User ID page will be skipped for user entry and the name of the person logged in through
the password system will be automatically entered.
• Field 1: Defaults to Lot. Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new batch.
The Lot number display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be setup
to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup. The addition list names will not
appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show “n” List in
the group properties menu.
• Field 2: Defaults to Description. Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a
new batch. The Description display name can be renamed and a list of additional names
can be setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup. The addition list
names will not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable
Show “n” List in the group properties menu
• Field 3: Defaults to Comment. Enable this to make this a requirement when starting a new
batch. The Comment display name can be renamed and a list of additional names can be
setup to appear as a pick list during the Batch Control setup. The addition list names will
not appear in a drop down list in the Batch Control screen unless you enable Show “n” List
in the group properties menu.
NOTICE
List driven data fields – The next 5 fields are available for data entry associated with a batch. The
names can be overridden to suite the end user application, all fields are now 69 character long with the
exception of the User ID which is 32. A pre-defined list of up to 30 items can be configured to allow
users to select input for these fields from a list rather than type them in every time. E.g. a user might
have 8 different products running though the same process, these can be pre-configured so when start-
ing a batch the user can pick from a list of products. The pre-defined lists have to be enabled in the indi-
vidual group screen, eg. Show *** List.

Graph Settings
Use this screen to set the configuration for new graphs.
In TrendServer Pro, Go To Edit->Preference, the Dialog will open.
Select Tab “Graph Settings”
Change the settings in “Graph Settings” for new Graph.
Click “OK”
Graph Opening: Options available for graph openings are 1) Maximized 2) Normal 3) Minimized. New
graph default setting is set to Maximize all the graph.
Scale Arrangement: This acts in the same way as the “Arrange” Button in any Graph. Options avail-
able for Scale Arrangements are 1)Tile 2) Strip 3) Best Fit 4) Minimize Scale and 5) Default.
Scale arrangement will operate as given below:
• drag single pen into newly created graph then scale will rearrange again.
• to change the default preference(as shown in figure above) in between adding pen on the
graph, the scale will rearrange with new preference. E.g. created new graph with as Tile
as default scale arrangement in Graph Settings as shown in above figure. Add Pen 1 and
Pen 2 to graph. Both scale will arrange them self into Tile view. Now, change the default
preference to Stretch and added pen 3 to graph then all three pens (i.e. Pen 1 , Pen 2 and
Pen 3) rearrange themselves to Stretch scale view.
• manually change the scale setting from scale arrangement option for any Graph opened,
then these Default settings (as shown in figure above) will not be applied on pens which
are added afterwards.

Show Events: Yes or No, For Showing events.
Zoom Level: Show Last X hours. Parameters are 1Min, 5Min, 15Min, 30Min, 1Hour, 2 Hour, 6 Hour,
12Hour, 1Day, 5Day 7Day(default) and All) It shows data of specific duration in a graph.
Real Time Speed: Setting speed for real time charting the graph. Options provided are 1 Seconds, 2
Seconds, 5 Seconds, 10 Seconds, 1 Minutes, 2 Minutes, 5 Minutes and 1 Hour.
Reset to Default: will reset all settings to default.
Database Scheduler Settings

Use this screen to set the configuration for Automated Database Scheduler Settings.
In TrendServer Pro, Go to Edit->Preferences, the Dialog will open.
Select Tab “Database Scheduler Settings”
The Source Path will be provided.

Browse for the Destination Path.
Browse for the path to create the Batch file. Click on the “Create” button to generate the Batch Script
File.
Click on Launch Task Scheduler. A three-pane console will open.

In the Actions pane on the right, click “Create Task”. The Create Task wizard will open.
.

Enter a name and a description for the task. If the task is going to be run on your local computer, do not
change the line labeled "Location". Also note the "Security options" section. You can choose to run only
when a particular user is logged on. You can also set a task to run with highest privileges to avoid UAC
challenges.
When you have finished configuring, click the tab "Triggers" to add the event or time period that will
determine when the task will run. The dialog shown below will open.
The box will list all existing triggers. To add a new trigger, click "New" and the dialog shown below will
appear.

As the above figure shows, there are a number of ways to configure a trigger. Various time periods are
available and this is the most common type of trigger. Other events can serve as a trigger as well and
some are shown in the drop-down menu labeled "Begin the task".
When the trigger has been configured as desired, the next step is to choose the action that will consti-
tute the task. This is generally a program or script to be run. Click "OK" and a dialog similar to that
shown in the below dialog will open.

Select the tab "Actions" in the above and the dialog for entering the action that you wish the task to
carry out will open. An example is shown below.

Click the "New" button to open the dialog shown below. Generally, "Start a program" is the desired
Action. However, two other options are available - "Send an email" or "Display a message".
Choose “Start a program” from the drop-down option. Enter the full path and name or browse to the
executable file that you wish to run. Enter any arguments that might be required.
Click "OK" when you are finished. A window displaying the task you have just created will open as
shown below.

Even more configuration is possible. If you wish to add some additional conditions, click the tab "Condi-
tions" or “Settings”. Once all conditions and setting are correct, click "OK". A new task is set up and
ready to go.

Honeywell V5 Recorders
TrendManager Suite allows you to set up a recorder from your PC.
NB. If any function is denied by a flashing padlock, this is because a password is required to be entered
to proceed any further, see “Passwords” on page 208.
All areas are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help. Click in any area on the screen and
press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files.
NOTE: Honeywell V5 Recorders are not supported for the Archived Databases in Archive Database
Server.
Start here
With the software open, the main screen will be blank with a tool bar down the left hand side. To start
recorder configuration first select the Recorder button on the button bar down the left side of the
screen.
Add New Recorder

To add a recorder select the recorder icon from the button bar down the left side, select Add New
Recorder and follow the on screen instructions to confirm the new device being loaded. In the Hard-
ware Configuration Wizard, enter the recorder details including the ID number. The ID number of the
unit must be set by the user. It is important that all of the user’s recorders have different ID numbers
especially if Comms is being used.
Hardware Configuration Wizard for the Minitrend V5
FIGURE 6.4 Hardware Wizard
Slots A and B are for analogue inputs, select either Universal, Fast Scanning, Linear and Output cards
depending on what options are fitted into the recorder. When the analogue input cards are selected,
ensure the corresponding number of channels is displayed in the associated box on the Hardware Con-
figuration Wizard.

Slot C is for the Communications card, choose either Ethernet, RS485 Trendbus or RS232. The
associated comms box will show further options for the type on communication selected.
Slot D is for the alarm card, this is an option card so check to see if this is included in your recorder. If so
select Alarm and remember to set the number of channels in the associated box.
VPens or Virtual pens are available with each type of recorder. These virtual pens are used mainly for
displaying maths functions and the totaliser. A virtual pen can also be setup as an identical copy of a
pen if the data from one pen is required to be written to two drives. Only one pen can write to one drive.
Additional pens can be purchased upon request.
Finally, confirm if your recorder has a PC-Card fitted (PCMCIA), see “PCMCIA Interface Card” on
page 138.
PCMCIA Interface Card
(Minitrend V5)
This is a memory card interface, or hard drive, purchased as an option. It can be any size from an 8
MByte flash card to a 1 GByte hard drive.
This picture shows the Minitrend V5 with a PC card fitted in the bottom slot below the disk drive. If
there is no card fitted there will be a blanking plate fitted over the slot.
FIGURE 6.5 PCMCIA card slot
PC card

Hardware Configuration Wizard for the Multitrend Plus V5
Slots A, B, A1 and B1 are for analogue inputs, select either Universal, Fast Scanning, Linear and Output
cards depending on the options fitted into the recorder. When the analogue input cards are selected,
ensure the corresponding number of channels is displayed in the associated box on the Hardware Con-
figuration Wizard.
Slot C is for the Communications card, choose either Ethernet, RS485 Trendbus or RS232. The
associated comms box will show further options for the type on communication selected.
Slot D is for the alarm card, this is an option card so check to see if this is included in your recorder. If so
select Alarm and remember to set the number of channels in the associated box. Slot D2 is to fit an
extra alarm card, do not use D1.
VPens or Virtual pens are available with each type of recorder. These virtual pens are used mainly for
displaying maths functions and the totaliser. A virtual pen can also be setup as an identical copy if the
data from one pen is required to be written to two drives. Usually only one pen can write to one drive.
Additional pens can be purchased upon request.
Finally, confirm if your recorder has a PC-Card fitted (PCMCIA), see “PCMCIA Interface Card” on
page 138.
All these areas are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help. Click on any area on the screen
and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files.

PCMCIA Interface Card
(Multitrend Plus V5)
This is a memory card interface, or hard drive interface, purchased as an option. It can be any size from
an 8 MByte flash card to a 1 GByte hard drive.
This view shows the Multitrend Plus V5 with the disk drive flap down revealing the disk drive and
the PC card slot above it. If there is no PC card a blanking plate will cover the slot.
FIGURE 6.7 PCMCIA card slot PC card
Hardware Configuration Wizard for the eZtrend V5
The eZtrend V5 configuration only requires the number of analogue channels to be set, either 2, 4 or
6 inputs. The Digital channels box is available if the recorder has an alarm card fitted. The two alarm
card options available are 4 relay output or 6 relay output with 2 digital inputs. Select the correct set up
for the recorder and click on the Finish button.

Recorder Setup
General recorder setup
Go through each tab entering or editing the recorder details.
Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the
related help files.
General Setup tab

Check recorder details are correct.
Pen Summary tab

The Pen Summary tab shows the setup of each pen.
• Pen: Shows pen status.

• Destination: Data to be logged to Disk, PC card, Compact Flash/SD card or USB key.
• Mode: Normal or Alarm logging.
• Log: Normal, Continuous or Fuzzy types of logging.
• Rate: Specify the logging rate in days, hours, minutes, seconds or milliseconds.
• Method: Choose sample or min/max logging. Continuous logging only.
• Units: Units of measure for that pen.
• % Use: Percentage of disk space used, logging to disk or PC card.
This window displays the Disk Life Calculator which shows how much space is left based on the log-
ging rate of the fastest pen. Readings are displayed in years, days, hours, minutes and seconds. This
screen will update as pen details are completed. See next button ‘Pens’.
Communications tab
For Honeywell V5 recorders with a comms card fitted, the correct comms card must be set up in the
Hardware Configuration Wizard. See “Add New Recorder” on page 137
Only the Ethernet option is available on the eZtrend V5 .
Serial port RS232 (Honeywell V5 recorders)

Not available on the eZtrend V5 .
For RS232 configuration, select either Front or Rear RS232 Port connections. Choose the type of Pro-
tocol required to transmit the data between computers or peripherals, either ASCII or None. For more
information See “Glossary” on page 283.
Select the Baud Rate, which is the speed at which the data will be transferred, default is 1200bits/sec.
Enter how many Data bits per character, 5, 6, 7, or 8. Set the Parity to None, Odd or Even. The Stop
bit signifies the end of the character, enter 1 or 2.
Serial port RS485

Not available on the eZtrend V5 .
Select the RS485 port and what type of Protocol. The Baud rate is the speed at which the data is trans-
ferred, default is 38400bits/sec.
Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files.

Ethernet Port
The Ethernet settings on this tab are only available if the unit has been configured for an Ethernet card.
Enter the Ethernet information on the lower area of the comms tab. Refer to “Appendix E - Ethernet
& E-mail” on page 319 for more information.
example shown is for a Minitrend V5 configuration FIGURE 6.9
Serial port setup for

RS232(front)
RS232(rear)
RS485
Ethernet port
setup
IP Address - This is to distinguish between the various devices connected to the internet when commu-
nicating using TCP/IP. The address is a 32 bit value normally displayed with four numbers separated by
a full stop or period e.g. 195.26.34.186.
See your IT systems administrator for setting up IP addresses.
Subnet Mask - This acts like a filter when identifying an IP address. Specify the Mask that is used to
determine the network address form the IP address, default is 255.255.255.0. Set this value according
to the system or network to which the recorder or PC belongs.
Default Gateway - The Default Gateway is a configuration parameter transmitted to each network
device. Set the value according to the system or network to which the recorder or PC belongs.
Mail Server - The Mail Server can only be selected if the E-mail option is available on the recorder.
Enter the IP Address of the device to which the mail is to be sent, see See “Event Email setup” on
page 159 and “Email tab” on page 97.
IP Resolution - Uses different types of protocol to translate the IP Address, default is FIXED.
Realtime - The drop down menu lists the protocol options for the retrieval of data via the Ethernet con-
nection. Choose either None, Trendbus, Modbus TCP/IP, Modbus X. Modbus X differs from the stan-
dard Modbus only by the 4 byte floating point order being reversed for application compatibility.
Sockets - These numbers should not need to be changed, only by advanced users for networking.
All these areas are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help. Click on any area on the screen
and press F1 on the keyboard to access recorder specific help files. Also see See “Glossary” on
page 283.
Pen related setups

Select each pen from the list and allocate information about that pen by going
through the tabs at the top of the screen.

General
In the General tab select and enable each pen required, allocate a name or tag and a description.
There is an option to set the pen trace thickness and a comprehensive colour palette to modify the pen
trace colours on the graph. The pen trace colours are identical to those in the recorder.
Scales
Scale Type
Scale Type is for either a Linear or Logarithmic scale. When either of these are selected some of the
headings will change on the Scales tab to suit each option.
Unit Text
Enter information about the scale by filling in the unit of measurement from the Unit Text drop down
menu, or entry the text or symbol manually.
For a linear scale set the Zero and Span details for the bottom and top scale limits, which can be up to
7 digits in length. The scale displayed in this window will incorporate zero, span and division changes
according to information entered. For a logarithmic scale the headings will read Starting power of 10
eg. 4 will represent 10 to the power of 4. The other piece of information required for a log scale is the
Number of Decades which is limited to a maximum of 9 decades. A negative scale cannot be entered
for a Log scale.
Divisions
The Divisions within the scale will be automatically worked out and entered by the software depending
on the scale limits. Un-tick this box and divisions can be manually entered for both Major and Minor
divisions. (not available for Logarithmic scales)

Scale Factor is for user entered text that displays on the scale if required. Used for displaying scales
with large values eg. if you have a scale that is 0 to 10,000 you can display it as 0 to 1000 with a scale
factor of x10. There is no change to the scale shown in the tab.
Format
The Format button defaults to automatic scale labelling or select Specify to define the number of deci-
mal places.
Logging
When enabled, set the Logging Mode to Normal or Alarm. Alarm is the logging rate for this pen when it
goes into an alarm state. Select which removable media the data is to Log To. If the Logging type is
set to None, logging will be disabled. Choose between Continuous logging or Fuzzy logging. For more
details see See “Fuzzy Logging” on page 144.
The Logging Rate is available for Continuous logging only. Specific intervals can be fixed using the
Concise option. There are three Logging methods to choose from Sample, Average or MaxMin.
Sample will log the actual value of the last sampled reading, Average will take an average of all the
samples taken since the last log, and MaxMin will log the Maximum and Minimum values since the last
log.
Fuzzy Logging
Fuzzy Logging has been developed as a secure data storage technique which has self teaching data
storage algorithm so the recorder stores data at a variable rate to match the process being monitored.
For more information see See “Appendix C- Fuzzy Logging” on page 311.
When Fuzzy Logging is selected the set up screen will change. A Base Sample Rate is required, this
is the rate at which the Input signal is checked. Specific intervals for logging can be fixed using the con-
cise button.
To keep logging to a minimum, optimise disk space and to have more accurate waveforms, tick the
Autofit box.
Advanced Users Only

Fine tuning - Band A. Set up a percentage by which the input signal must change to trigger a log.
Band B is a more specific band within Band A, to give a more accurate trace.
Maths
If the maths pen option has been purchased the recorder can be configured to carry out simple or com-
plex calculations. Configuring the maths block is easier than it looks. Type the formula you require as
you would write it. The formula(s) can include analogue inputs, digital inputs and relay outputs.
Up to 16 extra pens are available for the Minitrend V5 recorders. Up to 32 extra pens for the Multi-
trend Plus V5 recorder. Up to 6 extra pens for the eZtrend V5 recorder.
Up to 64 integral “soft” alarm set points are available for the Minitrend V5 recorder. These can be set
by the user to announce selected out of limit conditions. See “Appendix A - Maths Expressions for
Honeywell V5 recorders” on page 287.
Only limited maths functions are available on the eZtrend V5 .

..
FIGURE 6.10
example shown is for a Minitrend V5 configuration
Maths (examples)
Here are some maths expression examples:
The first example is simple, with Pen 2 selected it will
show the sum of analogue input 1(A1) plus analogue
input 2 (A2).
The second example shows Pen 1 selected,

this will show the square root of analogue
input A1 then added to analogue input A2.
Here Pen 3 is selected showing a Quadratic Fit for a Type B Thermocouple.
For use of maths with the fail safe option, see “Boolean Expressions” on page 294.

Totals
A Totaliser is normally associated with flow monitoring applications, where the input to the recorder
would be a measure of flow rate (e.g. in litres per minute). The Totaliser can then measure the total
amount that has flowed over a certain period of time. Totalisers are assigned to individual pens.
Tick to Enable, enter the Pen Units, which are the same at the units label on the pen scales page repre-
senting the label applied to any scale. Enter the Total Units, which are the units the totaliser is collect-
ing in. Eg. if the input is mA, a likely totaliser units would be kAh.
The Factor will convert the units you measure in to the units you want to totalise in. Use the Totalise
Helper to assist in setting up these measurements, and working out the totalising factor.
NOTE: Totalisers do not work on a logarithmic scale, a warning message will be activated to notify the
user.
Additional Controls
• Ignore back flow: When enabled any negative values are ignored and the total value will be
held and never decrease.
• Restrict range: Activates min/max ranges.
• Standard form: Displays totalised values in standard form e.g. 2.76823e+09 regardless of
length of the number.
• Carry on rollover: Only active when the Restrict Range option is ticked and min/max ranges
are set. This function allows any amount that goes over the maximum scale range (Max) to be
added to the minimum scale range set (Start). When this is not active, the reading will return to
the minimum scale range set.
Alarms
The unit must have an alarm card, or a digital Input/Output card fitted.
The Pen Alarms Setup window is where the alarm levels for each pen are configured. Alarms can be
set to trigger events such as log events, set relays, change log rate or flush data etc. See “Setting up
Events” on page 151.
Alarm Controls
The first box marked Alarm has a drop down box containing currently available alarms for that pen. If no
alarms have been configured the box will show None. To add an alarm select New, this will automati-
cally be assigned a name. The Delete alarm button removes the currently selected alarm from the list.
If there are no alarms showing, check the alarms have been configured in the Hardware wizard. See
“Add New Recorder” on page 137
When an alarm is allocated to a pen it is given the next available number.
e.g. If Pen 1 has 2 alarms 1 and 2, then if an alarm is set up for Pen 2 the next available alarm number
would be 3. If the user then went back to add another alarm to Pen 1 this would be alarm 4 and so on.
Alarms allocated to a pen can be graphed using Maths. See “Maths” on page 144 and.See “Appen-
dix A - Maths Expressions for Honeywell V5 recorders” on page 287.
NOTE: Alarms are based on linear input values apart from when the pen scale is logarithmic then the
alarm threshold is based on the exponent of the log scale. When an alarm is created, on a logarithmic
scale, a warning message will be activated to notify the user.
Enabling Controls
Enable as Always makes the alarm always active, continually checking and ready to be triggered.

The By Digitals option is only available if the recorder has an alarm card fitted which has the digital
input/output function. It is necessary to setup the digital I/O card before this option shows as available.
To configure the digital I/O, click on the Hardware Button to add a alarm card with digital I/O capability (if
fitted in the unit as an option). See “Digital input/output port setup” on page 150.
By Digitals enables the alarm if one of the digitals has entered its specified state determined by the
Digital Inputs button. This button activates a list where by the available digital inputs can be added or
removed to the list of triggered alarms.
The Disable digital is its default state and if selected, the alarm will appear in the recorders alarm list but
will not be active.
General alarm settings

Select the Type of alarm, either High or Low so if the level goes above the stated value, on a high
alarm, or below the stated value, on a low alarm, the alarm will be triggered. Log mode should be set to
Normal unless the log rate needs to change when the alarm is active, then select Alarm Set the alarm
Level by entering the numeric value at which the alarm is to be activated, the level is in terms of pen
units so must not exceed the current pen scale. Log as Event will log the alarm state entry and exit to
the event window. For Mark on chart the Log as Event item must be checked as well to use this. Places
a mark on the chart on alarm state entry and exit.
Choose whether to Trigger relays on alarm entry, tick this to produce the Relay Outputs button. Select
relays from the Relay Output list and add to Trigger Output list using the Add and Remove buttons.
Advanced options
Hysteresis gives the alarm a tolerance level. It allows a specified percentage value of the full scale to be
added on to the alarm level.
The Symmetrical option is only available for Honeywell V5 recorders. This divides the hysteresis
value equally on either side of the alarm. If the Hysteresis value was 10%, and the symmetrical option is
enabled, then the logged reading would trigger at 5% (of the full scale value) below the alarm level. For
the alarm condition to end, the alarm would have to rise to over 5% (of the full scale value) above the
alarm level.
Damping
With this enabled, an alarm level must be breached for a specific period of time before an alarm is trig-
gered. Enable this function and enter a time limit here, in hours, minutes and seconds with a maximum
time of 12 hours.

Analogue General tab
Choose the Analogue button and then select an Analogue input number
from the list, eg. Ana 1. In this tab click in the Enable box to activate and
assign a label to identify the input. Also under the Analogue General tab is
a Damping setup which, by default, is set to disabled. This will average the
incoming signal over a specific period of time from 1 to 15 seconds thus creating a damping effect.
Enter the Time factor or width of the pulse, to be rejected, this can be set from 1 to 15 seconds.
Set the Transient Filter to ignore a specified type of pulse. This is used to filter out any electrical inter-
ference from external influences.
The Threshold level (%) or depth of the pulse is entered as a percentage of the span. The span is
defined by the Engineering span e.g. Eng Zero = -10, Eng Span = +10. Enter pulse depth as a percent-
age of span = 20. If the signal is within 20% of span the point will be logged, if the signal is outside the
20% of span the signal will be logged as the previous point.
Square Root Extraction, tick this box if you require a non linear signal to be converted into a linear
scale.
Analogue Scales tab

Use this section to enter set up information for the Analogue scales. Select the Analogue Input Type of
signal coming into this port, Current, Volts or Thermocouple, Resistance Thermometer (if fitted). Current
and Voltage inputs are linked to the first scale in the Scale Mapping Diagram.
When the Tie To is set to a Pen eg. P1 from the drop down list, then the Eng scale is tied to P1 pen
scale. This is to force the engineering scale to be linked to and be the same as the pen scale. This
means the engineering scale is not changeable because it is locked to the pen scale.
Set this option to None and the Eng scale is no longer tied to the pen scale.
If there are no pens available that means that no pens are associated to that particular Analogue Input.
Go to the Pens tabs and select Maths eg. against P1= enter A1. Now when you go return to this tab Pen
1 will appear in the Tie To drop down list.
Dependencies lists all pens which refer to this input.
Scale Mapping Diagram displays graphical examples of the Input scale, the Engineering scale and the
Pen scale.
The first is the Input Scale for Current (mA), Voltage inputs (V & mV). Select the input range and enter
the top and bottom values of that input range. Figure 6.11 shows a Voltage range of +/-10V, but this
scale has been manual changed to 0 to 10V. The full scale still shows the -10 to +10 range with zero in
the middle.
The Eng Scale becomes active when the Tie To option has not been selected. Enter the top and bottom
limits of the Eng scale to the part of the Input you want to display.
Engineering scale label – enter text here for the engineering label.
Engineering span – this is the highest value of the engineering range and corresponds to
the top of the input range.
Engineering zero – this is the bottom of the engineering scale and represents the bottom
of the input scale.
In Figure 6.12 the Pen scale is displaying only the part of the input range as specified by the values
entered in the Eng scale.

.
FIGURE 6.11
Shows P1 is selected
and the Eng scale is
locked to the pen
scale
The Pen Scale lists pens which are available for a particular Analogue input. The Pen Scale is linked to
the scale information set up in the Pens tab. The Pen Scale can be changed manually by entering top
and bottom pen ranges.
Pen Scale is only available if a pen or pens use this analogue directly Eg. if P1=A1 and P10=A10 are
set up for P1 and P10’s math expressions respectively, they will appear here and the user will be able to
set up the pen scales from here as well as in the pen scales page.
The Pen scale title will change to “Pen Scale (Log)” when a Log scale has been specified. The logarith-
mic values will be displayed in scientific notation, eg. 1.0E4 represents 10 to the power of 4.
Note: Logarithmic scales cannot be reversed so if the top value on the scale is less than the bottom
value the limits will be switched.
FIGURE 6.12

If the type of analogue input is a Thermocouple use the Range drop down menu to select the type of
Thermocouple and the unit of measurement. Tick the box if up scale burn out is required. The Refer-
ence Junction measures the temperature at a designated point.
Internal Automatic - Uses the cold junction sensor in the recorder as a variable reference temperature.
External 0 ×C - Assumes the cold junction is held at 0 °C to provide a 0 mV reference, external to the
recorder. External Specify - Uses a Reference Junction held at a constant temperature. Specify the
temperature that the cold junction sensor is to be set at. External Input - Use a thermocouple or resis-
tance thermometer from another channel to measure as the cold junction sensor.
If the type on analogue input is a Resistance Thermometer, select this from the analogue input type
drop down menu. This screen only requires the range and the unit of measure to be entered. A Resis-
tance Thermometer measures the resistance of the device and produces a temperature
Analogue Output Setup or Re-transmission

Not available on the eZtrend V5. If a Output card is fitted, the available
analogue outputs will be displayed as a list. Click on an output and tick to
enable, select a pen from the drop down menu. Tick to enable over range if
required, this allows 4 mA either side of 4-20 mA. If this option is not available but the unit has a output
card fitted, check the details have been entered correctly in the Hardware wizard.
Digital input/output port setup

NB: Each Input/Output line is shared so it can only be an input or an output.
Select each digital from the list e.g. Dig1, this will appear in the Label box.
The label is to identify the condition of the input, for example On State could
be labelled ‘Pump On’ and Off State could be labelled ‘Pump Off’. Use the On/Off state to enable each
digital.
Specify the Direction of the line, select either an Digital Input or a Relay Output.
There is a Fail Safe option which can be activated on the relay output direction, this holds the relay in
an energised state until triggered by an alarm, when the relay is de-energised. Any power failure will
cause the same result. When using fail safe with a maths expression refer to “Maths and Fail Safe” on
page 294.
Choose the Log to event window, this will prompt a message to appear in the events list window when
the digitals change state.
Check the Place a mark on the chart box to place a notification mark onto the chart when the digital
changes state.
Events System
To use the Events system with the recorder the Events option must be active on the recorder. The
Events option can be added to the recorder at any time.
Events are certain conditions or operations which can be setup and logged according to the time and
date of the occurrence, subsequently they can be reviewed in a list or represented on a graph. Click on
the Events button from the side bar and select an event number from a list of up to 32 separate events.
Tick Enabled to activate the screen. Each event can be named, for identification purposes.
For details on viewing recorder Events and Batch information, see “Recorder Event/Batch Viewer”
on page 183

Setting up Events
Events can be set up so when a condition occurs during recording it produces an outcome, this is
known as ‘Cause’ and ‘Effect’. Select a Cause and the Effect by clicking on the Add box at the bottom
of each Cause and Effect window for a selection list.
Limited Events are available on the eZtrend V5 . For listings of Events ‘Cause and Effects’, see See
“Appendix D - Events” on page 315.
For displaying Events on a graph, see “Graphing Events” on page 247.
.
FIGURE 6.13
As shown in Figure 6.13, one single cause can be set up to have many effects. The event set up here
shows that when the Digital Input goes high the effects will be:
• Logging will start (Logging <Start>).
• A Mark will be placed on the chart (Mark Chart <Marker1>).
• Event 1 will be activated (Event<1 Events delayed by 60 seconds).

If Into Alarm or Out Alarm are selected as a Cause, the alarm selection dialog box will appear display-
ing all the available alarms.

If an Event is selected to be an Effect, the ‘Select events to trigger’ box will appear. In Figure 6.14,
Event 2 has been selected with a delay time of 240 seconds.as an Effect of Event 1.
FIGURE 6.14
Event 2 does not require a Cause to be set as it will be forced to activate from being an Effect of Event
1. See Figure 6.13 on page 151. Event 2 has been set up to Stop Logging after a time period of 240
seconds and Mark the chart.
FIGURE 6.15 example shown is for a Minitrend V5 configuration
NB. Use the ‘Check all events’ box to verify the setup will work correctly. A warning message may
appear to check the entries are correct.

Alternatively many ‘Causes’ can be setup to have the same ‘Effect’. Up to 32 separate Events can be
setup with up to 20 Causes or Effects in each Event, shown in Figure 6.16.
FIGURE 6.16
For listings of Events ‘Cause and Effects’, see See “Appendix D - Events” on page 315.
For displaying Events on a graph, see “Graphing Events” on page 247.
Event Marker Setup

Event Markers are messages posted onto the recorders screen, when an Event occurs. There are 20
event markers that can be customised, each marker can have up to 80 characters with embedded
parameter tags <!***!> allowing real-time recorder data to be inserted into the text.
The Event Marker is truncated to display only 40 characters on the graph, the full 80 characters will be
displayed in the message screen.
Select the marker number from the Message box, 20 markers are available for use, markers 10 to 20
are set up with pre-defined control characters that can be edited and added to. For more information,
See “Batch Mode Event Markers” on page 156.
Enter text into the Marker Text box and add the embedded parameters tag, if required, using the drop
down lists marked Control Type, Variable Type, Pens and Label

.
FIGURE 6.17
L = Label
P = Pens
Build up the Marker Text that will be added to the 2 = Pen number
graph to mark an Event
U = Units
Embedded parameter tags
The Marker Text can be built up using combinations of user entered text and the embedded parameter
tags.
Figure 6.17 shows an example of Marker text, this is how it is broken down.
‘Temperature equals <!PP1!><!LPU!>and pressure equals <!PP2!><!LP2U!>’
‘Temperature equals <!PP1!>’ this tag is telling the system to process the information on Pen1 and add
it to the marker.
‘<!LP1U!’ means add the Pen 1 as a label to the marker plus the units in which it is measuring e.g. sec-
onds, inches or °C.
The second part reads ‘pressure equals <!PP2!>’ this is telling the system to process the information for
Pen 2 and add it to the marker.
‘<!LP2U!>’ means add Pen 2 as a label plus the units of measurement to the marker.
This will insert the values of Pen 1 with the Units for Pen 1 and the value of Pen 2 and the Units Pen 2
into the marker.
A tag must be placed within the text to ensure the recorder information, e.g. the Pen value, is inserted.
When the marker text is finished click on the Add Tag button and click Done when all markers are com-
plete.
For help on setting up markers use the “Marker tables (only available for Honeywell V5 recorders)” on
page 155.

Marker tables (only available for Honeywell V5 recorders)
Embedded parameter tags <!***!>
Control Type Variable Type Pens Label
Process Pens Pen number? -

Digital Inputs Digital number -
Relays Relay number -
Totals - -
Counters* Sub type -
Event* Event number*
Alarm* Alarm number*
Digital* Digital number*
User* -
Control Type Variable Name Comms port
System Disk usage -

PC card usage -
Memory usage -
ASCII Input Front RS232*
Rear RS485*
Rear RS232*
Control Type Variable Type Label
Label Pens Pen number Tag

Description
Units
Scale
Digital Inputs Digital number Tag
State text
Relays Relay number Tag
State text
Totals - -
Counters* Sub type Label
Event* Event number*
Alarm* Alarm number*
Digital* Digital number*
User* -
Counters and sub-types marked * are not available on the eZtrend V5 .

Batch Mode Event Markers
For Batch Mode the Event markers 10 to 20 have pre-defined control characters set up for controlling
batch information. These can be edited and changed adding information for each marker. Markers 1 to
9 default as blank markers but can be used for Batch Control.
Marker Control
Function Description
Number Character
Places a marker to Start the batch. This MUST

10 //S Start Batch be followed by a space and then the Batch name
or number.
11 //E End Batch Places a marker to End the batch.
12 //P Pause* Places a marker and Pauses the Batch *
13 //R Resume Places a marker and Resumes a Paused batch
14 //A Abort Places a marker and Aborts the batch
Places a continuation marker to add a user
15 //+ Add text to Comment
defined text to a Comment
Used to identify when a Batch Name or Number
Rename a Batch Name or
16 //B needs to be renamed, as an individual marker or
Number
as a part of a Marker
Places a Marker on its own plus a user defined
17 //D Batch Description Batch Description, or can be added as a part of a
Marker
Places a Marker on its own, plus a user defined
18 //I User ID
ID, or can be added as a part of a Marker
19 //L Lot number Lot information, or can be added as a part of a
Marker
20 //C Comment Comments, or can be added as a part of a
Marker
*Pause can be de-activated by using //E (End Batch), //R (Resume) or //A (Abort)
It is recommended that the Batch name or number be added to //S, //E and //A to identify the batch.
Examples of Batch Event markers
1. //S 240 //I Roger //C Start Event Count <!PCE1!>
2. //P 240 //C Pause for reading <!PCE1!>
3. //A 240 //I Roger <!PCE1!>
4. //E 240 //I Roger //C End Event Count <!PCE1!>
Marker number 1: //S = Start Batch, 240 is the Batch name, //I = ID of User “Roger”, //C = Comment
“Start Event Counter”, <!PCE1!> = Process/Counter/Event1.
To increment batch numbers use the Counters feature. See “Event Counter Setup” on page 157

Markers on the Recorder
When Event/Batch markers have been set up they can be up-loaded into the recorder using the FTP
facility. See “Importing Data via FTP or Secure Communication Interface” on page 175.
Markers can also be entered into the recorder via the keypad on the front of the recorder. Turn the
thumbwheel to produce an arrow, press to select. The chart menu will appear, select the Mark on chart
option from the menu using the thumbwheel. Text can be entered using the thumbwheel, creating a new
mark on chart or editing existing markers.
For details on viewing recorder Events and Batch information, see “Recorder Event/Batch Viewer”
on page 183.
Barcodes for Batch

Batch markers can be created using independent barcode software. The barcodes can then be read
using a barcode wand or reader. Any type of Batch marker can be encoded into a barcode using the
same control characters used to build up a batch marker.
This example shows a barcode encoded to start a batch:

//S = Start Batch
216 = Batch name
//I = User ID is Fred
//C = Comment text is Test
A barcode with up to 25 characters (including spaces) can be read into the recorder using the RS232
interface and suitable RS232 ASCII barcode reader.
Event Counter Setup

The Event Counter option is not available on the eZtrend V5 .
The Counter system can be used as a Cause or an Effect. The Counter Cause triggers an Effect when
a Counter reaches a specified value. The Counters can be reset using the Event Effect.
Counters as a Cause
Under the Cause window click on Add, select Counter, as a ‘Cause’, to produce the Counter Cause
Setup box. Enter the Type of counter from one of the four programmable counters; Event, Alarm, Dig-
ital or User. All except ‘User’ are continually running in the background and are already enabled. The
User type of counter can be used to count any type of event(s), see “Counter Setup” on page 158.
Enter the type of counter, which event is to be counted and the value of the count.

Counter Setup
Counter setup is only required when a User type counter is selected in the Counter Cause Setup box,
see “Event Counter Setup” on page 157.
To activate, select the Counter Setup button at the bottom of the main events screen.
• Choose a counter number

from 1 to 16 and click in the ena-
bled box.
• Enter a tag or description to

identify the counter.
• Indicate a Start point for the

counter and a value in the Rollo-
ver box for the counter to reach
and restart the count.
Click Done when complete. The
Counter is in place and can be used
on any Event.
Example: Figure 6.18.
FIGURE 6.18
Configure Pen 2 to have a high alarm at 95%, set up Event 1 with a Counter as the cause. The counter
value is set to 5 so when Pen 5 goes into alarm for the fifth time, an Effect is triggered. A tag can be
added to appear on the recorder screen when the counter has reached its value and the event has been
triggered.
Counter as an Effect
Resets or increments User, Alarm, Digital or Event Counters.
Select the type of Counter effect User, Alarm, Digital or Event. Select a counter from the drop down
menu.
Only the User counter will enable the option to Reset to or Increment By and a value to be entered.

Using/Viewing Counter Values
The value of a Count can be used in Maths, Markers or E-mail messages. Display or log through the
maths expression.
For details on using counters as part of a Maths expression see See “Appendix A - Maths Expressions
for Honeywell V5 recorders” on page 287.
• CUn = Counter User (where n is the User counter number)
• CAn = Counter Alarms (where n is the Alarm number)
• CEn = Counter Events (where n is the Event number)
• CDn = Counter Digitals (where n is the Digital input number)
Event Email setup

The E-mail Event is an effect triggered when a particular cause is executed. Setup pre-set E-mail
addresses and messages for use with the Events System. The E-mail Setup button is at the bottom of
the main events screen. Up to 8 destination E-mail addresses can be entered, including 1 Administrator
addresses for when mail is unsuccessfully delivered. The administrator address also acts as a source of
the E-mail.
• Enter the recipient’s name and E-mail address (not forgetting an E-mail address for the
Administrator).
• Select a message number and subject.
• Type the message information to be E-mailed in the Message text box.
Click on Done when complete. The message is now in place and can be used on any event where the
E-mail option is selected as an effect.
General operation of the E-mail system.

The recorder sends messages for distribution by an E-mail Server. The E-mail server is located by its
IP Address as set-up in the communications set-up options. When the recorder sends an E-mail mes-
sage, it locates the E-mail server and uses SMTP (Simple Message Transfer Protocol) to send the mes-
sage to the E-mail server. SMTP allows the recorder to send messages to an E-mail server without
having its own E-mail address; because of this the E-mail server will not be able to send any reply back
to the recorder.
When setting-up the E-mail address list, it is important to include the E-mail administrator address. The
Administrator E-mail Address is the E-mail address to where the E-mail server will respond in the
event of any problems with the delivery of E-mail messages. The Administrator will also appear to be
the source of any E-mail messages sent by the recorder. Most E-mail systems require a ‘Reply To’
address as part of an E-mail message, since the recorder does not have its own E-mail address; it uses
the E-mail administrator as the ‘Reply To’ address.
Any E-mail message will consist of a delivery list (recipients), a subject, and an optional message body.
The message body may be omitted for very short messages, or where the message is to be sent to a
paging system.

Setup Auto E-mailing
The E-mail Subject may be either one of the existing Event Markers, or one of the two E-mail subjects.
E-mail subjects can be preset into the E-mail system e.g. a Report required to log the same information
as a regular event.
E-mails can be made up from:-
1. One of the two standard messages preset into the E-mail system.
2. Markers preset up in the Marker set-up system.
3. Text
Or combinations of 1, 2 and 3.
The E-mail message body may be either one of the existing event markers, or one of the two E-mail
message blocks. Event Markers are restricted to 80 characters each. The two E-mail message blocks
are restricted to just over 1000 characters each. Both the message subject and body may contain
embedded marker tags as used in the event markers.
When the recorder sends an E-mail message that includes a message body, the recorder name,
recorder number and the time/date will be appended to the end of the message body text. This is to
allow easy identification of when the message was sent, and by which recorder.
Any E-mail message is sent as an effect within the recorder events system, so anything that can be con-
figured to act as an event cause may be configured to send an E-mail message. Any E-mail message
may be sent to up to 8 of the recipients. If the E-mail server supports named groups of E-mail
addresses, an E-mail message may be sent to a combination of E-mail addresses and E-mail groups.
From the Events Set-up screen

• Set-up the required event marker messages. Note that the same message may be used
both as an event marker (mark on chart) and as part of an E-mail message (subject or
body).
• Select the E-mail Set-up button at the bottom of the Events Set-up screen.
• Enter the list of E-mail recipients, not forgetting the E-mail Administrator address.
• If either of the two E-mail subject fields, or larger E-mail message blocks are required, they
will need to be set-up.
• Select the Done button to close the E-mail set-up screen.
• Select the required event to which E-mail message is to be attached, and select. The Add
button below the Action list, and from the list of available actions, select E-mail. The Set-up
auto E-mailing screen will then be shown.
• Select the required E-mail subject and message body text from the drop-down list boxes.
• Select the required E-mail recipient(s) by highlighting the E-mail address and selecting the
Add button. Note that up-to 12 recipients may be used for each E-mail message, see “Email
tab” on page 97.

Importing and Exporting of Set-ups
The Transfer button is where the Setup can be imported from other
recorders or exported to other recorders via removable media. Click on the
transfer button to either Import or Export, identify the setup to import or the location to export to using
the Change button.
If you are importing data from a disk and there are multiple sub directories (one for each recorder), point
at a specific sub-directory to import just that recorder or the root to import all the recorders. Choose a
folder to import from or export to e.g. ‘A’ drive for a floppy disk.
For more information on importing data and setups, see “Importing” on page 173
For importing via FTP, see “Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface” on
page 175.
Hardware Related Set-ups

This will only be used there are changes to the hardware fitted to the
recorder. For example; when adding options cards such as an Relay Alarm
card, Digital Input/Output card or Pulse card (Minitrend QX and Multitrend SX ), Comms card
option (Minitrend and Multitrend V5 ).
Recorder configuration complete

When all setups are complete press OK, a prompt to save will only appear if changes have been made
in the setup window.
Printing Setups
Honeywell V5 Recorders
Select the recorder button on the left and right click on the recorder containing the setup required to be
printed. Select the Print button and choose the setup required form the list and press OK.
NB. Full recorder configuration can take up many pages. If this is required, select Landscape mode to
cut down the page count. The Font type can be changed if desired. Click Done when each tab is fin-
ished and Print when all tabs are completed.
Select each tab for General, Pens, Analogues and Digitals to configure what is required in the setup
printout.


Chapter 7: TrendManager Suite
Recorders
All the areas listed below are covered in detail in the TrendManager Suite Help. Click in any
area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files..
FIGURE 7.1 Add New Recorder
Button Bar
Add New Recorder

Button produces the
Select new device
box
Recorders slide-
out pane
Add a recorder
See “Add New Device” on page 59 and “Add New Recorder” on page 137, for instructions
on how to set up a new recorder.
Delete a recorder
• Go to Recorders list in the Recorders slide-out pane.
• Drag and drop the desired recorder icon over a Trash can or right click and select
Delete.
Note: this deletes all the data associated with this recorder

Copy a recorder
This copies only a recorder setup, not the data associated with this recorder
• Go to the Recorders list in the Recorders slide-out pane.
• Right click on the icon and select copy.
• Select the desired setup from the setups list and click OK.
Edit a recorder
• Go to the Recorder list in the Recorders slide-out pane.
• Double click or right click on desired recorder icon.
• Click on open. Select the desired setup from the Setups list and click OK.
• Make any changes, click OK. Follow any further instructions.
• Click Ok and confirm changes.
Import data from a recorder

For importing and exporting setups, see “Importing” on page 173.
For FTP transfer, see “Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface” on page 175.
Browse a recorder
Available with TrendServer only and if Ethernet is set up in the hardware Wizard, see “Edit a
recorder” on page 168.
This function allows the user to browse a recorder on the web provided the
recorder has been saved to a database with a configured IP Address. The recorder
will have had an Ethernet card fitted to configure the IP Address. To browse multi-
ple recorders, IE8 or higher version is required.
Open the recorder by double or right clicking, to reveal the browse button. Activate
this button to generate a web browser window. The recorder will automatically be
dialled up for viewing on a web page. See “Web Browser” on page 215.
Upload button
Available on TrendServer only and if Ethernet is set up in the Hardware Wizard, see “Edit a
recorder” on page 168.
Setups can be loaded from a PC to a recorder via Ethernet. An Ethernet card must
be fitted, as an option, to the recorder. The recorder must be saved to a database
with a configured IP Address.
In the recorder slide-out pane, double left click or right click on a recorder to open it.
The Upload button will appear if a recorder has been saved to a data base and has
an IP Address. This button will upload a setup from the PC to a recorder. Activate
this button to produce the select setup box, the set up will now proceed via Ethernet connection.
NOTE: The above features are not available for the recorders which are part of Archived Data-
base.
Recorder clash list

A dialog box is produced on import only if multiple devices already exist with matching device ID num-
ber or serial numbers.

Databases
Add a Database
Go to Database list in the Recorders slide-out pane.
• Click on Add New Database in the recorders list and the Dialog box will appear.
• Enter name and description then click OK. The same name may not be used on the same
database server..
FIGURE 7.2 Add New Database
Change the current Database

• Go to the Database list in the Recorders slide-out pane.
• Click on the desired database.

This will be the current database until another is selected.

Add an Archive Database
• Click on Server button and select Archive Database Server from the list.
• Go to the database list in the Recorders slide-out pane.
• Click on the Add New Database, a "Browse for Folder" Dialog appears.
• Provide the database path where Archive Database (backed up database) is located.
Make sure after backing up the database the folder name should be modified to a name
different from "tmp5db" or "TMP5DB". And then click ok , the database will get added to
the databases.
Note: to backup the database you need to use Database Management Tool. Refer to “Database
Management Tool” on page 4 for further details.
A “X” mark in the Databases pane indicates that there are

no databases assed to the Archive Database Server
Modifying Recorder setup

Database choice dialog box appears when importing from a recorder or saving an edited setup. If an
existing recorder has been found in the database which has the same ID number and a different serial
number or the same serial number and a different ID number, the user will be asked whether to save
into this recorder’s database area or to make a new device. If there are many similar recorders, the
user is asked to create a new one or select a destination from a list.
All the areas listed below are covered in the TrendManager Software Suite Help. Click in any
area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files.

Server access table.
Server access Server access Servers Databases Recorders Pens

pen 1
pen 2
rec 1
Initial pen 3
Database pen 4
pen 1
rec 2
pen 2
pen 5
rec 1
pen6
TrendManager Local Server
pen 1
New pen 2
rec 2
Database 1 pen 3
pen 4
pen 6
rec 3
pen 7
New pen 1
rec 1
Database 2 pen 2
TrendServer
pen 1
pen 2
rec 1
Initial pen 3
Remote Database pen 4
Server 1 pen 1
rec 2
pen 2
New pen 5
Archive rec 1
Database 1 pen 6
Database
pen 1
Server
pen 2
rec 1
Initial pen 3
Remote Database pen 4
Server 2 pen 1
rec 2
pen 2
New pen 5
rec 1
Database 1 pen 6

Folders
Graph Folders
This is a list of folders in which the user can organise graphs.
FIGURE 7.3 Graphs and Folders
Add a folder
• Go to the Folders list under the Graphs slide-out pane.
• Click Add new folder, enter a name and click OK.
Move a graph between folders

• Go to the Folders list in the Graphs slide-out pane
• Select a graph and drag it into the destination folder.
Delete a folder
• Drag and drop over a trash can to delete.
Copy a folder
• Drag the folder onto a blank area of the folders pane or double click and select copy.
Rename a folder
• Go to the Folders list in the Graphs slide-out pane.
• Double click on the folder to bring up the control panel and click on the rename button.
All the areas listed below are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help. Click in any area on the
screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files.

Importing
The Import button from the main tool bar on the left of the screen, will produce the
External Import box. This function can be used to import data or a setup from an
external storage device. See also “Importing from TrendViewer” on page 173
In the External Import box, select to import either data or setup. Ensure the correct
information is available from the external storage device (Disk, Card, Compact
Flash, SD card or USB key), and can be accessed.
Database Location will identify which data-
FIGURE 7.4 External Import box
base to import to.
There are two radio buttons in this dialog, one
for "GR Series" and another is for "XSeries or
Older".
In order to import GR Series data we need to
check GR Serie s button. To import X
Series data or Older check the" X Series
or Older button.
The Source Location will default to ‘From
Directory. To change the file location, select
the Change button. This will allow the user to
browse the network to locate the desired file.
Alternatively a setup or data can be imported
by selecting From Network (FTP). See
“Importing via FTP or Secure Communi-
cations Interface” on page 175.
General options
Auto graph the data is active by default, this will automatically display the data that has been imported
on to a graph.
Make a log file in the program directory. The make log file in the program directory option is useful if
a disk won’t import properly due to corruption. If used, a file named log.txt will be written to the program
directory detailing exactly what was imported and when. Any errors encountered will also be listed
here. The log file can be viewed using Notepad. The final check adds further details to the log file.
Imported data from the same recorder over different periods of time will be detected and loaded into the
same database, the graph will display as a continuous trend.
Importing from TrendViewer

This will produce the graph data dialog which will import only data from an external storage device.

Importing Data from other Honeywell devices
The TrendManager Software Suite has a built in Data Conversion Tool that will accurately
reproduce data from these supported Honeywell devices.
• VRX recorder range • HC900 control systems

• UMC800 control systems • DPR100/180/250 recorder range
• UDC Controller Range • 10260 and 11280 Actuators
• DR4300, DR4500 Truline
UDC, DPR100, Actuators communicate in modbus only and cannot give data for import.
The data is imported from the device media using the TrendManager Pro Software Suite
Import function into the database.
Select the Import button from the main tool bar and the External import box will appear as normal.
Select the data option and select From Directory as the source location. Use the Change button to
browse your PC or network to locate the data. When the correct location has been selected press the
Yes button to import.
The User Acknowledgement box will appear, to proceed this must be acknowledged. Select to import
data to a New or Existing device.
For an Existing device the Importing Controller box will display the existing devices in the TMP data-
bases. Select the device you wish to import the data to and click on Next. This will start the data import-
ing.
If the data is for a New device, a list of device types will appear, select one and go to Next. Enter a
device name and description and click on OK. Next choose the format type for the importing data. The
two different formats are:
• X Series/GR Series (recommended) - This has the benefit of flexible pen scale lim-
its that can be changed at any time in the X Series release of TrendServer. Data
imported in this format cannot be loaded into a version 5 release of TrendServer.
• Version 5 - Pen scale limits will be fixed once set, and any data values imported
outside of the pen scale limits will be capped at the appropriate limit. However, this
data can be read in by version 5 release of TrendServer.
Click on OK and the data will start to import. If there is a device in the database with the same Serial
number but a different ID, this will be flagged up and you can choose to add the data to this device or a
new device will be created. For a new device choose from the Database Device Destination User
Selection box.
The Data File conversion will start and the destination box will appear to confirm the correct device.
When the file conversion is complete press ok.
When the import is complete the data will be automatically displayed as a graph showing the data as
pen traces and displaying each associated pen. Any events will be imported (via Trendbus only) with
the data and can be displayed on the graph using the Event button at the bottom of the graph.
The device is loaded into the recorders list for identification purposes, click on the Recorders icon to
display the list of recorders. The device can not be configured from the software. The imported data
can be graphed, analysed, archived, printed and exported to a spread sheet. See “Exporting data to
a spreadsheet” on page 202
For data imported from Honeywell V5, X Series recorders, an Event viewer is available by right
clicking on the recorder in the recorders list and selecting Events. See “Recorder Event/Batch
Viewer” on page 183.

Importing via FTP or Secure Communications Interface
Available on TrendServer ONLY.
TrendServer uses FTP/IP (File Transfer Protocol / Internet Protocol), this is the transfer of data
between a computer and a recorder or between two or more computers. Every Windows PC has FTP
capability built in.
TrendServer has a Secure Comms feature which provides for the secure transfer of data between a
computer and a GR Serie s recorder provided Secure WSD is be enabled and the credit option in
the recorder is enabled. It uses authentication certificates that have been installed on the recorders and
TrendServer for this secure communications. The GR Serie srecorders support a Credit enabled
function for doing secure FTP data transfers since the normal FTP protocol is an unsecure protocol.
TrendServer offers the ability to import data from recorders via an Ethernet connection. This is stan-
dard on all recorders with an Ethernet card.
Due to the potential of large amounts of data that may be available it is not recommended to use FTP
and Realtime at the same time.
For import via FTP select FromNetwork (FTP) as a Source Location. This will reveal more of the box
giving download information, see “From Network Setup” on page 177.
Importing Data via FTP or Secure Communication Interface

Select type of import, either Data or Setup, this is the same as for Importing from a directory except that
when importing data via FTP you will have a choice of New data or all data. The All function will
import all the data in the recorder’s memory to the external device port. The New function will
just import any new data since the last import was made.

Each recorder is identified by its name and a unique internet number known as an IP address (Internet
Protocol Address). For more details on IP Addresses see your IT system administrator.
If the recorders and TrendServer are on the same local network, a number can be selected from a
range of pre-allocated numbers.
Three buttons will become available.
• Set up - Add, Edit or Remove the recorder you wish to import from. See “From Net-
work Setup” on page 177.
• Batch - See “Batch set up” on page 178.
• Schedule - The Schedule button is for adding this recorder to a time/date schedule
to import data, see “Schedule Setup” on page 178.
Activate any further General options as required, such as - Auto graph the data, Make a log file in the
program directory and Include extra diagnostic details.
For X & GR Series recorders select your network connection speed. Please check with your IT sup-
port team as putting in a faster connection speed than the network can handle may cause the FTP
transfer to work incorrectly and cause “Time Out” messages.
For V5 recorders, select Disk drive or PC card* to download from. If required tick to “Delete data on
recorder on successful completion”.

From Network Setup
Click on Setup in the External Import box to produce the Recorder Manager, this will be empty at
first. Click on Add to add a new recorder, the Recorder Setup box will appear. To modify any existing
recorders either select Edit or double click on the entry displayed in the box, this will also produce the
Recorder Setup box. Remove will delete the selected recorder from the list. Press Done when all set-
ups are complete.
FIGURE 7.5 FTP Recorder Setup requires IP address
In the Recorder Setup box enter the IP Address, if known. If the IP Address is not known click on Look
up the IP address from the recorder name button. This will translate the recorder’s name to an
address. Enter a description and click OK. The recorder’s address will be checked when a download is
attempted.
Click on Look up the IP address from the recorder name, to locate the recorder’s address from its
network name i.e. [email protected]/sensing. Enter the name and click Find, the address
will appear if it has been found. Click on Use for the recorder to be added into the system. If unsuc-
cessful, check the IP address, DSN server and Internet connections.
The other method is to select the “Find Device” button. This will search for all X Series & GR
recorders on the network using their Network ID, eg xs-nnnnnn (where “nnnnnn” is the recorder’s
serial number).
Give a name for the recorder. This should be something recognisable, all recorders should be given dif-
ferent names. Press OK.
On pressing “OK”, then “Done” you will return to the External Import dialog box as above.
Check that “Setup only” and “from Network” are still selected. Then drop down the list and select the
recorder you have just added. The recorder name and IP address are in the list.
Finally select “Import”, TrendServer Pro will download the setup from the recorder and this will be
displayed in a setup window. Press OK and this recorder setup will be added to the recorder list.
Note: The recorder will be added to the list under the Recorder Name as set in the recorder itself. (This
is the name that appears in the top right corner of the recorder screen when in normal logging mode)
NOT the name you gave the recorder when setting up the FTP.

Batch set up
Use the Batch button to select a number of recorders required for importing via Network. All available
recorders are displayed in the Batch Setup page, click on the Available Recorders in the window on
the left, use the Add button to transfer that recorder to the Recorders in Batch window. Select OK when
your selection for the batch list is complete. To start download return to the External Import box, select
from the drop down list and click on ‘Yes’.
Schedule Setup
Use the Schedule button to produce the Schedule Setup box. Use this to manage and download a list
of selected recorders at specific times. This box will be empty on first use, click on Add for a new entry.
This will generate the Schedule settings box used for adding and editing schedules. Existing sched-
ules cannot be edited whist the schedule is active.
FIGURE 7.6 Schedule Settings
Description - User identifiable text for schedule recognition.

Destination Database - Database location where the FTP download will go to. Lists available servers
and databases. Import operation cannot be done on the Archive Database. User cannot select Archive
databases for FTP scheduler operation. Import operation cannot be done on the Archive Database.
User cannot select Archive databases for FTP scheduler operation.

Add and Remove windows - The left window lists the recorders available and the right window lists
the recorders that have been selected to download from. Use the Add/Add All and Remove/Remove All
buttons to select and deselect recorders. Double clicking on a recorder in one window will transfer it to
the other window.
Select when to perform the download - Single Import does the download once, Interval will down-
load at a specific times on a specific day, these boxes become active when this option is enabled. Enter
at what interval the down loads should take place. Selected Days reveals the days of the week at the
bottom of the window so the recorder data can be downloaded on predefined days.
Download from - Select from the recorder’s internal Disk drive, PC card if fitted (V5 recorders). You
can elect to delete the imported files on the recorder once the import has been successful.
Select the Delete files on recorder option so when the import is successful all the files will be deleted
from that recorder, freeing the disk space.
Receipt in log file option will create a file in the program directory called shedlog.txt. This will hold all
the schedule downloads when activated. This file can get quite big if used regularly.
Write detailed log file will be available and will add more detail to the standard log file, this file can
also become very large. Use with caution.
Synchronise recorder clock with PC, if there is more than five seconds difference between the
recorder’s clock and the PC then the recorder will update in line with the PC. This option is available
only on X & GR Series recorders, not V5 recorders.
*Floppy drive only available on the eZtrend V5
Schedule Import
When all details are completed in the Schedule settings box press OK and return to the FTP scheduler
setup box. Enable the scheduler and click on Done. No further action is necessary once the scheduler
is active. Close the External Import box.
If the FTP/Secure Communication Interface related services do not start , this error message below will
appear while opening TrendServer Pro when scheduler is enabled.
NB. If the FTP scheduler icon is enabled “Connection to TMSFtpScheduler is lost” message will be dis-
played in FTPstatus bar
See “General options” on page 173.

Realtime Communications
Only available with TrendServer software.
Ensure the hardware for the communications card is connected correctly, refer to the
Honeywell V5 Communications manual for Minitrend and Multitrend Plus
and eZtrend V5 recorders. For X Series & GR recorders refer to the Comms
section in the User manual.
Realtime Comms can be made via Ethernet, Modbus TCP/IP or Modbus RS485 connections. Trend-
bus RS485 is available on Minitrend and Multitrend Plus V5 recorders only. Only data can be
sent via Modbus, so no recorder configurations or events are sent via Realtime and Logged data.
Due to the potential of large amounts of data that may be available it is not recommended to use FTP
and Realtime at the same time.
Note: Please note that data logging continues even when user is logged off from the system.
NB. *Only Ethernet communications is available on the eZtrend V5 . RS485 communications is
available on the eZtrend as an option. A communications card and an expansion card must be fitted
in the recorder.
See “Appendix E - Ethernet & E-mail” on page 319 for more information.
Communications Server
The Comms server software manages the communications status of a recorder across a comms port
connection. Data can be configured for logging to a database and realtime data transferred direct
through a client connection such as TrendServer software.
Note: The Comms Server is launched as a Service and need to make sure it is running to get
real time and FTP data.
Recorders are added to the comms server via connections to communications ports. When recorders
are entered, they can be configured for logging data to a database. When the data is logging, the
recorder will appear in the database list. Databases can be added using the Database server. Realtime
data is setup through the comms server showing client connections i.e. the TrendServer software,
and comms port settings. Realtime logging can be done through the TrendServer software or
through the comms server. All data, logged or realtime, can be interfaced directly from the comms
server to the server application software (client connection). To access the Comms Server and Real-
time, ensure the recorders required have been added into the comms server.
If Comms Server related services have not been started you will see the below error message while
opening TrendServer Pro.
If Remote communication server is not running and the remote Comm Server is clicked from the
“Comms Server” pane the following error message should pop up.

For more detailed information on the Comms Server refer to the appropriate recorder Communications
or User manual.
Communications Realtime Settings

• Select the System button from the left side of the main screen and click on the realtime
icon, this will produce a window containing the realtime pen settings. All these settings
are for realtime data only.
• From this box the default for the Data Rate and the Type of data can be set to either
Sample or MaxMin. Sample will log the actual data value of the last sampled reading.
MaxMin will log the maximum and minimum values since the last log.
• Click in the Events box to retrieve and display event data, if required, then enter a default
data rate time.
• Use the left mouse button to move the indicator on the Realtime Graphing Data Buffer
Size indicator, from 10 minutes to 2 hours. This is the amount of data being displayed in
the realtime data graph. To stop the realtime data scrolling, hit the Pause button, use the
scroll bar at the bottom of the graph to review previous data, see “Pause button” on
page 256 and “Realtime Data Buffer” on page 181.
Click OK when the Realtime Pen Settings are complete.
Realtime Data Buffer

• The realtime data has a buffer of time which can be set by the user so a timed amount of
data is stored in the buffer. This buffer is from 10 minutes to 2 hours, then the oldest data
will disappear from the realtime graph.
• Go to the System button down the left side of the main screen, and select the realtime
icon. See “Communications Realtime Settings” on page 181.
Realtime Comms logging

To configure a recorder for logging first click on the Realtime icon in the left hand
toolbar on the Main screen. This will produce the Recorders slide out pane listing
the available recorders for Realtime logging.
• Right click on the desired recorder and click on the Log icon to produce the Logging Con-
figuration box for that particular recorder. The recorder details will be displayed showing
the Port Number and the Device ID Number, check these match the recorder. If the infor-
mation in the Logging Configuration box is empty check the Comms Server software to
see if the connection is active between the recorder and the Comms server.
For more detailed information on the Comms Server refer to “Comms Server” on page 217.
For more information on Modbus communication refer to “Appendix G - Modbus Communications
and Modbus Profile Tool” on page 325.

• The Database Configuration displays the Database Servers that are connected and the
database currently being or to be logged to. Archived data server is not available for data
logging hence no logging in Archived database (they are just for viewing and analysing)
• A list of Channels available to be logged will be displayed for that recorder, each channel
can be added individually for logging or select all channels for logging. If all channels are
selected then the log rate and the type of logging will be set the same for all, unless indi-
vidually edited afterwards. Please ensure the log rate is set within the span allowed. Tick
the right hand box if you require events to be logged to the database also.
• When the channels are selected for logging they will appear in the bottom window, dis-
playing their log rate and the type of logging. To change this, first select a channel and
click on the Edit Channel button to produce Logging Channel Configuration box, click OK.
The Delete button will take the channel out of this window and put it into the window
showing available channels for logging. Logging will stop for this channel. Apply the addi-
tions, deletions or changes before clicking on the OK button.
• A summary of the latest set of changes can be displayed by clicking on the Summary of
all changes button.
Click OK on the Logging Configuration box when the channel setup is complete
To view the database go to the Recorder icon down the left side of the main screen, and select the
database designated for that recorder.

Batch Mode
From the main menu bar the Batch button will open the Batch View window. This will
display the Batch data for all the recorders in the currently selected database. Not
available on TrendViewer .
Batch is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system in the
X Series & GRrecorders.
Recorder Event/Batch Viewer

To view both Event and Batch information for a specific recorder, right click on a recorder in the Record-
ers list to reveal a toolbar. Select Batch or Events, both these buttons take you to the Events/Batch
View.
For both the Events and Batch tabs the Device ID will be displayed in the Title bar if this tab is launched
from the recorders list. If this is launched from the main menu tool bar the database will be displayed in
the Title bar.
Events tab
The Events tab contains all recorded events for the selected recorder. The list contains an icon to show
the type of Event, the Date/Time and Details of each Event.
• World icon button - All events.
• Recorder icon button - System messages, general messages, diagnostics.
• Exclamation mark in a triangle - System warning, events
• Red circle with a red line through it - System warning.critical events
• Flag icon button - Automated messages, shows only automatic markers.
• Head icon button - Manually entered, shows only user defined messages.
• Yellow bell icon - Alarm events On or Off (yellow is an active alarm)
• Light bulb button - Digital and relay input events.
• Barcode icon - Batch event has occurred (see Batch tab)

The columns within the window can be resized by placing the cursor between the two columns in the
headings, the cursor will change to a double arrow, then drag the cursor to the desired column width.
There is an arrow next to the Date heading that will reconfigure the list from ascending to descending
date/time order and vice versa.
To view the full Events list drag the vertical scroll bar up and down or use the up and down arrows at
the top and bottom of the scroll bar. Alternatively, use the arrow up and down arrow keys on your PC
keyboard.
FIGURE 7.7 Event Tab
The Filter option, when switched On, will activate the Settings button. Date/Time will activate a drop
down menu to select a time span. Event Type will activate a drop down menu listing all types of Events
Use the Filter option to display only the events that are required to avoid a long list of unnecessary
information.
The Find buttons, Up and Down, are for use with the Find text entry box at the bottom of the window.
Enter text in the box and select to search Up or Down the list using the Next button.
The Find text entry box is for locating text that would have been entered as a Event Marker. Enter the
text you want to search for in the Find text entry box. The search will start on the top line downwards.
Select whether to search Up or Down the list then press the Find button.

Batch Mode
FIGURE 7.8 Batch Mode

Batch Report Tool
Enter Batch License - The Golden Batch feature can be used only after providing the license key.
Click the Enter Batch License button and provide the license.
Batch Report Tool - Batch report function can be used to generate the report for a specific batch data
in PDF (read only) format. It provides a clear, intuitive and professional report as compared to reports
that get generated and dislpayed in the recorder for a specific batch. The report provides all data or
specific data with timestamp ,which is not supported in reports generated in the recorder. Along with
data values, it also displays this data in graphical format. It also provides many features like Batch Sta-
tus, Pen Overview, Min/Max values for batch data, System/Alarm/Security messages,etc. It also pro-
vides space for Auditor or external agency to provide below details like Reviewed By, Checked By, and
Comments.
This tool can generate a batch report from TrendManager Pro / TrendServer Pro software in
PDF format.
T TrendManager Pro / TrendServer Pro software is required in order to use this Batch tool.
Note: Batch report utility will work only with administrator access users.
There are two Batch Report options:
1. “Generate Report”
2. “Settings”
1.Generate Report: When user select Generate Report, the below dialog will be displayed.
Batch Report details:

i.) Default report name will be [Batch Name]_[BatchReport_StartTime].
ii.) Default path will be [UserDirectory]\Batch Report. This can be changed by
selecting Browse.
iii.) User can put comments in “Comment” edit box which will be displayed in PDF
report as Additional comments.
After entereing all the information listed above, a report will be generated with default settings
from start time to end time of the batch. The report time will be for 5 minutes. (Currently sample

period is set as default to 5 Minutes). This will be the defauilt unless the user has selected spe-
cific time and/or log rate in the settings dialog.
2.Settings: Click on the “Settings” control from batch view and the following dialog will be dis-
played
The batch report setting dialog contains following settings

i.) Sample period: This is the sample period of the batch report. By default it is set to 5 Minutes.
User can set batch report sample period from 1 sec. to 60 hours. There is no association
between the Batch report sample period and individual pen sample period. If some pens have a
sample period less or more than the batch sample period then data for the respective pen will get
padded*. If user has selected faster log rate than the minimum allowed log rate, application will
display the following message box.
*Padded data
Padded data refers to data being carry-forwarded from previous data-point. For example
if a report is to be generated every 1 min and actual data-sample is every 2 mins,

instead of keeping a blank data-point in the intermediate data-point on the report the
previous data is used.
Refer to the table below to check minimum allowed sample period for different number
of pens.
Note: The maximum number of pens in a batch supported by the Batch Report Tool is 32.
ii) Batch Start time and Batch End time: Batch start and end time will show the time for which
batch has run. Initially application will show actual Batch start and End time. User can change the
start and end time to generate TMS batch report for specific period .e.g. to generate 2 Hours of
report, set the start and end batch time accordingly in the batch report settings dialog. Now Batch
report will be generated with the new settings.
iii) Batch Report scale:
Mainly there are three types of scales:
a) Original: with Original scale option, Batch report will show data as per the scale limit of
that Pen. e.g. in a batch there 2 pens, pen 1 scale is 0 to 100 and it’s value is 59, then this
value will be shown as 59 in the batch report as it is within scale limits, and pen 2 scale is 33
to 55 but it’s value is 200, then based on scale, its value will be somewhere near 55 and this
value will be shown on batch report.
b) Min/Max: with Min/Max scale option, Batch report will show actual data.
e.g. In a batch there 2 pens, pen 1 scale is 0 to 100 and its value is 59, then this value will be
shown in batch report as 59 as it is within scale limits, and pen 2 scale is 33 to 55 but its value
is 200, but as it has been selected as min/max, its value will be 200 and this value will be
shown on batch report.
c) Custom: with Custom scale option, Batch report will show data as per the scale limit of
that Pen. User can set the new Zero and new Span for each individual pen as per his require-
ment.

In batch report, you will need to select the required pen and set the custom scale as
shown below. For each pen, if any of the three scales settings listed above have been
changed, click on Apply button to enable new scale details. The batch report will open
automatically after generation, if requested. The dialog box will automatically close.
Note: The Batch report utility will work only with administrator access users.

Sample Batch Report:
Below is a sample batch report

Golden Batch
Enter Batch License - The Golden Batch feature can be used only after providing the license key.
Click the Enter Batch License button and provide the license.
.Golden Batch - This feature that allows you to define a stan-
dard (Golden Batch) by creating a pen trace (golden batch) or
identify from an existing list of samples. Subsequently, compare
a sample (batch) with Golden trace in order to analyze and
measure the deviation from the standard (manually nominated)
sample. This comparison can be depicted on an intuitive graph
or export it to a PDF file. The comparison of batches is possible
only if the golden batch and batch in comparison have the
same logging rate and span. The engineering units of the
batches to be compared must be same despite the tool does
not check for this rule. The batch list window now provides
additional options to enable the Golden Batch feature.
NOTE: If the Archive Database option is selected then the
Create, Nominate and Delete Batch (View button) buttons are
disabled. However, you can view the existing Golden Batches and perform the compare task.
The options include the following steps:
1. Create a Golden Batch.
2. Nominate an existing batch as Golden Batch. See “Nominate as Golden Batch” on page 195
3. Compare with other samples. See “Compare Batch Data” on page 197
4. View Golden batches. See “View the Golden Batch List.” on page 196
5. Analyze and generate reports. See “Generate Graphs” on page 199 and “Generate Report”
on page 200
Create a Golden Batch

A Golden Batch can be created by using any one of the following methods:
• “Creating a new Golden Batch” on page 192: Creates a new Golden Batch (trace).
• “Nominate as Golden Batch” on page 195: Nominates an existing batch as a

Golden Batch.
Creating a new Golden Batch

This utility allows you to create a golden pen trace manually. The pen
trace is saved as a list of segments. For each segment, a process set
point and the ramp type can be specified.
To create a new Golden Batch:
1. Import the data from the recorder. See “Import data from a recorder” on page 168
2. In the left pane, click Batch. The Batch View for Initial Database/Selected Database window
appears.
3. Select a batch from the list and click Create. The Create Golden Trace window appears.

4. Provide details for the following parameters:
• Batch Name: Enter a name for the new Golden Batch.
• Description: Enter the description.
• Eng Units: Enter the engineering units based of the batch to be traced.
• Log Rate: Rate at which the recorder acquires data.
• Batch Span: Enter the span range (start and end point on the Y-axis).
NOTE: In order to compare a batch with this golden trace, the golden trace must have the same log
rate and span as the batch in comparison.
• Total duration (read only): Displays the total duration of the new pen trace. This is cal-
culated automatically based on the segments created.
• Segment Type:
• • Ramp Down: Graph decreases linearly and reaches the setpoint value. The Initial
Value must be greater than the Set Point Value for the first time.
• • Ramp Up: Graph elevates from the setpoint value. The Initial Value must be
lesser than the Set Point Value for the first time.
• • Soak: Graph remains constant during the specified segment duration
• Segment Duration: Enter the length of the segment which can be expressed in
hh:mm:ss (hour: minute:seconds) format.

• Initial Value: Enter the initial process value.
• Set Point: Enter the set point value the process must reach after the specified segment
duration.
5. Click Add Segment.
6. Click the Add Segment button to create a trace that you want.
7. Click Save Pen. The Golden trace can be viewed from “View the Golden Batch List.” on
page 196
NOTE:
• Reset All: Clears all data entered in the window.
• Remove Segment: Removes all segments which appear after the selected segment.
Example:
The following screen provides an example that shows a newly created golden trace.

Nominate as Golden Batch
This utility allows you to nominate from an existing batch data from a
recorded as a Golden Batch.
You can select any one of the following methods to nominate the graph.
Make sure that the pens inside the batch have same log rate and span.
• Nominating a single pen as a Golden Batch from the selected batch.
• Nominating the average of all Pens. The average of all the pens values is calculated at
each instance of time.
• Nominating Max-min data from all Pens by calculating the maximum and minimum values
from all the Pens at each instance of time.
To nominate a Golden Batch from existing list:
1. In the left pane, click Batch. The Batch View for Initial Database window appears.
2. Select a batch from the list and click Nominate. The Nominate Golden Batch window appears.
3. Provide details for the following parameters:
• Golden Batch Name: Enter a name for the batch.
• Golden Batch Description: Enter the description.
• Golden Batch Options:
• • Select a Pen: Nominates a single batch as Golden Batch.
• • Average of all Pens: Averages the values of the Pens associated with the selected
batch.
• • Max Min of all Pens: Considers the maximum and minimum value of all pens asso-
ciate with the selected batch.
4. Click Save. The Golden Graphs can be viewed on a different window. See “View the Golden
Batch List.” on page 196

View the Golden Batch List.
se this option to view the complete list of Golden Batches that are avail-
able in the selected database.
To view the Golden Batch list:
1. Click View under Golden Batch. The Batch List window appears.
This window provides the available Batches and allows you to perform the following tasks:
2. Double-click on a Golden Batch from the list. The associated standard graph appears on the
screen.
3. Column Config: Additional details can be viewed by adding appropriate items.
4. Delete Golden Batch: Deletes a Golden Batch. The option does not allow you to delete the Golden
batch unless all the open graph windows are closed.
NOTE: If the Golden batch is created manually the Source Batch Name does not contain any informa-
tion.

Compare Batch Data
This section describes the steps to compare a batch with one of the avail-
able golden batches.
NOTE: The batch in comparison and the Golden batch must have the
same log rate and span.
The steps to generate a comparison graph and a comparison report are detailed below:
1. Select a Batch from the Batch View for Initial Database window and click Compare.
Golden Batches which has the same span and logging rate as that of selected batch are shown in the
Golden Batch List window.
2. Select a golden batch from the list and enter details for the following:
• Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance: Enter an acceptable upper and lower tolerance
values. Any pen value outside the tolerance value is recorded as a deviation in the graph
and the report..
NOTE: The Upper Tolerance and Lower Tolerance property is disabled for Max-Min Golden Batch
type.
• Change Color: Select a color to denote the golden reference traces.
• Time Adjustment Settings: This option allows you to adjust the time shifts in Golden
pen trace and the batch in comparison. Time adjustment helps to align the Golden Pen
trace start time with the start time of the batch in comparison.
• • None: No changes.

• • Right: Shifts the origin of the Golden Graph to the right and then compares with the
Pens. For example, consider a Golden Batch sample available for 30mins which needs
to be compared with last 30mins of 1 hour 30mins data. In this case, select Right by
1hr.
• • Left: Shifts the origin of the Golden Graph to the left and then compares with the
Pens.
• Days/Hrs (Enabled only if you want to adjust the time): Enter the number of days /time
the origin of the Golden Graph to be shifted. The maximum offset time allowed is equal to
either the time duration of the source batch or golden batch. The limit is based on the one
that is greater. For example, consider the source batch duration = 2 hours, golden batch
duration =1 hour. The maximum offset time allowed is 2 hours. The maximum offset time
is 31 days (31*24*60*60 seconds). This is irrespective of source or golden batch.
• Report Settings: Enter a date and a start time from when the graph in comparison must
be considered. For example, consider data is available for 2 days (graph to be com-
pared). You want to use 3 hours data available on the last day. Start time: Wed 24 Sept
2014 08:00:00 and End time: Thu 25 Sept 2014 18:30:10. You can specify the Report
Start Time as 09/25/2014 15:00:00
• Generate Graph: Generates a graph and shows the comparison. See “Generate
Graphs” on page 199
• Generate Report: Generates a PDF file with a detail analysis. See “Generate Report”
on page 200
3. Click Close to view the graph.

Generate Graphs
This option provides the graphical comparison between a selected batch and the Golden reference
value.
Example:
The following graph shows an example for Single Pen comparison where the Upper Tolerance value is
set to 20 and Lower Tolerance value is set to 10.
It also shows the Golden Reference value and the deviated values in the selected group.
On comparison of data, the golden batch traces are aligned to the start time of the source batch traces.
It provides “None” option in the Time adjustment settings. All pens on the compared graph are
arranged in “STRIP” mode. The “Golden Batch Comparison” is shown at the bottom of the graph.
The Dev parameter on the graph provides the deviated value if source batch with respect to golden ref-
erence pen data at a given time.
The following list provides the current Graph functionalities that are restricted on comparison graph:
•Drag and drop of pens from historical/real time recorders
•Delete pens from the graph
•Move, re-size, change pen scale limits, zoom-in/zoom-out of pen scales
•Add batch start and batch end events.

Generate Report
A batch comparison report can be generated which includes information such as Pen values, Golden
Pen value, Deviations and Graph.
NOTE:
The PDF report is limited to a finite size. This sets a restriction on the batch report. The report can be
generated to a limited duration based on the number of pens configured and the log rate.
If the batch duration is more than the report limits, the user can generate multiple reports for the entire
batch duration by specifying batch start time and batch duration.
Example:
The following PDF shows the Batch and Golden Batch details.

The following image shows details from each Pen and the deviation from the standard Golden Graph
On the main Batch tab (see Batch Mode Figure 7.8 on page 185), the Column Config button pro-
duces a box in which you can add and remove the type of Batch information you wish to view. Eg.
Comment, Batch Description, Lot Number, and User ID.
The Show/Hide Events button toggles an individual batch view window on and off, as shown in
Figure 7.9 on page 202. Select a batch from the main view to display associated events that have
occurred during the batch.
The Filter option, when switched On, will activate the Settings button. Date/Time will activate a drop
down menu to select a time span. Batch Name will activate a drop down menu to select batches to
view From a specified batch name To a specified Batch name. Device ID is only active when the batch
button is selected from the main tool bar, not the recorder tool bar. From the main tool bar the list of
batches are for all recorders. Device ID will activate a drop down menu with all recorders listed for that
database.
Export Events button will produce a dialog box where copy of the Batch data can be exported and
saved as an Excel spreadsheet. Figure 7.9 on page 202.
The Find section is for searching through text in Event Markers for specific Batch informatin. Make a
selection from the left hand box for the type of batch information you are searching for, All, Name,
Description, Comment, User ID, User Data, or Lot No. Then enter the text you want to search for in the
right hand window. The search will start on the top line downwards. Select whether to search Up or
Down the list then press the Find button. You may use a barcode reader to enter the same batch infor-
mation as used on the factory floor.
For more details on Setting up Events, Event Markers, Counters, E-mailing and Viewing Events, see
See “Events System” on page 150. To find out more about how events can be graphed, see “Graphing
Events” on page 247.

Exporting data to a spreadsheet
Available only on TrendManager and TrendServer .
The Spreadsheet Export button is found on the left side of any graph, and will
allow the user to export data from a graph to a spreadsheet package such as Excel
or to an E-mail.
Data can be exported from any existing graph, Historic FTP or Historic Realtime, or a specific Batch
graph. Only the data displayed in the graph area will be exported to the spread sheet. A graph can be
created by dragging a recorder from the recorders list onto the graphing area or by dragging a Batch
from the Batch Viewer.
1. Click on Spreadsheet Export button. Click on "Yes", to start preparing export summary and produce
the Export Data to Spreadsheet window.
FIGURE 7.9 Export to Spreadsheet settings
2. Click on the Settings button to produce the Export Settings window which is a list of default settings
that will determine how the data is displayed on the spreadsheet for a quick export.
3. Click on "Ok" if all the settings are ok or modify as necessary and then click on Ok. Click on "Reset"
if you want to preserve old settings or on "Cancel" to keep as it is.

Export Settings
Export Data
Same Sheet - Exports data for all Pens to one spread sheet
Pen Per Sheet - Exports data for each pen to an individual spreadsheet
Pad Empty Cells - Displays all the data for the pen with the fastest sampling speed and
pad the empty cells with the previous reading for the pens with slower sampling speeds.
Padding will commence when the first reading of the slowest pen has been taken, also
pads when no data is being logged.
No Padding - Will not fill in the empty cells but leave breaks
Date/Time Format
Standard will display standard date and time format as text.
Lotus 1-2-3 - Export files in Lotus 1-2-3 format. Lotus format is the number of seconds
elapsed since 1970. Can be applied to graphing or to display in Excel format.

File Formats
Local Format - Exports using non decimal format if the users PC is set up that way. Uses
the native format for that country.
Long Filenames - Attaches a tag to the beginning of the file name and an extension to
the end of each pen exported to include the recorder name and pen name.
Traditional DOS - This is a naming format which allows the user to enter a six character
tag which has the trace number attached to the end of the file name. Used on older type
of networks.
Send To
Excel - Exports to Microsoft™ Excel 97 or later. Auto starts with the exported files.
E-mail - PCs using a MAPI compliant E-mail programme e.g. Outlook, Outlook Express
etc., will open the E-mail programme automatically, creating a new e-mail with the
selected files attached.
Sample Period
Graph Res - Exports the data dependant on the graph resolution displayed. This gives
an overview of the actual data to reduce the length of the spread sheet.
Actual (Full Res) - Takes the fastest logging speed and exports every data point. One
pixel on the graph is represented by two values, min and max. If the spread sheet
should exceed over ten thousand lines a warning box will appear.
User Defined - Select a sample period from the drop down box. The export function will
look for multiple readings over the selected time.
Export Values
Max Min - Default setting which will log the Max and Min values since the last log.
Average - Can be set to take an average of all the samples taken since the last log
Export Events
Export with Pen - Event information will be exported to the same spreadsheet as the
data.
Separate Sheet - List of Events exported to a separate spreadsheet
CSV Delimiter
Comma Separated Variable (CSV) is used to identify breaks between values so they
can be displayed correctly. If local values already use commas as a part of a currency
format then change the setting to a semicolon. The software will detect which local cur-
rency format is in use.
Pens Order
Set the order of the pens when doing an export in TrendManager software.
Ascending - Ascending will display the Pen Number/Pen Name as per selection in
Ascending order.
Descending - Descending will display the Pen Number/Pen Name as per selection in
Descending order.
Pen Number - Pen Number allows the user to arrange pen data as per pen Number.
Pen name - Pen Name allows the user to arrange pen data as per Pen Name.

4. Click on "Start Export", it will calculate export volume and shows Export Report Window having
information about CSV file properties and they are 'Number of Traces', 'Approximate Number of
Lines' and 'Export Sample Period'.
5. Click on "Export” button, it will start exporting by showing export progress and time remaining
(approx) to complete it.
6. Click on "Cancel Export", if export operation need to be cancelled

7. Once on export complete, export progress will show it is completed.
8. Click on "Close" on Export Data to Spreadsheet window to close the window.

System status
All the areas listed below are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help.
Available only on TrendServer .
Activate this button to reveal four more options.
Password
Password control allows an Administrator to manage password accounts. These accounts have a user
name and password with different levels of authority which restrict access to the more system orien-
tated areas of the program. For more information, see “Passwords” on page 208.
Status
The status button toggles the system information panel on or off, this shows a list of text messages
linked reporting major events in the system.
E-Mail
The E-mail function is for setting up default accounts and destinations for any part of the program that
uses E-mail. This is for use when exporting to spreadsheets.
Also see “Event Email setup” on page 159.
Realtime
This is the Realtime Pen Settings dialogue box configuring pens for realtime logging. Enter the Data
Rate and the Type of data to be logged, either Sample or MaxMin. Sample data will log the actual data
value of the last imported reading, Max/Min will log the maximum and the minimum values since the
last log. There are a list of rules concerning priorities for data rate and data type when accessing a
recorder on line. Refer to the Communications manual for Honeywell V5 recorders, for X Series
and GR recorders refer to the Comms section in the User manual.
For more detailed information on the Comms Server refer to the Communications manual for Honey-
well V5 recorders, for X Series and GR recorders refer to the Comms section in the User man-
ual.

Server
Available only on TrendServer .
All the areas listed below are covered in the TrendManager Suite Help and in the
TrendManager Suite User manual.
Click on this button to produce the LocalServer, Archive Database Server both by default and Remote
database server list if any added. From here the user can access the Database list by clicking on
Databases . Select a server and close the list, all the recorders and databases that will be displayed
will be held on that selected database server.
For more information on server access refer to the “Server access table.” on page 171.
Archive Database Server

This server will allow a user to add databases which are archived using the Data Management Tool.
This server will allow the flexibility to add archive databases located across the network machines even
though TrendServer is not installed in those machines. This server will happen by default after
installation of TrendServer .
NOTE: There can be multiple databases with the name "initial database" under the Archive Database
Server. This occurs because when the database is archived using the Database Management Tool,
the default database name is not modified. To modify the default database name please use the Data-
base Management Tool.
After adding archive databases, if any new database folder is added to the same path, it will not be
reflect automatically in the TrendManager Suite user interface. You will need to close and launch
TrendManager Suite user interface to see the newly added database.
Add a Remote Server

• Go to the Server List in the Server slide-out pane (only connected servers listed).
• Click Add new server.
• Enter the remote machine’s IP address and name into the dialogue box. Or use this but-
ton ‘Look up the IP address from the machine name’ to translate a name to an address.
Click on OK.
If the new server icon appears with a red cross on it, this means that there has been a link problem.
Verify that the IP address is correct and the machine is turned on. See the message window at the bot-
tom of the screen for details. Double click on the server icon to retry the connection. Double click on the
server icon to reload all of that server’s databases.
Depending on your version of Microsoft windows, some settings in the permissions parameters might
be necessary. Please refer to the application notes if necessary for more details
Delete a server
• Go to the Server list in the Server slide-out pane.
• Either drag and drop the selected server icon over the nearest Trash can or right click
and select delete.
• Archived Database Server cannot be deleted.
Change the current Server

• Go to the Server list in the Server slide-out pane.
• Click on the desired server, this will now be the currently selected server.

Passwords
Only available from TrendServer, setting up passwords allows the user to restrict access to certain
parts of the program.
Click on the System button to reveal the System list, select the Password icon. If the passwords have
not been used before, the user will be prompted with the Initial Password Setup box. Enter a pass-
word of your choice, twice. Press OK and the Password Control box will appear.
Password Control
Enter your user ID as Administrator and your password, then select Logon. The maximum number of
characters is 20, it is case sensitive and it can be alpha numeric. From this screen the Administrator
can Logoff, Change Password, select the User Manager or deselect the box to disable the password
system.
FIGURE 7.10 Password Settings
Change Password
To change a password, select Change Password and enter the new password twice. This can only be
done by the Administrator.
Password User Manager

The User Manager screen is designed to add, remove and edit passwords and password access.
There are two users already loaded into the password system, these are known as password accounts.
The Default account is when no users are logged on and access is kept to a minimum. The Administra-
tor account is recommended to be kept with full access.

FIGURE 7.11 Password Manager
To Add or Change the properties of a user select this button from the User Manager screen and click
on Add or Properties. This will reveal the User Properties box.
To add a new user make sure nothing is selected
in the box and click on Add. Enter the User’s FIGURE 7.12 Password Properties
Name, a Description for identification and the
Password, twice. To change the properties of an
existing user, select the user from the User Man-
ager and click on properties. See “Password
access table” on page 210.
The User Templates allow access permissions to
pre-set commonly used configurations. Select a
template and click on Apply.
Use the Advanced access permission for set-
ting up a user to a specific profile not supported by
the templates. Double click on an area to reveal
the categories available for access. Boxes will be
marked to show which categories can be
accessed for each particular template. Tick any
extra boxes as required. Press OK when all cate-
gories have been selected and the users required
password access is complete.
When the Administrator is logged off the password
system is in the Default state. The Administrator
and the Power User have access to the same
areas apart from the Administrator can setup and
manage the password accounts and has access
to the Audit Manager.
The Administrator is the only one who can disable
the password system.
If the password gets lost contact Honeywell for help. Contact number and address is in the Help file
under Contact information.

Password access table
Power User
Guest User
Basic User
Standard
Admin-
istrator
Default
User
Access permissions available
Open      
Rename    
Delete    
Print      
Export data from    
GRAPHING
Graph Events    
Add    
Copy    
Move    
Save    
Create    
Rename    
FOLDERS
Copy    
Delete    
Add   
Copy   
Delete   
Edit Rec Setup   
RECORDERS
View Events   
Print Rec Setup   
Web Browse   
Upload Setup  
Add   
DATABASE
Change    
Add  
SERVER Delete  
Change  
Disk Import Data   
FTP Import Data  
IMPORT
Disk Import Setup   
FTP Import Setup  
Add Server  
Delete Server  
Change Server  
COMMUNICATIONS
Status Window   
Configure Logging   
Graph Realtime data   
SETTINGS E-Mail   
Comms Admin  
Realtime   

Audit Manager
The Audit Manager is only available on TrendServer , and is accessed through the password sys-
tem at Administrator level only. The Audit Manager facility allows the Administrator to configure, log and
view all actions that have occurred within the software.
Click on the System button on the main screen tool bar and select Passwords. Only the Administrator
logon reveals the Audit Manager option.
The Administrator can specify which actions get logged to the Audit trail.
FIGURE 7.13 Audit Manager
The Audit manager provides an Audit trail from when a User logs on, showing the time and date, to
what actions the user performs within the software including changes to:
• Graphing (adding, deleting, copying, printing moving, exporting etc).
• Recorder setup, hardware added or deleted.
• Importing data, setups.
• System changes, adding or deleting Databases or Servers.
• Adding, deleting or copying Recorders and Folders.
• Setting changes, E-mail, LogOn/Off, Passwords.
• Events Log for Comms - Status window, Configure logging, Adding/Removing Comms
Server. Honeywell V5 recorders only.
In order to log User’s actions, the Activity Logging Active box should be checked.
The print button prints a document of all the currently loaded 100 (or less) actions.
Delete log will remove all of the Audit trail.

Specify which events to log
The Specify events to log button produces the Audit settings page which enables the administrator
to determine which actions to log. Double click to reveal the contents of each heading, click on each
item to select or deselect. Each ticked item will be logged to the Audit Manager.
FIGURE 7.14 Audit Settings

Trend Server Pro with OPC Server
The OPC Server option provides the same functions as TrendServer Pro but includes the added
function of an integrated OPC Server to make it easier to interface third party HMI software packages
that support an OPC client. This provides a realtime interface between servers and clients. The OPC
Server in the TrendServer Pro software is OPC 2.0 DA compliant and for the X-Series recorders
use a OPC 3.0DA and Alarm & Events 1.1 OPC Server for direct connection to the recorders..
OPC is a firmware option that can be activated using the credit system in the X-Series recorders.
OPC Server
The OPC Server is automatically registered when the package is installed and is available from within
the client package as “Trendview.OPC.1”
When using an OPC Client to connect to the TrendServer OPC Server Version 100.1.0 or higher you
will need to add the OPC client user to the“TMSApplicationAccessGroup” if this has not already been
done. Refer to Chapter 3 Installation for more details
To construct a Pen tag the user can browse if available with the client package. The recorders will be
grouped under the communications port that they are connected to, COM 1 to 8 and Ethernet. A list of
recorders will be displayed under each port and within each recorder list of available pens. Constructed
port.recorder.pen.tag e.g. Ethernet.Rec 0002.Pen 1.CV.
Please refer to 43-TV-25-41, Trendview Historian User Guide, for information on the TrendviewHistorian
software which uses OPC HDA to obtain data.
Each pen has 6 Tags available which are:
1. CV - the current process value

2. Zero - Bottom of scale in engineering units
3. Span - Top of scale in engineering units
4. Low EU - Absolute bottom of engineering scale (inc 4% under range)
5. High EU - Absolute top engineering scale (inc 4% over range)
6. Units - Units of engineering values as Text field.
Both Asynchronous and Synchronous modes are supported.
OPC Clients
An OPC client can be used instead of the TrendServer software. It is a user software appli-
cation for realtime interface between servers and clients. Information from our comms
server, which is OPC compliant, uses an industry standard method of uniform data inter-
change. The OPC client can then export realtime communications to other applications, eg.
Microsoft™ Excel. OPC clients must be version 3 compatible.
For more information refer to Application Note 4 - OPC Access.

OPC Interface - Open Process Control
OPC Server connection must be enabled in the recorder by selecting the OPC option in “Credits tab”
on page 68. Many types of OPC Server software packages are available and are compatible
with the recorders. OPC server supports OPC DA version 3 and OPC AE (Alarm and Events).
Use the name of the OPC server as it appears in the client software.
OPC limitations
Technically speaking there are no restrictions on the number of clients that can connect to
OPC DA or OPC A&E servers. Some software limits are in place:
OPC DA Server
Maximum number of groups that can be added per client is 3.
Maximum number of unique items that a OPC DA server supports is 100. I.e.(Number of pens
+ Number of totalisers + Number of communication variable) spread across 3 groups per cli-
ent. Recommended number of clients that can connect a OPC DA server is 3.
OPC A&E Server

Number of active alarm that is maintained at a given time is 576. Includes pens having active
alarms and pens which have normal but unacknowledged alarms if latch enabled.
Recommended maximum number of event subscriptions is 3
Not only can pen and alarm values be imported from the recorder but CV values can be sent
to the recorder from the OPC software.
How OPC works

When data acquisition devices conform to the OPC standard, you can use them with any
OPC-enabled software application, and vice versa. You can therefore easily combine different
devices from different manufacturers in one system. OPC gives you the freedom to add new
hardware from third-party vendors to existing set-ups, or to replace a device, without worrying
about compatibility with your chosen software.
The measurement and control hardware, such as a recorder, provides front-line data acqui-
sition. As soon as the hardware device has collected the data it makes it available to software
applications running under Windows. It presents the data according to the OPC standard, and
is thus known as an OPC server. Each OPC server offers data in the same way. If the soft-
ware application can understand the OPC format it can therefore access data from any OPC
server device, making individual drivers for each piece of equipment obsolete.
OPC-enabled software include spread sheets, databases, virtual instruments and SCADA
(supervisory control and data acquisition) interfaces. These applications are known as OPC
client software.
Each OPC server can simultaneously provide data for any number of OPC clients. Likewise
multiple clients can at the same moment access any server: a robust method of communica-
tion. With OPC, measurement and control systems can share information and co-operate with
other installations across factories, offices, laboratories, etc. The same data is therefore read-
ily available to engineering, maintenance, management...in fact to anyone that requires up-
to-the-minute data on which to base their decisions.
OPC allows "plug-and-play". All OPC devices will connect together and immediately work with
the OPC client software. This has the potential to massively reduce installation and system
configuration time. It also means that you can add devices without shutting down existing sys-
tems.

OPC offers the following:
• Combine different devices from different manufacturers in one system
• Reduce installation time
• Add devices without stopping existing software and systems
• Quickly replace a device from one vendor with one from another
• Share information around networks
• Device drivers rendered obsolete
• Factory, laboratory and office applications can all access the same data
• Reliable data as any number of OPC software applications can simultaneously read a
device
• Single, industry-standard, data interface
Web Browser
The Web Browse function can be enabled/disabled from the recorder. The web function can
be password protected if passwords are enabled.
To access the web page, type the device’s IP address in to a web browser such as Internet
Explorer. If Microsoft WINS system (Windows Internet Name Service) is available then the
device name can be used to search for the device web page.
The recorder will automatically register a unique Network ID using the serial number. The for-
mat is xs-nnnnnn, where nnnnnn is the serial number of the recorder. This allows you to
browse the recorder if you are using DHCP (Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol).
A Login Screen will appear for recorders with Password functionality enabled. Enter the pass-
word protected User name and Password supplied to log in here. For Users without Password
security just choose a language option to access the web page.
IP Address Troubleshooting
If your recorder’s IP address begins 169.***.***.*** this means there is no DHCP Server (Dy-
namic Host Configuration Protocol) available to create a dynamic IP address. Either, make a
DHCP server available or allocate a Static IP address, see “TCP/IP tab” on page 99.
The recorders IP address can also be viewed in the recorder’s Status menu.

Internet Security Settings
Types of web browser for use with the Remote Viewer include Internet Explorer 5 and above.
To browse multiple recorders, IE8 or higher version is required.
Figure 7.10, “Internet Security - Windows 7,” on page 216 shows an example from Internet
Explorer 10on a Windows 7 machine. The settings shown are for Internet access. If the de-
vice is to be accessed in an intranet scenario then the same has to be done for local intranet
option.
Firewall settings
If this device is sitting on an enterprise network with a firewall in place then the firewall should
be configured to allow all requests on port 80 and port 976 (for remote control activeX). There
is also one port for FTP control and one for OPC, which should be opened.
Access to the firewall settings will differ depending on what firewall is installed.
Figure 7.10 Internet Security - Windows 7

Chapter 8: Comms Server
Communications Server
Comms Server Overview
The Comms server will enable the user to:
• Monitor the status of communications with a device on any serial port, up to 8 ports and
an Ethernet connection.
• Connect to local and remote databases
• Set up local and remote servers
• Modbus protocols supported on Ethernet and Serial ports
• Enable and disable ports
• Add, edit and remove devices
• Log to database or client connections, local or OPC client.
Comms Server - Start up

The Comms server can be opened using the Start Menu of your PC, follow the path shown
below.
Start -> All Programs -> TrendViewRecorders > TrendServer Pro
Select Communications Server, then once opened it will appear as an icon in the system
task bar in the bottom right of the PC Screen.
Note: Data will not be gathered until the Comms Server is activated from the Start
Menu.

If the Comms Server related services does not start, and if the Communications Service UI is
not open, while starting the Communications Service UI (User Interface) a covering window
in task bar will appear. Subsequently, after few seconds an error message box, shown below,
will appear.
Select “Yes” in the above window

If the Communication Service UI is open with Non-Administrative privileges, the following
message will appear and the Communication Service will fail to start
If the Communication Service UI is open with Administrative privileges, the following message
will appear and the Communication Service will start. Subsequently, the Communication
Service UI will also appear.
Select “No”, and no further action will be taken.

If the TrendServer software is not running when the Communication Service UI is open, per-
forming any activity in Communication Service UI will appear with the following message
Select Comms Server UI from the menu to start.
If the Communication Service UI is open with Non-Admin privileges, the following message
will pop up “Communication Service failed to start”
If the Communication Service UI is open with Administrative privileges, the following message
will pop-up and the Communication Service will start

The Communications Server appears as an icon in the Windows system bar
at the bottom right of the screen. Double click or right click to open, loads au-
tomatically with TrendServer. The comms server manages the communica-
tions status of devices on a serial port (RS485) or through an Ethernet
connection. Only Modbus protocol is available for X Series and GR devices,
see “Appendix G - Modbus Communications and Modbus Profile Tool” on page 325.
The Modbus protocol can be used to connect with other devices that support floating point
values in their register maps.
Devices are held in databases and the databases are accessed via the Database Server. It is
possible to connect to remote database servers, and access their databases and devices.
Similarly, connections can be made to remote comms servers to retrieve data from their de-
vices.
The comms server uses IP Addresses to locate devices on local and remote servers. All Log-
ging configuration for comms logging and logging to a database is set up from the Comms
Server.
The Comms Status shows all the activity of devices, Communications ports, Databases and
Database Servers. The window to the left displays the areas controlled by the comms server,
the database servers and the communications ports. The display area(s) to the right will dis-
play details of any item selected in the left window. Depending on what has been selected the
right window will split in two to give logging information. Items listed in the left window that
have a + sign against them contain other items, click on the + sign to reveal the list of items
contained within. The + sign will change to a - sign when all the items are displayed. To close
the list, click on the - sign.
Comms Server
Administration
and Toolbar
Database Servers
Communications
Ports
Figure 8.11
Comms Server
Overview

Administration
The Administration button appears in the top left of the comms server, it contains:
• Preferences - The General Settings tab has an option to minimise the Server when it is
opened. The Diagnostics option that will produce an additional tab to the bottom window,
this will display properties and values of a selected device. Send Recorder Events is an
option that needs to be enabled to allow event data to be exported when the export data func-
tion is performed and this will also allow event chart controls to be enabled. The Clear Setup
Cache button will remove all setup files. Network Settings is for PC’s with more than one
network card fitted to access devices on other networks. The network cards are displayed
here for selection. If the ‘Use NIC Default IP Address Selection’ is ticked then the first network
card that was added to the list will always be selected.Timing Setups tab displays the cur-
rent timings for the current communications setup. These entries should be configured cor-
rectly and not require any changes by the user.
• Port Configuration - these are the Modbus port settings. The Peer to Peer communications
function sets up the recorder so it can be recognised on a network. If lots of recorders are on
the same network they can be easily identified and connected to.
• Modbus port - Default port number 502
• Peer Services TCP Port (Transfer Control Protocol) - Default port number 8955
• Peer Services UDP Port (User Datagram Protocol) - Default port number 8956
The TCP and UDP port numbers have been specially selected for his type of network communica-
tions. It is recommended that the TCP and UDP ports are not changed unless specifically
requested by your IT network administrator.
• Contents - Enables the Help files.
• About Communications Server - Gives the version of the software.
Add a new Device to a communications port.

Use this icon button as one way of adding a device to the Communications port. Oth-
er ways of adding a device are to right click on the desired port in the left window ie.
Ethernet, and select the Add Device option. Or select a comms port in the left window, right
click in a clear space in the top window and select Add Device.
Configure Database Logging

Use this icon button to configure a device for logging channels to a database. Other
ways to configure logging are to right click on a comms port or a device in the left
window, or a device in the top window displaying the device for that port.
Connect to a new Database Server

Use this icon button to connect to a database server, either a Local, or Remote
Server that has been added to the database servers list. Connection can be made
by selecting ‘Database Servers’ in the left window and then right clicking in a clear space in
the top window displaying the database servers list.

Communication Ports
The Communication Ports is a list of ports available, COM1 to COM8 and Ethernet . As de-
vices are added they are displayed under the port name. Click on Communication Ports to
display a list of all the ports in the main window, tick the required port to enable. Click on a
port and the main window splits into two windows, top and bottom.
The top window displays details of the devices using that port including device ID No. , de-
vice Name , Mode and Status show if the device is connected, how many Channels the de-
vice has enabled, an Active button to activate the device and the device’s IP Address . As
devices get added to each port they will display in the list for that particular port.
The default is N-8-1 which means no parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit. This is currently the only byte op-
tion supported by Comms Server.
Database Servers
The Database Server will list databases and display the devices within each database as they
are added. Click on any of the database servers or the database within and details of that item
are displayed in the main window. The main window will split to give additional information for
databases showing comms port and device details.
Devices are added to the comms server through the Communications port, the device can
then be configured for logging. The devices appear in the database and these databases are
held within database servers. Figure 8.11 on page 220, shows the comms status screen,
in the left window from the top is displayed Database Server, Local and remote database and
devices held on the Local database.
Connected databases are displayed with a green icon. If the database is in red it is not con-
nected, check the IP Address and Device ID are correct and a protocol has been selected
on the device. Un-tick and then tick the active box on the comms server to restart the data-
base connection.
This section looks at the Comms Server’s main elements displayed in the Status Screen: Da-
tabase Servers, Local and Remote Servers, Databases, Communication Ports, Database log-
ging and Client connections
Remote database servers can be added to the list to enable access to devices held in other
databases on a remote database server in another location. To connect to a remote database
server the IP address must be known of the PC where the databases server is held.
Items with a ‘+’ sign signifies there are items within. Click on the ‘+’ sign to activate/expand.
• Listed under the Database Servers are a list of Servers.
• Listed under each Server are the Databases.
• Listed under each Database are the devices

.
This is the Database Server icon.
This is the Database icon
The bottom window has three actions, Client connections , Database logging and Diagnos-
tics . When a device is selected from the top window details of the device’s activity is displayed
here. Device logging to a database will display details in the Database logging tab. Realtime
data will display in the Client connections tab. The Diagnostics tab can be activated by going
to Administration, Preferences and ticking the Show Diagnostics box, this will display proper-
ties and vales of a selected device.

Database Size Management
Although there is no fixed maximum size for a recorder database, we recommend that they
be limited to some practical limit, rather than just letting it increase in size unchecked. Large
databases will impact the performance of your PC, the larger the database, the slower the per-
formance of your PC will be; eventually the PC would stop as the hard drive is filled up. An-
other concern should be the protection of your database and archiving of the data in the event
of a hard drive failure. Larger databases increase the time and effort required to back up the
data and increase the risk of unintended data loss if there is a PC failure and the data is not
backed up.
The PC’s performance is dependant on the size of the database and the PC characteristics
(e.g. Performance, Memory, Hard-drive space) along with how many recorders are connected
to it. An initial recommendation would be that if your process involves archiving to removable
media (DVD for example) then the Database should be kept to 4GB to ensure that it fits onto
a DVD for long term storage. This would provide good PC performance, make archiving of the
data easier and limit the risk of data loss between archives. As with any recommendation, you
need evaluate this relative to your needs; this is your data and it is important that a suitable
process is put in place to ensure that it remains protected and secure while achieving ade-
quate process performance.
Maintenance
It is strongly recommended that data on TrendServer Pro machine is backed up on a separate disk or
media at regular intervals, to avoid data loss, due to PC crash or hard disk failures.
The data here refers to both data base files and other configuration information stored on disk.
Depending on the OS the following folders needs to be backed up.
Windows 7, Windows 8, Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012 and 2016:
1.Data base backup using DB backup tool
2.TMP and CommsServ folders at “C:\ProgramData\”
Note : After the prolonged usage, if TrendServer Pro machine becomes slow, the machine should be
restarted.
As a best practice this can be done at regular maintenance intervals along with data backup activity.”

Comms Server Setup
The comms server software can be run independently of the main application software by cre-
ating a shortcut to the Startup folder. If over-writing a previous version of X & GR Series
Comms server, only the local server will retain the database information and load all the de-
vices and settings from the databases. Any other remote database servers will have to be
added manually.
Comms Server - new user

Using the comms server from scratch requires:
1. Add a new device to a Communications port. Devices will appear under the Communica-
tions Port, when selected, in the left window and will appear in the initial database on the
local comms server. See “Add a Device” on page 225
2. Click on ‘Communication Ports’ in the left window to display a list of the ports in the main
window. Tick the port that the device has been added to. See “Communication Ports” on
page 222
3. For a realtime connection, check device connection status by clicking on the device
under its comms port in the left window to display the device status in the top main win-
dow. Green LED’s will show a realtime connection is made. If grey LED’s are showing
and the device displays ‘Unconnected’ and if Red LED’s display then there is a problem
with connection.
4. The data from this device can now be logged to a database by using the Configure log-
ging screen and setting up channels for logging with the log rate and type and setting up
a destination database. See “Logging Configuration” on page 230
5. When the realtime data is being run, eg. graphed to the application server software, or an
OPC client, this will enable the bottom window that will display details of the data.
Keep power saving options of the PC disabled, if enable it will turn off display and put computer to
sleep which will stop real time data logging.
Add a Database
To add a database to a server, right click on the server eg. Local Server, select Add Database
and complete the dialog box details for the name and description of the device.
Add a Database Server

1. Use the database icon with a + sign in the top left of the comms server window.
2. Right click on Database Servers in the top left window
Connect to a Database Server

1. Select ‘Database Servers’ in the left window and then right click on the server to be con-
nected in the servers list in the main window.
2. Connect to database server dialog box will appear, enter an IP address and a description
to identify the database server.
Delete a Database Server

1. Right click on the database server to be removed and select the delete option.
2. A dialog box will appear with the IP address of the database server to be deleted. If this is
correct, click on OK.
All database servers can be removed except for the Local Server.

Add a Device
There are three ways to add a device, they all deliver the same dialog box:
1. Use the device icon in the top left of the comms server window.
2. Right click on a selected Comms port in the left window, COM1 to COM8 or Ethernet and
select Add Device from the resulting menu.
3. Select a Comms port and right click in a blank space in the top window and select Add
Device from the resulting menu.
Add a Device via Ethernet.

Now the recorder must be added. To do this click the “add new device” button, The first in the row of
three. This will bring up the Device Details box.
All these methods will produce the Add Device Details box. Areas of the box become greyed
out as the selections are made.
For X Series and GRdevices the process of adding a device has been made very simple.
Use the Find Device button at the bottom of the dialog to see a list of available devices. When
you add a device using this method it will automatically populate the dialog with the recorder
details. See “Find Device” on page 227.
Protocol - For active Modbus devices, the recorder name and protocol variant can be
changed (Modbus vs Modbus X). For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also
be changed.

Modbus Profile - The Profile name box is used to tell TrendServer Pro how to access the data on
the recorder. This profile is automatically generated from the recorder setup that was downloaded to
TrendServer Pro previously.
The system creates Modbus profiles from an imported setup or logged data and creates a profile
including information for pen, scale, units etc. A set of profiles are available for Honeywell modbus
devices. The profile Name is made up from the Recorder name, Type and ID number. Once the setup
or data has been imported it will display in this window the next time that it is opened, no need to restart
Comms Server.
For X & GR-Series recorders drop down the list and select the recorder from the list. It will be in the
list under the same name as the setup previously saved.
If any equipment, other than X & GR-Series recorders is to use TrendServer Pro to log and
graph data then a profile has to be generated. A Modbus Profile Tool is now available to aid in setting
up Device Profiles for other devices. The Comms Server can support up to 96 pens per device.
NOTE: The Recorder ID number is NOT the same as the Slave ID Number
A Modbus Profile Tool is now available to aid in setting up Device Profiles for other Honey-
well devices, refer to “Appendix G - Modbus Communications and Modbus Profile Tool” on
page 325.
Communications Port - Choose between Ethernet or RS485 for COM ports 1 to 8. This may
already be entered depending on how you have chosen to add the device. The RS485 Com-
ms option card and expansion card are required for the eZtrend QXe recorder.
Slave ID - This is a unique Modbus ID/Address used by the recorder to identify Modbus mes-
sages. Applications that talk to the recorder with Modbus will need to know this number to re-
turn messages to the device. The same number must match in Comms Server.
Recorder Name - This is the name displayed in the top right any process screen on the re-
corder.
Status - This will automatically enable the designated port and the device will become active.
This can be activated later from the main Comms Server screen.
Socket - This number should not need to be changed, only by advanced users for networking.
The Test button enables the “Add Device” settings to be validated. It can be used to determine
whether the recorder is configured for Modbus or Modbus X. Because we are using Modbus-
X, the Modbus-X column gives correct readings; the Modbus column returns wrong readings.
(Vice-versa if using Modbus)
If the column shows the correct reading the recorder must be communicating correctly.
Press “Done”

Find Device
This can be used to find X Series and GR recorders on the network. It uses the recorder’s unique
Network ID to identify them and populate this list. Select your device from the list and press the Use
Selection button to insert the recorder details into the Add Device box.
When you get back to the Add Device Detail Box, press “OK”.
The recorder you have set up will now be added to the device list.

Add a Device via RS485
Setting up the Comms Server for Modbus on RS-485 follows the same procedure, but the PCs
comm port that the 485 interface is connected to is selected in the “Communications Port”
drop down list. Everything else is the same (there is no IP address to enter) and test should
still work the same.
Figure 8.6 New Device Status
New device is added, ensure

the “Active” box is ticked.
The status lights will not be active yet. This is because no logging or graphs have been set up
so no data is being requested.
To set up Logging go to “Logging Configuration” on page 230
To start Realtime graphing go to See “Realtime Graphing” on page 254
Edit a Device
Select the Comms port containing the device for editing and right click on the device either in
the left or top window. The Edit Device Details dialog box will appear showing the configura-
tion for comms with that device. Any fields not greyed-out can be changed. For Ethernet de-
vices the IP address can be changed. Any device can be made active or inactive from here.
For active Modbus devices, the recorder name and protocol variant can be changed (modbus
vs Modbus X). For an inactive Modbus device the device profile can also be changed.
For information on the Test button, see above.
Click on the OK button and the changes are saved.

Delete a Device
Select the Comms port containing the device to be deleted and right click on the device either
in the left or top window. Select Delete Device from the resulting menu. The Delete Device
Details dialog box will appear showing the details of that particular device. Check this is the
correct device for deletion, then click on the OK button and the device is removed, otherwise
the operation can be cancelled.
Comms Server Logging

To set up logging you must first decide where to store the data. A database must be set up.
The database can either be on the PC running Comms Server, or on another networked de-
vice.
There will be a database already set up by default on your PC when TrendServer Pro was
loaded. This will be called “Initial database”.
To set up a database on the PC click the “Database Servers” icon, this will expand to show
“local Servers” i.e. databases on that PC. Click “local servers” to expand out to show all da-
tabases.
In the example shown there are two available databases. The default database called “Initial
Database” and another called “June FTP”.
Databases can be added by right clicking on the “Local Server” icon and then clicking “Add
Database”. Enter a database name and description, click OK and the new database will ap-
pear on the list.
To add a database server you will need the IP address of the device that will be the database
server. Click the “new database server” button.
Enter the IP address and a new
New Database Server database server will be added.
Add databases to this server as
above.
Logging Configuration

Logging Configuration
This screen configures channels for logging from a device to a database. It can be accessed
in several ways.
1. Use the Configure Database Logging icon at the top left of the screen and select Config-
ure Logging from the resulting menu.
2. Right click on ‘Communication Ports’ in the left window and select Configure Logging
from the resulting menu.
3. Right click on the comms port and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu.
4. Right click on the device and select Configure Logging from the resulting menu.
Any of these will display the Logging Configuration box. If this screen is selected from either
a comms port or a device then the comms port information will already be inserted. If the
screen is selected from the icon or Communications Port heading then the comms port will
need to be assigned. Select the device ID number (if necessary), from the drop down menu.
The next section is Database Configuration, a list of connected database servers and a list of
databases that are currently being logged to. In this section is a window showing the channels
available to be logged. As channels are selected from this window, three additional buttons
become active: ‘Add Channel selection’, select each channel for logging, ‘Add all Channels’
for logging and Clear Channel selection.

Add Channels for Logging
As each channel is selected, or all channels depending on the button selected, the Logging
Channel Configuration box appears so the Log Rate and Type of logging can be set for each
channel individually or all channels.
When the channels have been selected they will appear in the bottom window, click on Apply
to enable the channels to log. Once the channels are in the ‘Channels logging to selected da-
tabase’ window they can be selected and the Edit and Delete button become active. The Edit
button allows the logging rate or type of logging to be changed.
There is also a Database Events Logging box that can be ticked that allows any events to be
logged to the database using Trendbus. (Not available for X Series recorders).
Summary of Logging Changes - If any changes are made using the Edit button, the Sum-
mary of Changes button becomes active, this will show the last changes made to any of the
channels for this configuration only.
The Delete button will take the channel out of this window and put it into the window showing
available channels for logging, logging will stop for this channel.

Comms Server Status Screen
If you have a graph open Comms Server should be showing that the recorder is operating by
displaying flashing green lights in the “Active column”. Click and highlight the recorder. Click
the “Database logging” Tab. The screen should now show all the pens logging for that record-
er and their log rate
.
Figure 8.1 Comms Server Status Screen
List of Database Servers
Client Connections tab displays

any Pens being graphed
Database Logging tab displays

any Pens being logged
Comms Server can be minimised now, it will continue to run in the background.
Client Connections
Realtime comms data from the device will only display on the comms server communications
status screen when realtime data is active on either the server software or by using an OPC
client. Once data is active on a client connection, this window will display details of the device
selected in the top window: its Destination or where the information is going to, Source or or-
igin of the data (channel or event), Rate and Type of data sampling being communicated.
Keep power saving options of the PC disabled, if enable it will turn off display and put compu-
ter to sleep which will stop real time data logging.

Database Logging
This tab will display information on what is currently being logged to a database for the device
that is selected in the top window: its Destination or where the information is going to, Source
or origin of the data (channel or event), Rate and Type of data sampling being communicated.
A third tab, Diagnostics, can be enabled using the Administration button, and selecting Pref-
erences.
Send Recorder Events

Comms Server has a set of chart controls that can control the chart on the recorder from your PC. This
can be done in “Realtime chart controls” on page 233 or can be setup as an Effect of an Event,
see“Event chart controls” on page 233.
Richt click on an active recorder

to produce the drop down menu
Realtime chart controls

Right click on an active recorder in Comms Server, Ethernet or RS485, either from the recorders listed
in the left hand window or from recorders in the main window.
• From the list select Send Recorder Events and the Recorder Chart Functions box will appear.
If the option is not in the list go to Preferences in “Administration” on page 221.
• Select a chart control function for immediate effect on the recorder. Because TrendServer
Pro is graphing the data that is being transferred in realtime the recorders running on
TrendServer Pro will not be affected.
Event chart controls

The same set of chart controls can be activated using the event system in TrendServer Pro . Chart
controls can be used as an effect of an event happening. In the Events tab in TrendServer Pro set
up a cause to trigger the effect of a chart control.
• • Pause - this will pause the chart until it is resumed. Resuming a paused chart will
display continuous chart data from when it had been paused. The chart can be
stopped if in a paused state.

• • Stop - this will stop the chart and no chart data will be displayed for the length of
time the chart is stopped. If a stopped chart is resumed there will be a gap in the
displayed chart data.
• • Resume - this can be used after the chart has been stopped or paused. The
chart data will continue from where it has been paused with no gaps displayed.
But if the chart has been stopped the displayed data will display a gap in data
until it is resumed
• • Clear - this will clear all the data being displayed. Data will not be cleared if the
chart has been stopped
• • Prefill - this will clear the chart and then fill it with the current reading.

Comms Server Database
On system start up the Communications Service will start automatically . This service is responsible for
launching database related components.
System Setup
The system can be set up two ways.
1. For customers who are setting up in preparation for the arrival of their devices. Using the
TrendServer and Comms Server software, create a database for the device(s) and
configure each device for logging using the comms server. When the devices are in place
and connected check the IP address (for Ethernet devices only) and the device ID is cor-
rect.
2. For larger networks - Set up the hardware first noting each devices ID and IP address.
Use the comms server software to set up the devices on a database and configure log-
ging for each device. The devices will need to be set up on the TrendServer software
before the connections can be tested and become active.
Shutdown Server
The Communications Server appears as an icon in the Windows system bar at the bottom right of the
screen. Right click on that icon and you will see the pop up below.
Select Shutdown Server and the following message box would pop up

Select “Yes” and the following events will happen
If the Communication Service UI is open with Non-Admin privileges, the following message will appear.
Select “OK” and the Communication Service UI will be closed but the TrendServer software will still
be running:
If the Communication Service UI is open with Administrative privileges, the following message will
appear. Select “OK” and the Communication Service UI will be closed and TrendServer software is
also successfully stopped.
Select “No” and no actions will be taken.

Chapter 9: Graphing in the
TrendManager Suite
Graphing
The TrendManager Suite allows the user to prepare data imported from Honeywell
recorders as a graph. All the areas listed below are covered in the TrendManager Suite
Help. Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related
help files.
FIGURE 9.1
Graph slide
out pane
Graph area
Realtime
Trend-
Server only
Graph list
Scales
Graph
window
Data Locator button Data found Data in brackets being graphed
Graph list
This is a list of the stored and open graphs in the currently selected folder. See “Folders” on
page 172
Add New Graph

• To open a graph click on the Graph icon at the top of the Button bar. This displays the
Graph slide-out pane .
• Click on Add New Graph and a blank graph will appear.

Graph a recorder
• To graph a device go to the recorders list under the Recorder slide-out pane.
• Drag and drop the desired device either over a blank section of backdrop (to make a
new graph) or over an existing graph to add traces to it. Data can be imported without
first closing graphs, relevant graphs will auto update.
Traces on graphs
• To add traces to a new or existing graph, select the recorder icon on the graphs tool bar
called “Add Data to Graph” and click on Pens to reveal the Pen list, see Figure 9.3 on
page 240. Drag and drop the selected pen(s) to the scale or trace areas of the graph.
• Traces can be deleted easily by dragging and dropping the pen scale over a Trash can .
This does not delete any data, only removes the trace from the graph.
• Traces can also be added by double clicking on them.
Copy a graph
• Go to the Graphs list under the Graphs slide-out pane.
• Either drag the selected graph onto a blank section of the Graphs list or right click and
select copy. For moving graphs between folders, see “Move a graph between folders” on
page 172
Graph with Events

See “Graphing Events” on page 247
Graph a Batch
See “Graphing a Batch” on page 250
Save a Graph
• When the graph is closed a prompt will appear to save the graph. Enter a name for iden-
tification and click on Yes and the graph will be saved and appear in the Graphs List.
• The graph can be saved directly by clicking on the Save icon on the left side of the graph
area or from the Graph Menu, by clicking on the Save. Ctrl + S also will save a graph.
• The graph is saved exactly as it is displayed at the time of closure.
• Just the graph is saved not the data.
Save As a Graph
• Save As feature allows the graph to be saved with a different name.
Rename a graph
Graphs can only be renamed when none are open or the first time it is saved.
• Go to Graphs list under the Graphs slide-out pane.
• right click on the graph icon and select rename.
• enter the new name in the box provided and click on OK.
Delete a graph
• Go to the Graphs list under the Graphs slide-out pane. Either drag the desired graph
icon over the nearest Trash can or right click on it and select delete.

Data Locator
FIGURE 9.2 Data from different recorders Data locator brackets
Use the Data locator to find your data. The Locate button appears at the bottom of the
scale window, activate this to reveal an area below the Time bar underneath the Graph
window.
The Data locator displays the location of data as grey bars, each bar representing data
from a single recorder. The Data Locator shows all the data from a recorder(s), as a bar.
The locator brackets represent the visible span of your graph.
Data can be found by moving the Data locator brackets along the X-axis until they capture
the grey bars. Many recorders can be displayed on one graph. Drag the recorders from the
Database slide-out pane onto the graph.
Using the left mouse button, click, hold and drag the data locator brackets left or right over
the data. Right click to cancel a selection. The brackets can be resized to encompass small
or large amounts of data. This data will then be displayed on the graph. Zoom in or out by
left or right clicking on the time bar.
When the cursor is placed over the Data locator brackets , two arrows will appear. Use the
right mouse button to move Data locator brackets, notice the brackets do not resize as
with the left mouse button but remain the same.
The year, day, month and time will be displayed whilst the locator is being moved. For
recorder specific help, select any item on the screen for enquiry and press F1 on the key-
board.
Adding historical data to a realtime graph

Historical data from a recorder on a database in the comms server can be added to a graph
already displaying realtime data. The realtime data is graphed in the blue tint section of the
graph area. Drag a recorder or pens from a recorder, on a database in the comms server,
on to the white middle section of the graph area.
For specific help, click on any part of the graph and press the F1 key on your keyboard to
display the related help files.

Graph display features
FIGURE 9.3
Activates Add data to Print this Graph display Point markers Start of one or
switches the graph graph switches more batches
panel
Digital values
cursor
Add Real-
time pens
to graph
Spread-
sheet
export
Graph data
viewer
Pen Data
Source
Viewer
Set time
graph span
Save
graph
Trash can
for drag/
drop
delete
Events Scale auto Arrange Traces Time & date bar
display display and select
switches button
"Pen type" option is added to switches panel. Check and UnCheck of PenType will show
the pen type legend on the scale or not show the pen type legend on the scale.

Graphing different types of scale data
FIGURE 9.4 Realtime data, Historical data, Logged data scales and Time adjustment pen
Realtime data is displayed as a scale with an orange strip down the left side of the scale,
realtime data comes directly over the comms connection via the comms server. Realtime
data scales will show a legend on pen scale i.e. "RealTime" .
Historic data scales are sky blue, this is data that has been received via comms and stored
in a database. Historic data scales will show a legend on pen scale i.e. "Historical Real-
time".
Logged data or data from disk will have a completely white scale, this is data that has been
transferred or imported from a disk or via FTP. Logged data scales will show a legend on
pen scale i.e. "Historical Ftp".
Time adjustment pen scales have a grey strip down the left side, this is data from pens that
have had a time adjustment due to day light saving time.
Realtime data and Historic data should be transferred via the comms server. The historic
data is stored in a data base and both sets of data can be displayed at the same time. First,
make sure the comms server is active. See “Graphing Realtime Data” on page 255
Time adjustment pen

There may be occasions when it is required to adjust the time on the recorder, such as day
light saving time. When this occurs and there is an overlap of data, this is recorded on a
duplicate pen scale panel hiding behind the original. These can be identified by a grey strip
down the left hand side of the scale panel and will show a legend on pen scale i.e."Time
Adjustment".see “Pen Scales” on page 244. This is viewed best in Tile or Strip mode
where the Trace is shown continuous. The time adjustment pen only shows the data that
has overlapped, the trace will continue on the original pen.

Pre-Trigger Data
Data imported that includes Pre-Trigger pens will be displayed as overlapped data. Multiple
pre-trigger sessions will be shown as multiple overlaps on the same screen, but connected to the same
overlapped pen.
FIGURE 9.5 Pre-Trigger data shown as Overlapped Pens

Zooming
Y-axis zooming
Y-axis zooming is done in the Scale window. Y-axis zooming can be
achieved by placing the cursor, which turns into a magnifying glass,
over the numbered area of the Scale window and left clicking to
zoom in (increase size) or right click to zoom out (decrease size). To
select a specific area of data stay on the numbered part of the scale,
left click, hold and drag. Two horizontal lines will appear to enable the
user to select a portion of the graphed data. As you click on the Scale
window a boxed area appears on the coloured part of the bargraph
showing where the data is that you are scaling.
Having zoomed in, full span can be restored by clicking on the
restore button at the top right of the scale. If a large arrow appears in
the scale, there is no data available for the trace in the current time span window.
X-axis zooming
Take the cursor to the bottom of the graph into the Time bar area for X-axis zooming. The
cursor becomes a magnifying glass so a left click will zoom in (increase size) or right click
will zoom out (decrease size). Another way of ‘zooming in’ is to select a section of the scale
by placing the cursor on the Time bar, using the left mouse key, holding and dragging to the
left or right over the desired area. Two vertical lines will appear to enable the user to select
a portion of the graphed data. Right click to cancel a zoom on the time bar.
The Time bars below show zooming in, increasing the scale in the X-axis.
From this,
reading in minutes
to this,
reading in seconds
Point markers
Point markers show the actual logged data points
along the trace and are dependent on the logging
rate set e.g. if the logging rate is set to one per sec-
ond then the point markers on the graph will log data
every second. Point markers can be added to a
graph by going to the Switches panel. Figure 9.3 on
page 240.

Pen Scales
The pen scales can show the full scale, as originally set eg. 0 to 150, or can auto-fit the
data so far to show the highest and lowest values. So within the 0 to 150 scale the signal
may have only measured between 30 and 60 on the scale. Click on the Auto-fit resize but-
ton to toggle the scale
Full Pen Scale
Scale configuration button Auto-fit scale button
Auto-fit Scale
The scale also has a Scale configuration button, click on this and the change pen scale lim-
its box will appear. In this box is displayed:
• Minimum and Maximum readings so far for this pen
• Original span and zero scale limits
• Current span and zero scale limits
Set the scale limits using the Max Min, Original or Current buttons, or enter new span and
zero scale limits in the boxes provided. Click on OK when finished.

Arranging Scales
Scales can be moved manually or by using the Arrange button.
FIGURE 9.6 Scale panels can be arranged by placing the cur-

sor over the left hand side of each scale panel
until a hand appears. Holding down the left
mouse button and drag the scale panel into the
Grab in
desired position then release the mouse button.
this area of
Remember the position of each scale panel
the scale
determines the position, within the graph win-
to move its
dow, of its corresponding pen data. Scale units
position
will also be displayed where applicable.
If a scale appears like a big arrow pointing to the

left saying “No more data”, this means that there
Resize is no data to display for this pen at this time.
handle
Auto Arrange scales

Along the bottom of the scale window is an Arrange button. This gives four options for auto
arranging the scale panels.
1.The top button automatically generates Tile mode, as shown.
2.Strip mode is the second button which makes all the scale panels full height.
3.The third arranges the scale panels of different sizes to Best fit
4.Minimise the scale panels is the bottom button, to achieve the least amount of
room taken up.
Resizing scale panels

Scale panels may be reduced or increased in size by using the resize handles, indicated by
a small bar at the top and bottom of the scale panel, see Figure 9.6 on page 245. Move the
cursor over either handle, TrendManager Suite changes the appearance of the cursor
from a pointer to a double headed arrow, drag until the required size is achieved and drop.
The area used within the graph window, to display a pen’s data, is dependent upon the size
of the respective scale panel. If a scale panel is increased by 100% in length, the area used
to display that data will also increase by 100%.

Graph Set Time Span
This button, on the switches panel, Figure 9.3 on page 240, produces a box
where the user can specify an exact start time, date and span of the current
graph to be displayed. It is also possible to view the most recent data using
the Go to Last drop down box.
Select any option from Go To Last drop down box and click ok it will show the below mes-
sage.

Graphing Events
To display Events on a graph, activate the Events button below the win-
dow displaying the graphed scales. This will enable a blue events bar at
the top of the graph area. The events bar displays single icons represent-
ing one type of event or a grey numbered tile which indicates multiple
events have occurred. A green numbered tile also indicates multiple events but one or
more of the events is the start of a batch. If >100 is displayed in a number tile, this means
100 or more events have occurred during its span. These can only be viewed when the box
reads <100. This is done by zooming in on the graph using the eyeglass cursor that
appears in the Time/Date bar and clicking the left mouse button, or by using the Event filter.
Click on an icon in the Events bar to display details of that particular event. Click on the
grey numbered tile to produce the Select Events box. This displays all the events within
that tile span. Select an event from the list and press OK and details of that event will be
displayed on the graph.
Realtime and Logged data via Modbus will not display Events on the X Series recorders.
Single event icons, displayed in the events bar, represent different events:
• Recorder with a green screen - A normal system message.
• Recorder with an orange screen - A system warning.
• Recorder with a red screen - A system problem.
• Bell - An alarm (yellow if the alarm is active).
• Flag - A marker.
• Person - User generated text.
• Light bulb - Digital input or relay (illuminated when active).
Batch Event icons
• Red square - End of batch
• Green arrow - Start of batch
• Two red vertical line - Pause batch

• Green line and an arrow - Resume batch
• Red cross - Abort batch
• Blue pin - Comment or other batch events eg. User ID, Lot number
Event Interaction
Be careful when adding Batch events. Starting a second batch before the first batch has
ended will cause the first batch to end where the second batch starts. However, in the latest
version of software (June 07 onwards) concurrent batches are possible, so batches can
overlap.
In this example batch 002 has been started before batch 001 has ended, this will make
batch 001 end where batch 002 starts and batch 002 will end at the next available End
command which is the marker to end batch 001.
Start 001 Start 002

End 001 End 002

.
FIGURE 9.7 Graphing Events Comment Batch / End Batch
Pause Batch Resume Batch
Number of Into Alarm / User activated

Events tile Out of Alarm message
Events bar
Events button Events Filter Select Events box produced Events detail Use the grab
by a numbered events tile text box handle to repo-
sition the box
Explaining an Events Graph

When an event is selected from the event bar a coloured text box will appear. Text boxes,
user defined or linked to an event, can be dragged and re-positioned anywhere on the
graph. Each text box has a grab handle in the top left corner and a close box (X) in the top
right corner. Hovering the cursor over the grab handle will cause it to changes to a white
hand. A dotted leader line will appear from the Event box to where the event occurred on
the graph, the Event box can now be repositioned on the graph. The leader line can be
moved in the vertical plane by clicking and holding the end bar. For alarms, the dotted line
will point to the place where the pen was triggered. User text boxes will be saved to all
recorders being graphed in that window.

Events Filter
Use the Events Filter to display only the type of event you
want to view, such as Alarm, User, or Batch. Figure 9.7 on
page 249.
Right click on the Events bar at the top of the graph to pro-
duce the Events Filter menu. By default all the events are
all set to be active. Click on the events to deactivate, these
will not be displayed in the Event bar. Click directly on an
event icon, (e.g. the bell icon represents the event is an
alarm), this will select that particular event, indicated by a
tick. Once selected it will always be displayed even when
that type of event has been filtered out.
Add User Text Event

This is selectable by right clicking on the Event bar,
which will produce a box where you can select the Add
User Text Event.
Depending on where you click on the Event bar will
determine the time and date displayed in the box and
the time and date that the User Event is displayed on
the graph. The time and date can be changed using the
drop down boxes. To change the date the drop down
box will produce a monthly calendar. Select the month
and click on the date. To change the time, first click on
the hours, minutes or days then use the up and down
arrows to change the time.
Enter text for any Event or add a Batch Event Marker. These User Text Event markers can
be displayed on the either the Logged data/Disk data graph area or the Realtime graph
area. Maximum characters = 43 including spaces.
User defined text can be added to any graph retrospectively. The text entered will appear
with that event. The time and date will automatically be added to the text displayed.
Batch markers can be retrospectively created in historical data. Once entered, a User text
event cannot be erased. See “Retrospectively Graphing a Batch” on page 253
For details on setting up Events using TrendManager Software, see “Events System”
on page 150
Graphing a Batch
Individual batches can be graphed by right clicking on the appropriate
recorder in the recorders list and selecting Batch from the tool bar. The Event/
Batch View window will appear with the Batch tab displaying all the Batches
for that particular recorder. Either select a batch and drag and drop it onto the graph area
or double click on the start of a specific batch. The graph data being displayed will only be
for that batch. All events, including batch events will be displayed when the Event bar is
activated.
To see how to generate a graph and show comparrison for Golden Batch go to “Generate Graphs”
on page 199
The batch area is contained within two red dotted lines denoting the start and the end of, in
this case, batch 216.

A Batch graph can be quickly identified by the word “Batch” displayed in the time bar at the
bottom of the graph.
There is an elapsed time of 10 seconds before the batch is started and when the batch has
ended.
10 secs elapsed
time before and
after batch
Right click on a
recorder in the list.
Select Batch to
produce the Event/
Batch viewer
Drag and drop
or double click
a batch to pro-
FIGURE 9.8 duce a graph

Another way to graph a batch is to double click on one of the batch event markers in the
event bar. If it is a green tile this means one or more batches will have started, double click
to produce the event list to select the desired batch.
If data is downloaded part way through a batch the batch graph will display the start of the
batch and a red dotted line showing where the batch was interrupted.
The Batch graph will prompt to be saved, by default, as the Batch Name or it can be
renamed. Load the same batch more than once and the Batch graph will be renamed with a
suffix -001, -002 etc.
Even if the graph is not saved the Events are entered into the database.
Double click on Start Batch

Event marker to produce
individual batch graphs
FIGURE 9.9

Retrospectively Graphing a Batch
Batch graphs can be created from existing data. The Events and batch information can be
viewed and exported to a spreadsheet in just the same way for batches that are created
before the data is graphed.
• Open a graph showing the required data and go to the Events bar at the top of the
graph.
• In the Events bar the cursor will change to a hand, To start a batch, right click in the
Event bar at the approximate required location.
• Select Add Batch Start Event and enter the required time and date plus any batch
information. Do the same for the End Batch and to add any other User Event.
• All other Batch Control Events can be used in Add User Event. Use //C to add in a
Comment, //I for User ID, //D to add in a Description etc.
• The Events will show in the Event bar with their corresponding icon. To save the
graph close it, click yes to save and rename if you wish.
To create a separate batch graph from this, right click on the recorder the graph was cre-
ated from in the recorders list and select the batch button from the tool bar. Or you can
select the Batch button from the main tool bar for all the recorders.
Find your batch in the list and double click or drag the batch onto the graph area. Addi-
tional batch information can be added at this stage by right clicking in the Event bar.
To view the event information for this batch graph select the batch required in the Batch tab
and select the Show/Hide Events.
Creating a batch from old data by

right clicking in the Events bar
New Batch graph.
Events/Batch details dis-

Realtime Graphing
Realtime Graphing
To graph real-time data on TrendServer Pro, press the “Real-time” button located on the
left hand side. This will list all the recorders currently connected. The recorder set up on Mod-
bus will be in the list. The recorder will be in the list under the name that you gave it when
entering the device details.
Either click and drag the recorder name from the list to the graph area, this will add all the
recorders pens onto the graph, or click on “pens”, to list the pens available and drag the re-
quired ones onto the graph.
As soon as the pens are on the graph they should start to update in real-time. The graph will
be split into two as below.
Figure 9.9 Realtime Graphing
Drag and Drop

Recorder from
the list onto
the graph area
Realtime Modbus The white background area The blue background area
button recorder is the historical data. is the real time data.
The white area for historical data will display the data that is stored to the database. At this
point we have no data being stored to the database, it is simply being acquired and graphed,
if the graph is closed any data downloaded via Modbus will be lost.

Graphing Realtime Data
Only data can be sent via Modbus, so no recorder configurations or events are sent for
Realtime and Logged data for the X Series and GR recorders.
FIGURE 9.10 Graph using data via Trendbus
Realtime pens Logged data or data from Realtime data from the
shown in orange a disk (white scale) same recorder
To display realtime data on a graph left click on the Realtime icon from the tool bar down
the left side of the main screen. This will produce the Recorders pane displaying the
recorders that are available. Click on the Comms server tab to view a list of the servers.
The Pens tab will display which pens are available on the recorder.
• Either, select the recorder from the list and drag it across the screen into the blank
graph area, this will display all the pens on the recorder. Or, alternatively, select the
Pens label at the top of the Recorders pane and select individual pens and drag them
on to the blank graph area.
• Maximise the graph and use the Arrange button, at the bottom of the graph
screen, to organise the pen traces and scales. The graph is split into two areas. The
area to the right, with a blue tint, is the realtime graph area. The white area between
the scale and the realtime graph area is for graphing logged or historical data. See
“Graphing Realtime Data” on page 255

• If there is no data being displayed in the realtime graph area, check the comms server
is active, then check the comms server status to see if the recorder is Talking or Wait-
ing . If there is still no realtime data being graphed, check to see if the pause button at
the bottom of the realtime graph area has been activated, if so, click to deactivate.
• Data will graph across the screen from right to left, the furthest point to the right show-
ing the current time. Place the cursor in the Date/time bar running along the bottom of
the graph area. use the right and left mouse buttons to zoom in and out on the data.
Ensure the time is synchronised between the recorder and PC. The time displayed on
the graph is the time set on the recorder, where ever in the world it may be. See “Real-
time graphing across Time Zones” on page 256
• Right click in the graph area to produce the Digital Values cursor, hold the right mouse
button down to drag the cursor to any point in the graph area.
Batch Events in Realtime (only available for Honeywell V5 recorders)

Adding Batch Events or User Text events to Realtime data can only be done in the historic
data window.
Pause button
The Pause button stops the automatic scrolling, the data will continue to
arrive in realtime, but the current time will stop on the right side of the screen. This is to
help the user review the realtime data that has passed off the graph to the left. The Hori-
zontal scroll bar at the bottom of the screen can be used to scroll back and survey the
previous data. To zoom in on a specific area of data, left click the mouse button, hold and
drag over the selected area in the Time/date zone at the bottom of the graph area.
When the pause button is deactivated the auto scrolling will resume and the current time
will be displayed at the furthest point on the right side of the screen. Only time is frozen, no
data is lost, this includes event data if this option has been selected.
Realtime graphing across Time Zones

Realtime graphed data appears from the right hand edge of the screen and scrolls to the
left. The right hand edge represents the time ‘Now’. If an event or a spike occurs it will hap-
pens at the same moment you see it appear on the graph. The time may not be the same
as the date line shows on the graph. The recorder has to be synchronised with the PC
through the same Comms Server.
Retrieving data via another Comms Server may give a different time setting. If the user is
accessing data from a recorder in a different time zone, the time displayed on the graph
will be the time set for the PC.
Example: User UK1 wishes to access data using the software on his PC in the United
Kingdom, the data is on a recorder in Washington D.C. USA. The Comms Server in the US
is synchronised, at US time, with the recorder. User UK1 sees an event occurs at 4.00pm
(UK time) on the graph it would actually have happened at 11.00 am on the recorder in
Washington D.C. The graph will show the time lines as for real UK time.
Data logged to disk will store the time as displayed on the PC and the recorder once they
have been synchronised.

Graph Pen Data Source Viewer
Select this icon from the left side of the graph to view all the sources related
to the pens for that graph. This will provide information like PenName, Pen-
Type, RecorderName, DatabaseName, ServerName.
The icons on the left are, Select all, does exactly that. Copy selected data to
clipboard copies the selected data on to the Windows clipboard for pasting
into such as Microsoft™ Word or Excel. To Print selected data click on the Print icon to
generate two boxes, one to select the font required, then click OK followed by the print
setup box.
Graph Data Viewer

Select this icon from the left side of the graph area to view data as a table.
The Data Viewer either displays an overview of data (every pixel) currently
visible in the graph window showing times and values that have been aver-
aged, or as actual data points for the same span. The left column displays
the time and date of each data value.
This example show 3 pixels and their widths measured in max/min time readings
The screen area may span 1000 pixels and Pixel 1 width
each pixel may contain 100 data points. This 15.02.40.0000 min reading
can all be viewed by the Data Viewer using 1 15.03.19.9999 max reading
Actual logged Data Mode . The Overview
mode gives a minimum and maximum read- Pixel 2 width
ing per pixel effectively compressing all the 2 15.03.20.0000 min reading
data points in the pixel. On the Overview 15.03.99.9999 max reading
mode the time between each reading is Pixel 3 width
3
divided up evenly from the width of the graph. 15.04.00.0000 min reading
15.04.39.9999 max reading
Each of the other columns represents an indi-
vidual pen trace on the graph. If there is no
data available, a dash will appear. Single data values will be present in the column unless
the pen trace is only logging Min/Max data values, in which case there will be two values in
the column separated by a comma. Even if the data has not been set up to log min/max
readings the data viewer will do this in the Overview Mode.
If an asterisk* is displayed after the value in overview mode, this indicates that the data
values have changed from the previous line. If an asterisk* is displayed in actual data
mode, the value was sampled at the time specified on that line.

Data Viewer in
Overview mode
Remove recorder
name from columns
Actual logged data
Select all
Copy selected data

to the clipboard
Print the
selected data
FIGURE 9.11
Data Viewer in
Actual Logged
Data mode
Displaying data
from the same
graph and time as
the overview
mode.
FIGURE 9.12

Use the bottom and side scroll bars to reveal all pens and more data values. To re-arrange
the columns, place the cursor in between the column headings until a double headed
arrow appears. Click and hold down the left mouse button and move the column left or
right. Rows of data can be selected by holding down the CTRL key and clicking on the col-
umns required. To select all data, hold down the SHIFT key and select the first and last row
required, or use the Select all icon.
The icons, displayed on the left, are Remove recorder name from columns, this can be
used to hide the name to allow more column space. Show all of the data, this is not an
overview, this is all the actual data points.
NB. When using this as it will reveal all the data, this could produce a huge list or even
refuse and will ask you to resize the graph.
Select all , does exactly that. Copy selected data to clipboard copies the selected data
on to the Windows clipboard for pasting into such as Microsoft™ Word or Excel. To Print
selected data click on the Print icon to generate two boxes, one to select the font required,
then click OK followed by the print setup box.
According to your version of Windows, the amount of data might reach the maximum size of
the clipboard and some lines will be clipped off.
Click in any area on the screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help
files.
The Data Viewer will prompt with the warning message below when data point exceeds
1000 for each pen or total data points exceeding 20000.
Printing graphs
To Print a graph simply click on the print icon and select either standard print or legend
print, or select print from the graph drop down menu running along the top of the screen.
The latter gives you the option of print preview where the graphs can be viewed in both
forms. The standard print will print the graph as displayed on the screen. Legend print
adds an information box at the bottom of the graph identifying the graph name, recorder ID
number, recorder name and recorder description.
Also displayed are all the pens used, showing each pen trace (in colour) with the pen tag/
name and pen description. The legend print shows exact start and stop time and dates.
The legend details are taken from information entered during the recorder, pen and graph
set ups.
Both graphs will print vertical background lines according to the time span, and horizontal
lines depicting the scale range. With different scale ranges, the horizontal lines displayed
are from the scales nearest to the right hand edge of the scale area. The scale lines are
determined by the "major grads" as defined in the setup of the recorder.

Use the Arrange button to ensure the scales down the right hand edge of the scale area
are exactly in line. Go to Graph, Print preview to check all scale lines are visible, if some
scale lines are missing the scales cannot be in line.
To change the print settings, have the graph open, select Graph from the drop down menu
running along the top of the screen and select Print Preferences. Click in any area on the
screen and press F1 on the keyboard to display the related help files.
FIGURE 9.13
Folder name/ Recorder Recorder Recorder Start and End time Pens displayed
Graph name ID number name/tag description and date of graph on graph and
area displayed colour of traces

Chapter 10: TrendView Historian Server
Client Software
Software License Agreement

Refer to the TrendView Historian installer for the software license agreement. On start-up
you will be required to agree to the Software License in order to proceed. See “Software
License Agreement” on page 261.
TrendView Historian Support Information

1. TrendView Historian supports OPC Historical Data Access Specification 1.2. Any interfaces and
functionality apart from specification 1.2 which are not supported. For more information please refer
to OPC HDA 1.20 Specification by following this link http://www.opcfoundation.org/Download-
File.aspx?RI=117
• Anonymous, Interactive and All Users’ access restricted for the TMS OPC HDA
Server (i.e., TrendView Historian). Hence, all users may not be able to access it.
• Only Local/Domain users who are added to user group ‘TMSApplicationAccessGroup’
on both machines, where TrendServer Pro and OPC HDA client resides, are given
access to TMS OPC HDA Server.
• If the above step is not followed OPC Client(s) may get "Access Denied" error.
• For Matrikon OPC Client, OPC ENUM DCOM object can be given security permis-
sions for the TrendManager Suite Users.
2. TrendView Historian does not support Alarms or Events. TrendView Historian is only for view-
ing historical data and no support is provided for annotations interface.
3. You need to provide start as well as end time to retrieve historical data. (Exception is Asynchronous
methods ReadRaw(), ReadProcessed (),AdviseRaw(), AdviseProcessed(), where there is no need
to provide end time)
4. To access historical data the start time should be less than end time.
5. TrendView Historian server will simply return “No Implementation” for any not supported inter-
faces and their related functionality to OPC HDA client.
6. There is no support for insert, replace of any data in to the TrendView database server.
7. TrendView Historian does not support (ReadAtTime for both Synchronous and Asynchronous
interfaces) for retrieving data at a particular timestamp.
8. Quality in the case of synchronous and Asynchronous call will be set to Good i.e.
OPC_QUALITY_GOOD by Default.
9. The Maximum returned values in Asynchronous and Synchronous call will be 20000. This means
that OPC HDA client will get a maximum of 20000 pen values in one call at a time.
10. Clarification on most used methods and their usage:

• AdviseRaw() in Asynchronous will get all the historical data as well as updated from last
updated interval till the current time. It means if the client has set interval of 10 seconds then
AdviseRaw() will be called every 10 seconds to get the data from the HDA server.
• ReadRaw () in Asynchronous and will give data to the client in chunks (maximum limit of
items at a time) until there is no data in HDA server. e.g.: If there are 1000 values in the
TrendView Historian and if the setting is configured to get the maximum, up to 100 values
in one read operation, then it will retrieve the first 100 values to client and will continue to get
next 100 values untill it reaches 1000 at which time it will stop.
OPC client will be responsive to user actions while performing this operation and getting
data from the server meaning that user can perform any action on the client even if client is
busy getting data from the server.
In the case of Synchronous call, all 1000 values will be read at the same time. The user has
to wait till the client gets these values from server. In other words, client will be locked up
while getting these values from the server.
• ReadProcessed() in Synchronous and Asynchronous, this will return aggregates (min, max,
average, interpolated) to the OPC client.
• AdviseProcessed() in Asynchronous and will return aggregates (min, max, average, interpo-
lated) to the OPC client.
• Playback interface is same as Asynchronous AdviseRaw () only difference is that it will only
give historical data and not the latest value.
TrendView Historian Installation

References for HDA Client and Supported Versions
1. Matrikon OPC HDA Explorer V1.1
2. Honeywell Experion PKS: Honeywell OPC Validator V1.1.0000
3. PI OPC HDA Client -V 1.20
Reference Manuals
OSIsoft -
OPC Data Access & Historical Data Access Server for the PI System
Vendor -
The OPC standards are freely available from the OPC Foundation at
http://www.opcfoundation.org.
Matrikon OPC HDA Explorer -
HDA Explorer is a free stand-alone tool for verifying historical data through HDA, testing
HDA OPC Servers, and troubleshooting connectivity to HDA OPC Servers. www.matriko-
nopc.com

OPC Client Access to TrendView OPC Historian Server
A Windows-based Client application must be used to view and access historical data from
TrendManager Suite software. There are various clients like Matrikon, Wonder ware,
OSI-PI that are available that can be used for accessing historical data from the Trend-
View OPC Historian Server.
NOTE: When using an OPC Historian Client to connect to the TrendServer OPC Historian
Server Version 100.1.0 or higher you will need to add the OPC Historian client user to
the“TMSApplicationAccessGroup” if this has not already been done. Refer to Chapter 3
Installation for more details.
You can search for a remote machine where the TrendView OPC Historian server is pres-
ent from the Client. Once the server machine is found by the client application, the OPC
Client application may “Connect” to the TrendView OPC Historian server. In the most
user-friendly client applications, the data items for the server may be “browsed” by the cli-
ent for Tag selection into named data groups. In other less user-friendly OPC Client appli-
cations, the data items for a group are entered as tags via defined text strings. The tags
defined then become OPC Tags in the application’s database. The recorder’s OPC server
provides access to each of the defined active Pens (P1 to P96). Namespace for Trend-
View Historian is given below.
FIGURE 10.1 OPC Client application
Figure 10.2 shows how an OPC client may be interfaced to the TrendView Historian
Server. This example uses an OPC HDA demo client from Matrikon, which is one of a num-
ber of OPC developers for the industrial and process markets. Their OPC demo software

can be downloaded for free at: https://www.matrikonopc.com/downloads/145/specifica-
tions/index.aspx
This example goes through the set up of the Matrikon OPC HDA Client and how to view
historical data from the system where TrendManager Suite software is installed.
Retrieving Data from TrendView Historian Server

Steps to retrieve historical data
In Figure 10.2 , only synchronous functionality is explained since Matrikon only support
Synchronous interfaces. For Asynchronous functionality, use any other OPC client e.g. OSI
PI HDA client.
1. Start the Matrikon OPC HDA Explorer Client. Matrikon OPC HDA Explorer screen is shown below.
FIGURE 10.2 MatrikonOPC HDA Explorer Client Startup Screen

2. To Connect the TrendView Historian Server on the local system, click on the HDA Server list
dropdown list and select Hci.TrendView-Historian Server. For connecting to the TrendView His-
torian on a Remote system go to Step 4.
FIGURE 10.3 Select Hci.TrendView-Historian Server from Server List
3. Click (Connect) button to connect to the Hci.TrendView-Historian Server. Also you can con-
nect from the menu Server > Connect.. The Hci.TrendView-Historian Server will get added under
LocalHost. Now Move to step 7.
FIGURE 10.4 Hci.TrendView-Historian gets added under LocalHost

4. For connecting a remote TrendView Historian Server. Go to Server menu > Connect Remote or
click (Connect Remote) button on screen. It will open “Add Remote Server” Dialog.
FIGURE 10.5 Connect Remote to connecting remote Server
5. In Add Remote Server Dialog, Select “Manual” radio control for the HDA Server and enter
“Hci.TrendView -Historian”. Select UNC Name in Remote Computer and select the remote sys-
tem name where OPC TrendView is installed. Click “Connect” to connect with Remote OPC
TrendView Historian Server.
FIGURE 10.6 Add Remote Server Dialog.

6. After clicking the “Connect” button in Remote Server Dialog, the dialog will close and
“HCi.TrendView -Historian” will show under remote computer name.
FIGURE 10.7 OPC TrendView Historian server added under Remote system
7. To Add Item, right click on “HCi.Trendview-Historian and click Add Items, or add by clicking on
(Add Items) button on screen. “Insert Item” dialog will open.
FIGURE 10.8 Add Items dialog

8. Once the “Insert Dialog” is open, use the Browse window to navigae to the required Pen location.
List of pens will show at lower left corner of dialog.
FIGURE 10.9 Insert Item Dialog. Browse tree to reach required Pen
NOTE: Historical data may come from multiple sources like Real time logging, FTP or be
imported from USB, SD card or /GR1Compact flash devices. To distinguish them a new
branch has been added into the tree. The details are given below.
• Real Time Logged Data: Real time data logged by communication server in Trend-
Manager Suite software. If you make changes to the time in the system where the
communication server is logging real time data then Historian Data after the time
change will be shown in Real Time Logged Data and Historian data before the time
change will be shown in Real Time Logged Data 1, The number will keep increasing
for each change in the time.
• FTP/Imported Data: Data imported from FTP using SD card, Compact Flash or USB
Drive. If you make changes to the time in the recorder while logging data in the
recorder then the Historian data after the time change will be shown in FTP/Imported

Data while historian data before the time change is shown in FTP/Imported Data 1
branch.
9. Double click on the pen with the historical data you want to retrieve. Double click on the pen ID and
it will show in the Item Id edit box. Pen 430 has been selected in this example.
FIGURE 10.10 Select the pen for insertion

10. Click to enter the pen into the selected item list. Follow the same procedure for adding multi-
ple pens. Click OK to close the dialog.
FIGURE 10.11 Insert Item Dialog
Select the pen with the historical data you want to retrieve.

11. The selected pen will be shown in the list present at the lower left corner.
FIGURE 10.12 Selected pens shown

12. Right click on the pen to retrieve associated historical data associated. The context menu will be
shown, click on Read Raw. It will open theRead Raw Dialog. Multiple pens can be selected for
retrieving associated historical data.
FIGURE 10.13 Selecting Read Raw to retrieve historical data

13. Set the Start Time, End Time and Maximum Number of Values needed to be retrieved.
If Get Bound option is checked the data between Start Time and End time will be retrieved including
start and end time boundaries. If not, it will just retrieve the data excluding start and end time bound-
aries. Max Num Value option is the maximum number of Historical data points that can be obtained
from server. Clicking on Read Raw option will retrieve the historical data for the specified time.
FIGURE 10.14 ReadRaw Data
Note: If you specify 0 as Max Num Values then the maximum number of historical data
specified will returned. If the time span contains lesser values then the maximum number of
historical data specified, then all the Historical data in the time span will be returned. To
view the maximum number Historical data that can be returned by the server, see “Get
Server Status” on page 281.
Note: The server returns the data with a timestamp of the recorder i.e. local timestamp.
Some OPC HDA client considers timestamp as GMT converted into local timestamp which
may cause it to return invalid historical data. It is suggested that you should add or subtract
the time difference to the start time and end time timestamp while viewing historical data.

14. Clicking Read Raw will close the Read Raw Dialog. All the values will show in the right hand side
list box. The number of Historical data values returned is shown above the list box. You can view
the associated historical data with another pen by selecting the tab associated to it.
FIGURE 10.15 Showing Historical Data Associated with Pen

Steps to read attribute.
1. Please follow the first 11 steps given in Retrieve Historical data to add items/Pens.
2. Right click on the pen name and select Read Attribute. It will open Read Attribute Dialog.
FIGURE 10.16 Selecting Read Attribute
3. Select the Checkbox in front of the attribute for retrieving the associated information for the pen.
Attributes are used to return information associated with the pen. Click Read Attribute to retrieve
the information associated with the pen.
NOTE: Support is provided for below Attributes only:

• •OPCHDA_ITEMID: ItemID - Specifies the item id.
• •OPCHDA_DESCRIPTION: Description - Describes the item
• •OPCHDA_ENG_UNITS: Eng Units - Specifies the label to use in displays to define the
units for the item (e.g., kg/sec).
• •OPCHDA_SOURCE_NAME: Source Name - Specifies the name of the item on the
source.
• •OPCHDA_HIGH_ENTRY_LIMIT: High Entry Limit - Specifies the highest valid value
for the item. A value for the item that is above OPCHDA_HIGH_ENTRY_LIMIT cannot
be entered into history. This is the top of the span.
• •OPCHDA_LOW_ENTRY_LIMIT: Low Entry Limit - Specifies the lowest valid value for
the item. A value for the item that is below OPCHDA_LOW_ENTRY_LIMIT cannot be
entered into history. This is the zero for the span.

FIGURE 10.17 Read Attribute Select
4. Click the Read Attribute button to close Read Attribute Dialog. All the information will be shown in
the right side view.
FIGURE 10.18 Read Attribute Dialog

Retrieving Aggregate values.
1. Please follow the first 11 steps given in Retrieve Historical data to add items/Pens.
2. Right click on the pen and select Read Processed. It will open Read Processed Dialog.
FIGURE 10.19 Read Processed Dialog

3. Set the Start Time, End Time and Resample interval. The Resample interval is the period during
which you want to calculate the aggregate.
For more information please refer to OPC HDA 1.20 Specification by following this link
http://www.opcfoundation.org/DownloadFile.aspx?RI=117
FIGURE 10.20 Set Start Time and End Time for Read Processed

4. Select the Pen from the Aggregate Item box for the aggregate values required. Select Aggregate
from Aggregate box. Click the Set Selected Item to add a pen with Aggregate. The pen name and
Aggregate will display in the list control in Aggregate. Click the Read Processed button.
NOTE: Support is provided for below aggregates only:

• •AVERAGE: The average aggregate adds up the values of all good raw data in a given
interval, and divides the sum by the number of good values.
• •MAXIMUM: The Maximum aggregate retrieves the maximum good raw value within
the interval and returns timestamp which will always be the start of the interval for
every interval.
• •MINIMUM: The Minimum aggregate retrieves the minimum good raw value within the
interval and returns timestamp which will always be the start of the interval for every
interval.
• •INTERPOLATIVE: The Interpolative retrieves the data which is derived from the data
in the database, but for which there is no stored value. This may be linearly derived
from two stored data points on either side of the requested timestamp, or it may be
extrapolated from the data in the archive.
FIGURE 10.21 Selecting Aggregate and respective pen

5. Clicking Read Processed will close the Read Processed Dialog. All the aggregate values are dis-
played in right side view as shown below.
FIGURE 10.22 Aggregate Values

Get Server Status
1. Follow the steps below to retrieve the Server status.
2. Connect to the OPC TrendView Historian server.
3. Right click on Hci.TrendView -Historian Server, Select Server Status and the Server Status
Dialog will open.
FIGURE 10.23 Select Server Status
Right click on Hci.TrendView-Historian to get the Server Status Dialog.

4. Server Status dialog will open.
FIGURE 10.24 Server Status Dialog

Disconnecting Server
1. Right click on Hci.Trendview-Historian and Click Disconnect or click (Disconnect) to dis-

connect from server.
FIGURE 10.25 Select Disconnect Server
Constraints:
• In Hci.TrendView-Historian Server, insert and replace data functionality is not sup-
ported. You will not able to modify historical data in TrendView-historical server.
• In Hci.TrendView-Historian Server, Read Modified and Read at Time functionality of
any data is not supported.

Chapter 11: Glossary
Explanation of terms relating to the TrendManager Suite.
10baseT - Network cable and connections. Twisted pair cable, the most commonly used for Ethernet net-
works. The 10 means, 10 Mbps refers to the transmission speed.
10/100 - Either 10 base or 100 base (100mbps)
Address Resolution Protocol (ARP) - Used for mapping an IP Address to a physical machine address that
is recognised in a local network, such as an Ethernet Address.
AMS2750 - is the specification that covers pyrometric requirements for thermal processing equipment used for heat treat-
ment.
ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange. Represents characters as numbers for data
transfer between computers.
Barcode - A machine readable, graphic image using pre-defined patterns of linear bars or polygonal elements
to encode, typically all of ASCII character codes.
Batch Mode - Management of sections of data. Batch markers are setup by the user and are used to identify
and analyse batches of data.
Baud rate - Number of signalling elements that occur each second (bps).
BOOTP - Bootstrap Protocol is an Internet Protocol which allows a diskless workstation to discover its own
Internet Address, the IP address of a BOOTP server on the network, and a file to be loaded into memory to
boot the machine. This enables a workstation to boot without requiring a hard or floppy drive.
Client connections - realtime connections to local or remote servers. eg. TrendServer software or an OPC
client
Comms Server - This is the communications server which manages the communications status of a recorder
via a serial port or Ethernet connection.
Counters - For a User Counter to be used as a Cause, a User Counter must already be set up and be count-
ing something. eg. a User Counter as an Effect of another Event.
Counters can be used as an Effect of an Event to count an occurence or to reset different types of counters.
Database(s) - A collection of information organised in such a way that a computer program can quickly select
desired pieces of data.
Database Server - data bases administered by the database server. The database server is accessible by
other users on the network.
Data bits - Smallest unit of information on a machine.
Dedicated network - A computer network in which one or more computers are set aside (or dedicated) as
servers.
Dedicated server - A computer used exclusively as a network server.

Default Gateway - A configuration parameter transmitted to each network device. Where an IP Address can-
not be found in a local network, the default gateway sorts out getting traffic from one subnet to another.
DHCP - Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. Used for assigning dynamic IP address to devices on a net-
work. With dynamic IP addresses, a device can have a different IP address every time it connects to the net-
work.
DNS - Domain Name System (or Service), an Internet service that translates Domain names into IP
addresses. Because domain names are alphabetic, they're easier to remember. The Internet however, is really
based on IP Address. Every time you use a domain name, therefore, a DNS service must translate the name
into the corresponding IP address. For example, the domain name www.honeywell.com/ps might translate to
195.26.34.186. The DNS system is, in fact, its own network. If one DNS server doesn't know how to translate a
particular domain name, it asks another one, and so on, until the correct IP address is returned.
E-mail - Correspondence or data transmitted over computer telephone lines to a recipient via network lines or
a service provider.
Ethernet - The worlds most popular network standard. A local area networking protocol for connection and
interaction or communication between computers. Trendbus is transmitted over an Ethernet connection.
Ethertalk - What you call Ethernet when you use it on a Macintosh.
Fast Ethernet - An Ethernet standard which operates at 100Mbps rather than 10Mbps.
File server - A network computer containing disk drives that are available to network users. A computer
library that stores a library of program and data files for a number of network users.
File Transfer Protocol (FTP) - A method of retrieving information from the internet. FTP are the rules that
govern the transfer of data files within a computer or between computers.
FIXED - Fixed IP Resolution specified by user. Enter known IP address and Subnet Mask.
FPLB – Floating Point Little Endian Byte Swapped Format
FP B - Floating Point Big Endian Format
Golden Batch - Defines a standard (Golden Batch) by creating a pen trace (golden pen/trace) or identify from
an existing list of samples.
Handshaking - The protocol for identification and communication between two pieces of equipment.
Host - The home or controlling computer in a network of computers or printers.
Hub - A common connection point for devices in a network. Hubs are commonly used to connect segments of
a LAN. A hub contains multiple ports. When a packet arrives at one port, it is copied to the other ports so that
all segments of the LAN can see all packets. See passive hub, intelligent hub and switching hub
Intelligent hub - Intelligent hubs include additional features that enables an administrator to monitor the traffic
passing through the hub and to configure each port in the hub. Intelligent hubs are also called manageable
hubs.
IP Address - This is an identification for communication. An IP Address is a 32-bit number that identifies
each sender or receiver of information that is sent in packets across the Internet.
IP Resolution - A mechanism which maps the IP Address to an Ethernet address. This is also known as an
Address Resolution Protocol, or ARP.
IQOQ - This stands for Installation Qualification & Operation Qualification. This is a custom built report based
on the configuration of a recorder.

Local Area Network (LAN) - A local area network (LAN) is a group of computers and associated devices
that share a common communications line and typically share the resources of a single processor or server
within a small geographic area (for example, within an office building). Usually, the server has applications
and data storage that are shared in common by multiple computer users. A local area network may serve as
few as two or three users (for example, in a home network) or many as thousands of users
Local Database - Referred to in this manual this means a database held on your own PC.
MODBUS - Modbusÿis an industry standard protocol used in many SCADA packages for network control.
The recorders can be inserted into existing networks using Modbus or linked directly to a controller over an
RS485 link. Modbus TCP/IP is available through the Ethernet interface.
MODBUS X - Modbus X differs from the standard Modbus only by the 4 byte floating point order being
Mbps - Million bits per second. Transmission speed between computers and or other devices
Network - Two or more computers connected together by cable so that they can exchange information and
resources. A network may be made up of computers, printers, scanners, or other devices.
Network drive - A drive that resides somewhere in the network rather than on your own computer.
Network interface card (NIC) - An adaptor card that lets the computer attach to a network cable.
Network server - A computer that stores and manages programmes, data and peripherals such as output
devices for other computers and workstations connected through the network. Also called a file server.
OPC client - OLE Process Control. A software application that can be used to interface realtime data via the
comms server.
Packets - Data is sent over a network in manageable chunks called packets or frames. The size and makeup
of a packet is determined by the protocol used.
Parity - This ensures data is transmitted accurately and transfers correctly. The parity bit is added to every
data unit (typically 7 or 8 bits) that are transmitted. The parity is set to either odd or even. Both the transmitting
and receiving device must be set up the same.
Passive hub - A passive hub serves simply as a conduit for the data, enabling it to go from one device (or
segment) to another.
Peer-to-peer network - A network in which any computer can be a server. A scheme in which networks
computers share resources; each work station may either be client or server. See also Dedicated network.
PPP - Point to Point Protocol. This is an Internet protocol (IP) which packages the computers TCP/IP pack-
ets and forwards them to the Server. From the Server they can actually be put on the Internet. PPP has error
detection and is preferred over SLIP.
Protocol - The rules of the network game, governing the transfer of data between a computer and peripher-
als. Protocols define standardisation formats for data packets, techniques for detecting and correcting errors.
Realtime data - Logging or graphing realtime data means that the software and the recorder have been syn-
chronised in time to communicate the transfer of actual current ‘happening now’ data.
Remote Database/Server - Referred to in this manual as a database or server that is not directly connected
to your workstation or PC (not on a local network).
RS232 - This protocol is useful for point-to-point communications at low speeds. For example, port COM1 in a
PC can be used for a mouse, port COM2 for a modem etc. This is an example of point-to-point communication:
one port, one device. RS232 was designed for communication of local devices, and supports one transmitter
and one receiver.

RS485 - RS485 is used as a multiport communications: more devices may be connected to a single signal cable
e.g. Ethernet networks, which use coaxial cable. Trendbus can be used via RS485 serial communications port.
Server - a computer or device on a network that manages network resources. For example, a File Server is a
computer and storage device dedicated to storing files. A Network Server, is a computer that manages net-
work traffic and a Database Server is a computer that processes database queries. Severs are often dedi-
cated, meaning that they perform no other tasks besides their server tasks.
SLIP - Serial Line Internet Protocol for communication between two machines previously configured for
comms with each other. PPP is preferred.
SMTP - Simple Message Transfer Protocol. This allows a device/computer to send messages to an e-mail
server without having its own e-mail address.
Stopbits - Used to signify the end of a character string. Used for setting up constraints for Ethernet communi-
cations.
Subnet Mask - A single IP network can be divided into many subnets by using some of the MS bits of the
host address portion of the IP address as a subnet. A mask is simply a screen of numbers that tells you which
number to look at underneath. Using a mask saves the router having to handle the entire 32 bit address; it can
simply look at the bits selected by the mask.
Switching hub - actually reads the destination address of each packet and then forwards the packet to the
correct port.
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) - The standard procedure for regulating trans-
mission on the Internet.
Trendbus RS485 - Custom protocol for connection and interaction or communications between computers
and other peripherals, providing high levels of functionality and security.
WAP - Wireless Application Protocol. Secure specification allows user access to information instantly via
hand held devices such as mobile phones with displays for Internet access.
Windows NT Server - Microsoft’s premier server operating system ideal for running dedicated servers in
small or large networks.
Win2K3, Windows 7 (32 and 64 bit - Professional, Enterprise and Ultimate Edition), Windows 8 (32 and
64 bit-Professional, Enterprise and Ultimate), Windows Server 2008 and Windows Server 2012 and
2016 - A multipurpose network operating system for running server applications and building internet capabil-
ities as well as sharing files and printers etc.

Appendix A - Maths Expressions for
Honeywell V5 recorders
A maths expression is made up of a number of terms. A term is the smallest valid com-
ponent in a maths expression and can be a variable, operator or function. Certain oper-
ators and functions have the same effect in a maths expression - for example, $ or
SQRT will both perform the square root of an operand.
An operand may be a constant (i.e. a fixed number) or a variable . The variables that can
be used are described below.
In the following examples P1 (Pen 1) equals the result of the maths expres-
sion shown in the shaded area. A pen number (P1) will be automatically
entered when a pen is selected.
• An - The letter ‘A’ followed by a number causes the
reading taken from an analogue input (denoted by P1= A1
the number) to be inserted in the maths expres-
sion. In this example, the readings from Analogue
Input 1 are being displayed on Pen 1.
• In - The letter ‘I’ followed by a number causes the
reading taken from a digital input (denoted by the P1= I1*I2
number) to be inserted in the maths expression. In
this example, the result of digital input 1 multiplied by digital input 2 is displayed
on Pen 9. As digital inputs are read as either 1 or 0, the result of this maths
expression will effectively be an AND function (i.e. digital inputs 1 and 2 must
both be 1 for the value displayed on Pen 9 to be 1 - see “Boolean Expressions” on
page 294).
• On - The letter ‘O’ followed by a number causes the
state of a Relay output (denoted by the number) to P1= O1
be inserted in the maths expression. A Relay out-
put is read as 1 when active and 0 when inactive.
• Operators* - can be either unary or binary. A unary operator requires one operand
after it to make a valid expression, whereas a binary operator requires an oper-
and on either side. For example # is a unary operator, as in #2 (2 squared),
whereas * is a binary operator, as in 2*3 (2 multiplied by 3). *Not available on the
eZtrend V5.
• Another feature on the Minitrend V5 and the
Multitrend Plus V5 is MU (Memory use) DU, P1= MU
(Disk use) and PU* (PC card use) gives a percent-
age reading of disk or memory space used. *Not available on the eZtrend V5.
NB. When entering the MU and DU feature using TrendManager Suite,

ensure the Complex Variables box is ticked.

The available functions and operators for maths expressions are described below. Where a
function and operator have the same effect they are listed together. A U after the operator
denotes a unary operator and a B denotes a binary operator.
NB. Maths functions highlighted with a * in the Example column, are not available on the
eZtrend V5.
.
FUNCTION EXPRESSION EXAMPLE DISPLAY
Add Operator + (B) Analogue Input 1 added to Analogue

+ Input 4 displayed on Pen 1 P1 = A1+A4
Subtract. Operator -
Analogue Input 1 subtracted from
- (B)
Analogue 2 displayed on Pen 1 P1 = A2-A1
Negate. Operator - (U)

*The sign of the value Analogue Input 1is
- reversed. A reading of 6 would be P1 = -A1
displayed as -6 and vice versa
Multiply. Operator *
The value of Analogue Input 2 multiplied
* (B)
by two P1 = A2*2
Divide. Operator: / (B) Analogue Input 1 divided by Analogue

/ Input 3 P1 = A1/A3
Square Root.
Function: SQRT *Pen 1 displaying the square root of P1 = SQRT[A3+A4]
SQRT or
Operator: $(U) Input 3 added to Input 4
P1 = $A3+A4
Square. Function SQ
SQ Operator: # (U)
*The value of Input 3 squared and P1 = SQ[A3]
displayed on Pen 1
P1 = #A3
Round. Function *The value of Analogue Input 2 divided

ROUND ROUND by four and rounded to the nearest whole P1 = ROUND[A2/4]
number
Reciprocal. Operator
*The reciprocal of the value of Analogue
Input 2 is displayed on Pen 1. (An
RECIPROCAL ! (U)
alternative way of writing this expression
P1 = ! A2
would be 1 / A2).

The result of Input 4 subtracted from

Absolute. Function
Input 1 is always considered as positive. P1 = ABS[A1-A4]
ABS ABS Operator: & (U)
If A1 = 2, and A4 = 3.5, the value or
displayed on Pen 1 would be 1.5 not -1.5.
P1 = & A1-A4
Pen 1 displays the Total of Pen 2 divided
Assigns the Totalised by 10
T value of a Pen NB:Do not omit the divider (10), P1 = T[2,10]
even if it is 1
Logarithm to base 10.

Function: LOG *Logarithmic value (LOG10) of Input 1 P1 = LOG[A1]
LOG Operator: @ (U) displayed on Pen 1.
P1 = @A1
Natural logarithm.
LN Function: LN
*Natural logarithmic value (loge) of Input
2 displayed on Pen 1. P1 = LN[A2]
Pen 1 displays whichever is the lowest

Low value. Function:
value out of Input 1 and Input 3. Note the
LO LO
inputs being compared are separated by P1 = LO[A1,A3]
a comma.
High value. Function:

Pen 1 displays the highest value out of
HI HI
Input 1 and Input 3. P1 = HI[A1,A3]
Root. Operator: ~ *The third root value of Input 1 displayed

ROOT (B) P1 = A1~ 3
on Pen 1.
Power. Operator: ^
POWER *The value of Input 2 to the power of 3 (or
(B)
cubed) displayed on Pen 1. P1 = A2^ 3
Modulus The value of Input 2 (A2) is divided by 20

MODULUS
Operator:%(B)
and the remainder ONLY is displayed on P1 = A2%2O
Pen 1. The signal will be within 0-19.
If the analogue input ‘A1’ is greater than

OVER Over ‘10’ then P1 will return the value of A1.
P1 = OVER[A1,10]
Returns ‘0’ if less than ‘10’.
If the analogue input ‘A1’ is less than ‘10’

UNDER Under P1 will return the value of A1.
P1 = UNDER[A1,10]
Returns ‘0’ if greater than ‘10’.

*P1 will equal 1 when ‘x’ stays within the

INSIDE Inside range ranges of ‘y’ and ‘z’. P1 will return ‘0’ if ‘x’ P1 = INSIDE[x,y,z]
is not within the ranges of ‘y’ and ‘z’.
*P1 will equal 1 when ‘x’ is outside the

OUTSIDE Outside range ranges of ‘y’ and ‘z’. P1 will return ‘0’ if ‘x’
is not outside the ranges of ‘y’ and ‘z’. P1 = OUTSIDE[x,y,z]
*The value of P1 equals the Sin of A1

SIN Sine A1 is in radians
P1 = SIN[A1]
(2pi radians in every 360ºC)
*The value of P1 equals the cosine of A1

COS Cosine A1 is in radians
P1 = COS[A1]
*The value of P1 equals the tangent of A1

TAN Tangent A1 is in radians
P1 = TAN[A1]
F2C F2C *Converts Fahrenheit to Celsius P1 = F2C[P2]
C2F C2F *Converts Celsius to Fahrenheit P1 = C2F[P2]
P1 is equal to the indexed analogue input

A Indexed analogue 1+I1 (If I1 = 1, P1 = A2)
P1 = A[1+I1]
(If I1= O, P1 = A1)
P1 is equal to the indexed digital input of

I Indexed digital input
1 + O1 (If O1 is 1, P1 = I2) P1 = I[1+O1]
P1 is equal to the indexed relay output of

O Indexed relay output
1-A1 (If A1 = O, P1 = O1) P1 = O[1-A1]
EVAL Evaluate *Returns 0 if x = O, otherwise returns 1 P1 = EVAL[x]

P1 displays the rolling average of:
Rolling Average.
x = analogue input eg. A1
RAV Function: R
y = number of samples, Max 500 P1 = RAV[x,y,z]
z = sample interval (ms)
P1 equals the ‘Delay’ of input A1, number

DELAY Delayed value
of samples (10), every second (1000 ms) P1 = DELAY[A1,10,1000]

*Calculates the value of the

Exp Expotential exponentional. P1 = EXP [2]
(P1 = 7.389056)
FL *Rounds down to the nearest whole

Floor
number
P1 = FL[x]
CE Ceiling *Rounds up to the nearest whole number P1 = CE[x]
Cold Junction P1 displays the value of the CJC

CJC Compensator ‘x’ is the board number from 1 to 4 P1 = CJC[x]
CA Alarm counter
*Where ‘x’ is the Alarm number,
P1 will return the alarm count value P1 = CAx
CD Digital counter
*Where ‘x’ is the Digital input number, P1
will return the Digital count value P1 = CDx
*Where ‘x’ is the Event number,
CE Event counter
P1 will return the Event count value P1 = CEx
CU User counter
*Where ‘x’ is the User counter number,
P1 will return the User count value P1 = CUx
*The value of P1 equals the inverse SIN
ASIN Inverse of SIN of A1. A1 is in radians
P1 = ASIN[A1]
*The value of P1 equals the inverse COS

ACOS Inverse of COS of A1. A1 is in radians
P1 = ACOS[A1]
*The value of P1 equals the inverse TAN

ATAN Inverse of TAN of A1. A1 is in radians
P1 = ATAN[A1]
*The value of P1 equals the hyperbolic

SINH Hyperbolic SIN of ‘x’ SIN of A1. A1 is in radians
P1 = SINH[A1]

COSH Hyperbolic COS of ‘x’ COS of A1. A1 is in radians
P1 = COSH[A1]

TANH Hyperbolic TAN of ‘x’ TAN of A1. A1 is in radians
P1 = TANH[A1]

Inverse hyperbolic
*The value of P1 equals the inverse
ASINH hyperbolic SIN of A1. A1 is in radians
SIN of ‘x’
P1 = ASINH[A1]
Inverse hyperbolic
ACOSH hyperbolic COS of A1. A1 is in radians
COS of ‘x’ P1 = ACOSH[A1]
Inverse hyperbolic
ATANH hyperbolic TAN of A1. A1 is in radians
TAN of ‘x’ P1 = ATANH[A1]
P1 displays the Alarm status for AL1.

64 alarms available, AL1 to AL64
AL Alarm Status
Returns ‘1’ for an active alarm and ‘0’ for P1 = AL1
an inactive alarm
ALEV Alarm Level

P1 will display the Alarm level setup for P1 = ALEV3
pen 3 (ALEV3). Use ALEV1 to ALEV 64
NB. Maths functions highlighted with a * in the Examples column, are not available on the
eZtrend V5.
Operator Precedence
The precedence of an operator specifies how tightly two expressions are tied together. For
example, in the expression 1 + 5 * 3, the answer is 16 not 18 because the multiplication “*”
operator has a higher precedence than the addition “+” operator. Parentheses may be used
to force precedence, if necessary. Eg. (1 + 5) * 3 evaluates to 18.
If two operators have equal precedence they are evaluated from left to right.
Eg. 6 - 4 + 2 * 3 = 8 (multiply first, then from left to right for the equal values).
The same equation with parenthesis can change what you calculate first.
Eg. 6 - (4 + 2) * 3 = -12 (brackets first, then muliply, then the equal values from left to right)
NOTE Round brackets are for precedence and square brackets are for functions.
Examples of expressions set up for Pen 1:
LOG [P2]*30
The logarithmic value (to base 10) of Pen 2 is then multiplyed by 30.
(P3+P4)%100
The value of Pen 3 and 4 are added together then the Modulus function is applied. This is
where the sum is divided by 100 and only the remainder will be displayed.
ABS[(COS[P2/30]*100)]
The Cosine of Pen 2 divided by 30 is then multiplyed by 100. Then the Absolute function is
applied (if the result is positive or negative absolute will always display as a positive).

Precedence order
Function Expression Associativity
SQRT Square Root.

operator $
SQ Square.
operator #
ABS Absolute.
left to right
operator &
RECIPROCAL Reciprocal.
operator !
LOG Logarithm.
operator @
POWER Power. operator ^
right to left
ROOT Root. operator ~
- (negate) (unary minus) left to right
MODULUS Modulus.
operator %
left to right
/ Divide. operator /
* Multiply. operator *
- Subtract.
operator -
left to right
+ Add. operator +
Spaces are not recognised in maths expressions

and the expression can be written anywhere P1 = ROUND[$(A3)]
within the 250 character text field.
More than one set of brackets can be used in a

maths expression. For example, if you wanted P1 = #(SQRT[A3])
the value of the square root of Analogue Input 3
to be rounded to the nearest whole number the
expression would be written in one of three ways
as shown opposite.
The Square Root function can be written as the
operator $ or as the function SQRT.
In the first and third example the round brackets
surrounding A3 can be omitted - they are P1 = #($(A3))
included to make the expression easier to under-
stand.

Constants
A Constant can be added to the end of a Maths equation.
These are the constants available.
Constant Value Description
The ratio of the circumference of a circle to its

PI 3.14159
diameter
C 2.99792e+008 Speed of light
Vmol 22.4138 The molar volume, in units ml/mole
g 9.80665 Gravity
Equal to the ratio of the energy E of a quantum
Planck 6.62608e-034
to energy to its frequency
Average energy of a molecule to its absolute
Boltzmann 1.38066e-023
temperature
Charge e 1.60218e-019 Elementary charge (electron, proton)
Avogadro 6.02214e+023 Number of particles per mole of particles
Boolean Expressions
Boolean expressions can be performed using Relay output (O) and Digital input (I) vari-
ables. At a basic level AND and OR functions can be performed by using the * and + opera-
tors respectively between the above variables. More significantly, these variables and
operators can be used to enable or disable certain segments of a maths expression, as
illustrated in the following example.
Example:- The temperatures of two adjacent kilns are being monitored. Kiln 1 is being
monitored on Analogue Input 1 of a recorder, and Kiln 2 on Analogue Input 2. It is notice-
able that when Kiln 1 reaches a temperature above 750 °C, the Kiln 2 temperature
increases by 2% of the Kiln 1 temperature. How can the recorder be set up so that this 2%
increase is ignored?
1. A high alarm on Analogue Input 1 is set so that when the temperature reaches above 750 °C Relay
output 1 is activated.
2. Set the maths expression for Analogue Input 2 as P2 = A2 - ( (A1/50) * O1). This means
that when the temperature of Kiln 1 is below 750°C, O1 = 0 so the above expression will
be P2 = A2.
When the temperature is above 75 0°C, O1 = 1 so the term A1/50 (which is 2% of the value
of A1) will be subtracted from the value of A2. This will give the temperature of Kiln 2 as it
would be without the effect of Kiln 1.
Maths and Fail Safe

When using output relays in a maths expression be aware the maths is reporting the literal
state of the relay.
If Pen 1 (P1) equals output channel 4 (O4) and fail safe is On
with no alarm triggered, the relay will be energised and P1 P1= O4
will return 1.

Appendix B - Maths Expressions for
X & GR Series Recorders
Full Maths & Script Processing

The X Series and GR recorders are supplied with Basic Maths functions: Add, Sub-
tract, Divide and Multiply. There are two further options that can be added, Full Maths
and an extremely powerful Scripting processing module. Scripting delivers an additional
level of enhanced capabilities with multi line script processing. Full and Scripting Maths
must be activated in the recorder as a Firmware credit option. (Scripting is not available
on the eZtrend).
When a recorder setup is loaded into the TrendManager software the Maths capabilities
will be transferred with the setup. If you are creating a new recorder in TrendManager
software to be transferred to a recorder the Maths capabilities will be available but will
only become active if the recorder has the same Maths functions enabled.
This document provides the Maths Variable and Function table and examples of the capa-
bilities from the simple to the complex to assist the user in understanding the concepts and
potential of these features.
*** Important Note, Full Maths and Script functions are Options and must be enable using
the Credit System. Be sure to enable these options or they will not be available. See
“Credits tab” on page 68.
Notes:
• if, elseif & else are followed by expressions in “curly brackets” {….}
• lines within the curly brackets always end in semicolon e.g. ;
• every execution path must have a return statement
• every expression within curly brackets “{…}” must include a “return”
• Small values (fractions) entered into a maths expression will require a zero before the dec-
imal point. Eg. 0.5
• Outputs that are set to Single Pulse should not be used as a part of a maths expression as
it can cause spurious values.
• No white spaces
• Syntax is not case sensitive
• 500 character limit for scripting
NOTICE
Full Maths and Scripting functions are Options and must be enable using the Credit
System. Be sure to enable these options in the recorder or they will not be available.
See “Credits tab” on page 68.
All of the following tables display functions available in Full and Scripting Maths unless
otherwise stated.

Maths Variable and Function Tables
Table 13.7 : Maths Variable Table
Maths Variables Syntax Description
Alarm Level PnAxL Gets the Alarm Level, n is Pen number 1 to 96

and x is alarm number 1 to 6
Analogue Input (Eng values) An Get the value of Analogue n (1 to 48) in Engi-
neering units
Analogue Raw (Electrical RAn Get the value of Raw Analogue n (1 to 48) in
values) Electrical values
Batch Mode BATMD Returns 1= batch running, 2 = batch stopped or

3 = batch paused
Batch comment list blcomm[x] Get index of Batch comment list entered on
batch start, where X is the group number (1 - 6)
Batch description list bldesc[x] Get index of Batch description list entered on
batch start, where X is the group number (1 - 6)
Batch lot number list bllot[x] Get index of Batch lot No list entered on batch
start, where X is the group number (1 - 6)
Batch name list Blname[x] Get the index of Batch name list entered at
batch start. Where x is the group (1-6)
Batch user list Bluser[x] Get the index of Batch user list entered at
batch start. Where x is the group (1-6)
Blkv BLKVx Get the local variable x. This variable is local to

this script. There is a maximum of 20 local var-
iables per script.
Compact Flash or SD card CFFREE Returns the percentage of free storage space
free storage space* available on the Compact Flash or SD card
CJC CJCn Get the Board CJC value. N = 1 to 6 (Returns

value in Degrees F, C or K depending on the
localisation setting
CJC in Degrees C CJCnC Get the Board CJC value. N = 1 to 6 (Always

returns value in degrees C)
Comms Variables CVn Get the Comms variable n = 1 to 96
Digitals Dn Get the value of Digital Input n (1 to 48)
Digital Input bit pattern DIOn Get the 16 bit pattern from the DIO slots, where
n= 1,2 or 3 (Slot G, H & I respectively).
Returned as a 16 bit word (0 to 65535). A
channel configured as an output is set to 0.
EC1 to EC 20 EC1 Event Counters 1 to 20
File Transfer Protocol FTPHRS Returns the number of hours of “safe” record-
recording hours left ing time available
Glbv GLBVx Get the global variable x. This is a global varia-

ble accessible to all scripts. There is a maxi-
mum of 200 global variables.

HPC1 to HPC48 HPC1 High Pulse count using Pulse cards
Internal memory hours left INTHRS Returns the amount of hours left until the inter-
nal memory starts to recycle (over-write).
IOC1 to IOC48 IOC1 Digital Input/Output counters for Digital in and

relay out
LPC1 to LPC48 LPC1 Low Pulse count using Digital IO cards in pulse
count mode
Pen Pn Get the value of Pen n (1 to 96)
Pen Minimum Value PnMINU Gets the Pen Minimum value n = 1 to 96
Pen Maximum Value PnMAXU Gets the Pen Maximum value n = 1 to 96
Pen report Maximum Value prmax[x,y,z] Gets the Pen Maximum value for a report. x =
pen number (1 to 96). y = period (1 = hour, 2 =
day, 3 = week, 4 = month). z = report set (1 =
current, 2 = previous completed)
Pen report Minimum Value prmin[x,y,z] Gets the Pen Minimum value for a report. x =
Pen report Average Value prave[x,y,z] Gets the Pen Average value for a report. x =
Pen report Totaliser Value prtot[x,y,z] Gets the Pen Totaliser value for a report. x =
Power Relay PWRREL Returns the status of the fixed power relay
Pstv PSTVx Get the persisted Global variable x. Persisted

global variables maintain their value through a
power cycle. There is a maximum of 50 per-
sisted global variables.
PRC PRC Power Relay Counter
Pulse Inputs (AI slots) HPULn Get the Pulse frequency from the Pulse card n
= 1 to 48 (25kHz max)
Pulse Inputs (DIO Slots) LPULn Get the Pulse frequency from the Digital Input
card when in Pulse mode n = 1 to 48 (1kHz
Max)
RT Compensation RTCOMPn Get RT Compensation value for channel n (1 to

48) Units mV
RT Calibration RTCALn Get RT Calibration value for channel n (1 to

48). Units mA
Slave Comms Variable*** SCV[1,1,1] Returns the value for the Modbus Slave
Comms

Totaliser Tn Get Totaliser value n = 1 to 96
UC1 to UC16 UC1 User counters 1 to 16
USB1 free storage space USB1FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space
available on the USB storage key fitted initially
(front or rear).
USB2 free storage space USB2FREE Returns the percentage of free storage space
available on the USB storage key fitted after
the first USB has been fitted (front or rear).
UV1 to UV32 UV1 This allows a system to be setup where

values can be altered to effect calcula-
tions without having to change the config-
uration
*Compact Flash is not available on the eZtrend.

** See Comms variable.
*** Slave Comms Variable.
Table 13.8 : Maths Function Table
Maths Functions Syntax Description
Add + Returns the result of the addition
ACos* acos[x] Returns the Arc COS of x
ASin* asin[x] Returns the Arc SIN of x
ATan* atan[x] Returns the Arc TAN of x
Ceiling ceil[x] Round up x to the nearest whole number
Clear Event** CLRE[x] Where x is the event number to be cleared ( 1 to

20).
Cos* cos[x] Returns the COSINE of x
CosH* cosh[x] Returns the Hyperbolic COSINE of x
Damp damp[x,y,z] x = input, y = Pen (pen variable being used) and

z = damping limit in engineering units. See
“Damping examples:” on page 300.
Divide / Returns the result of the division
Eval eval[x] Returns 1 if x is non zero, otherwise returns zero
Exponent exp[x] Returns the Exponential of x

Table 13.8 : Maths Function Table
Maths Functions Syntax Description
Floating point Absolute fabs[x] Returns the Floating Point Absolute value of x
Floor floor[x] Round down x to the nearest whole number
Get Screen Number GETS[x] returns the current screen number, where x in
the screen number. this can be used to detect
what screen is being displayed
Global Alarm Status ATOTt[x] ATOT[0] will return the total number of alarms
that are currently enabled in the recorder.
ATOT[1] will return the total number of alarms “in
Alarm” state in the recorder.
E.g P1= ATOT[1]/ATOT[0] * 100 would set P1 to
give alarm state percentage for the recorder.
Ln ln[x] Returns the Natural Log of x
Log log[x] Returns the Base 10 Log of x
Modulus x%y Returns the value of x with a modulus of y
Multiply * Returns the result of the multiplication
Power pow[x,y] Returns the value of x raised to the power y. Can

also be represented by ^
Power x^y Returns the value of x raised to the power y.
Reciprocal recip[x] Returns the reciprocal of x (i.e. 1/x)
Root root[x,y] Returns the y root of x
Round round[x] Rounds x to the nearest whole number
Set/clear a digital output SETD[x,y] This feature allows a digital output to be set or
cleared from a script, using the function
SETD[x,y] where x is the digital output 1 to 49 (
where 49 is the power relay ) and y is the value
1 to set or 0 to clear. The function will return the
value set if successful, if not successful it will
return -1.0, this would be caused by trying to set
and digital input rather then output.
Set User variable UVSET[x,y] Returns the result of x = the user variable and y
= the value.
Sin* sin[x] Returns the SIN of x
SinH* sinh[x] Returns the Hyperbolic SIN of x
Square Root sqrt[x] Returns the Square Root of x
Square sq[x] Returns the square of x (i.e. x multiply by x)
Subtract - Returns the result of the subtraction
Tan* tan[x] Returns the TANGENT of x
TanH* tanh[x] Returns the Hyperbolic TANGENT of x
Trigger an Event** TRIGE[x] This will trigger Event x (1 to 20).

TRIGE[x] will return 1 when the event is fired
otherwise it will return 0.

* Functions use radians (2π radians = 360 degrees)
** Event triggering from scripts

This feature allows any enabled event with an enabled effect (does not have to have any caus-
es enabled) to be triggered from within the scripting system using the following function,
TRIGE[x] where x is the event 1 to 20. Once an event is triggered using scripting the event is
locked and cannot be triggered again from scripts until the lock is cleared using the clear event
function CLRE[x] where x is the event number 1 to 20. This prevent successive executions re-
triggering the same event. As a further measure to avoid the system being overloaded by
events from within the script system, each time an event is triggered from within a script it will
apply a 1 second automatic lock preventing the same event from being triggered more then
once a second, irrispective of the CLRE[x] being called for that event.
Damping examples:
Example 1: if P1 was measuring degrees C the expression P1 = damp[A1, P1, 3] will damp
the signal with changes up to 3 degrees C, any change over 3 degrees between readings will
be damped but by a small amount.
Example 2: P5 = damp[A2, P5, A3] will damp the A2 input up to a level determined by input
A3, note the reference parameter (P5) is always the same as the pen it is being used in, this
should always be the case.
Table 13.9 :
Compare & Convert Syntax Description
%RHc rhc[x,y] Returns % Relative Humidity with y as the dry bulb

temperature in degrees C, and x the wet bulb tem-
perature in degrees C
%RHf rhf[x,y] Returns % Relative Humidity with y as the dry bulb

temperature in degrees F, and x the wet bulb tem-
perature in degrees F
C2f c2f[x] Converts a temperature in C to one in F
F2c f2c[x] Converts a temperature in F to one in C
Hi hi[x,y] Returns the larger value of x & y
Hi4 hi4[x,y,x1,y1] Returns the larger value of x, y, x1,y1
Inside inside[x,y,z] Returns x if between y & z, otherwise returns 0.
Lo lo[x,y] Returns the lower value of x & y
Lo4 lo4[x,y,x1,y1] Returns the lower value of x, y, x1, y1
Outside outside[x,y,z] Returns x if outside of y & z, otherwise returns 0
Over over[x,y] Returns x if it’s larger than y, otherwise returns 0
Under under[x,y] Returns x if it’s less than y, otherwise returns 0.

Table 13.10 : Timers
Timers Syntax Description
Tget tget[x] Returns the elapsed time of timer x since start
Tpause tpause[x] Pauses the timer x
Treset treset[x] Resets the timer x
Trun trun[x,y] Starts the timer x in y mode. (Mode 1 = reset to

0 and run, Mode 0 = resume from previous
value)
Timers must return a value. All timer commands must have “BLKV1 = the variable“ e.g.BLKV1
= tpause[1]. Value returned is the same as tget[1]. Timers count in seconds.
Maximum of 20 timers available.
Table 13.11 :
Accessors Syntax Description
Ai Ai[x] Get the value of Analogue Input number x
Alamct Almct[x,y] Get the current alarm count for Pen x, Alarm y
(the alarm number as identified in alarm mes-
sages)
Alamrt Almrt[x,y] Get the current alarm number for Pen x, Alarm
y
Alamsl Almcl[x,y,z] Get the current alarm level set . Pen = x (1-96),
Alarm = y (1-6), New level to set = z.
Eg. P3 = almsl[1,1,A3] will set Pen 1 alarm1
and shoe A3 pn P3.
Alamst Almst[x,y] Get the current alarm state for Pen x, Alarm y
(I = active 0 = inactive)
Di Di[x] Get the state of Digital input number x
Glbv Glbv[x] Get the value of global variable number x
Locv Locv[x] Get the value of local variable number x
Pen Pen[x] Get the value of Pen number x
Tot TOT[x] Get the current value of totaliser x

Table 13.12 :
Boolean Operators Syntax Description
AND && Returns a true or false result from testing if two

tests are both true. e.g. IF (A1==GLBV1) &&
(A2!=GLBV2)
Assign = Assigns one variable to another.

e.g.GLBV1=A1. (GLBV1 becomes the value of
A1).
Equal to == Returns a true or false result from testing if two

variables are equal to each other. e.g. IF
(A1==GLBV1)
Greater than > Returns a true or false result from testing if one
variable is greater than another
Greater than or equal to >= Returns a true or false result from testing if one
variable is greater or equal to than another
Less than < Returns a true or false result from testing if one
variable is less than another
Less than and equal to <= Returns a true or false result from testing if one
variable is less than or equal to another
NOT ! Returns true if the result is 0, otherwise returns

false.
Not equal to != Returns a true or false result from testing if two

variables are not equal to each other. e.g. IF
(A1!=GLBV1)
OR || Returns a true or false result from testing if one

or other or both tests are true. e.g. IF
(A1==GLBV1) || (A2!=GLBV2)
XOR ~ Returns a true or false result from testing if one

or other (but not both) tests are true. e.g. IF
(A1==GLBV1) ~ (A2!=GLBV2)

Functions for Scripts
(Scripting is not available on the eZtrend).
Scripts evaluate at whatever the Analogue sample rate is set to.
There is 500 character limit for scripting.
Table 13.13 :
Functions for Scripts Syntax Description
Else else Steps into brackets to run. Must always finish with
a return.
else
{
return y;
}
Elseif elseif(x) Carries out a conditional test and if true steps into
brackets to run. Must always finish with a return.
elseif (x>4)
{
return y;
}
First run (FIRSTRUN) Returns true if the script is being run for the first
time, otherwise returns false
If if(x) Carries out a conditional test and if true steps into

brackets to run. If false, steps to next test without
operating the contents of the brackets. Next step
will be either elseif or else.
Must always finish with a return.
If (x>5)
{
return y;
}
Set Changed (SETUPCHAN Returns true if the setup has been changed, other-
GED) wise returns false
Time Changed (TIMECHANG Returns true if the time has been changed, other-
ED) wise returns false

Full Maths
Full Maths functions provides a simple and intuitive method for the user to carry out numerous
mathematical functions. Some examples are shown below
Table 13.14 : Full Maths examples
Full Maths examples
P4=lo[A1,A2] Pen 4 shows the result of the lowest of either

A1 or A2
P3=(A1+A2)*SQRT[A3] Pen 3 shows the result of Analogue input 1

added to Analogue input 2, all multiplied by the
square root of Analogue input 3
P4=GLBV1 P4 shows the Global Variable 1
NOTICE
Please note “Pn=” is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder
e.g. To enter the equation P2=A2, the user would just type A2

Script Function Application Examples
(Scripting is not available on the eZtrend).
To enter a script for a Pen, ensure that “Maths Type” in the Pen Menu is set to Scripting.
Example 1
4 flow meters are fed into the recorder to trend, totalise and record daily flow. The application
requires that the user must know and record which flow meter is outputting the highest flow at
any particular time. This can of course be derived from the four lots of recorded data, but not
only is this extra analysis later, but a real time display is required.
The application is easily solved by using the Script Function in the recorder, represented in
pseudo code the script is as follows:
If input 1 is bigger than all the others, then make the global variable (1) equal to channel 1, and
display and record input 1.
If none of the above are correct then Input 4 must be the highest, so make the global variable
(1) equal to channel 4, and display and record input 4.
Display the global variable (1) on another pen to show which channel is biggest at any given
time.
Pen 5 is chosen to record the highest channel input, and channel 6 is chosen to record which
input is the highest.
The greater than “>” is used, the AND “&&” Boolean is also used, and the global variable
GLBV1 is used to hold the current highest channel number.
Converting this to an actual script gives the following:
If ((A1>A2)&&(A1>A3)&&(A1>A4)) This tests if flow meter 1 is more than 2, 3 and 4
GLBV1=1; If yes, then set display indicator to meter 1
return A1; And return the current flow reading
elseif ((A2>A1)&&(A2>A3)&&(A2>A4)) This tests if flow meter 2 is more than 1, 3 and 4

elseif ((A3>A1)&&(A3>A2)&&(A3>A4)) This tests if flow meter 3 is more than 1, 2 and 4
else If none of the above are true, then 4 is biggest
GLBV1=4; So set display indicator to meter 4
In this application, the flow meters are connected to inputs 1, 2, 3 and 4 at the rear of the re-
corder, and these are recorded on Pens 1 to 4
P1=A1
P2=A2
P3=A3
P4=A4
Pen 5 has the script above, which records and displays the highest flow rate of the four.
Pen 6 is set to record and display the input (between 1 and 4) that is the highest rate
P6=GLBV1
NOTICE
Please note “Pn=” is not entered in the Maths Block and is assumed by the Recorder
e.g. To enter the equation P2=A2, the user would just type A2
Example 2
In the same application as above, the user has noticed that whilst flow meter 2 normally has
the highest flow rate, on occasion a surge in flow meter 3 causes problems down stream. The
user needs to monitor the two inputs and count the number of times flow meter 3 reading ex-
ceeds that of flow meter 2.
The code consists of the two flow meter readings, and a change counter that totals the number
of times that flow 3 exceeds that of flow 2.
The pseudo code is written as:
If flow meter 3 has a larger reading than flow meter 2, check to ensure that it was already great-
er than meter 2, if it was return the latest change count value.

If it was not greater than meter 3 last time, set a flag to indicate a change and increment the
change counter by 1, then return the latest change counter.
If flow meter 3 is less than 2, simply return the change count value with no increment.
Pen 7 is used to implement this script and is implemented as follows
if (A3>A2) Tests if A3 is bigger than A2
if(BLKV1==1) If it was then tests if A3 was bigger than A2 last

time period
return BLKV2; If it was return with the current change counter
else If not then
BLKV1=1; Set flag to show that A3 has just exceeded A2
BLKV2=BLKV2+1; Increment the change counter by 1
Return BLKV2; Return the new change counter total
} }
else If A3 is not bigger than A2
BLKV1=0; Set flag to show A2 is bigger than A3 this time
Return BLKV2; Return current change counter
With script above, BLKV (all Variables) are used to maintain values. It should be noted that
BLKV’s do not persist over a power removal, and if the application were to require a non-vol-
atile count, then BLKVn should be substituted with PSTVn.
Example 3
The application described in Examples 2 and 3 is to be extended to totalise the amount of time
that Input 1 is the highest of 1, 2, 3 & 4.
Again scripting can be used to easily solve this requirement.
The Pseudo code is written as
If input 1 is indicated as the current highest value, then display the timer.
If input 1 is not the highest input value, then stop totalising time and return the current timer
value.

We know that in Example 1, the highest value channel number is contained with GLBV1, and
as this is a global variable it is also accessible from this script.
if (GLBV1==1) Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to channel 1
BLKV1=trun[1,0]; If it is then keep the timer running without resetting
return tget[1]; Return the current timer value
else If not then
BLKV1=tpause[1]; Pause the timer
return tget[1]; Return the current (paused) timer value
Note in this script above there is no way to reset the timer, this could be modified to allow the
user to reset this timer from a switch fed into a digital input as follows:
if(D1!=1) Tests if the DI 1 is not set
{ If it isn’t then
if (GLBV1==1) Tests if the global variable 1 is equal to channel 1
BLKV1=trun[1,0]; If it is then keep the timer running without resetting
return tget[1]; Return the current timer value
else
{ If not then
BLKV1=tpause[1];
return tget[1]; Pause the timer
} Return the current (paused) timer value
else If it is
BLKV1=treset[1]; reset the timer 1 to zero
return tget[1]; return the current (zeroed) timer value

Example 4
Commenting in Scripts
This is an example of how commenting can be used in scripts.
you can use the standard C++ commenting, inline comments use \\
for example
if ( A1 > 10 )
{
return 9; // If A1 greater then 10 return 9
}
or for block (single or multiline commenting the /* to open and */ to close, these are C style
comments and work as follows
if ( A1 > 10 )
{
return 9; /* If A1 greater then 10 return 9 */
}
for single line or
if( A1 > 10 )
{
/* if A1 is greater then 10 then return 9
*/
return 9;
}
these are also useful for commenting out code to try different things, for example
if( A1 > 10 )
{
return 9;
}
/*
else
{
return 20;
}
*/
return A1;
Here the else statement is "commented out" so it won't be included but can easily be re-intro-
duced if required.
Maths Error Messages

When the Maths functionality is processing through the scrips you have written it will carry
out Syntax and other checks. When it comes across operations, functions, brackets, etc. not
expected or permitted it will report an error. However, the fault being reported may be on a
previous line caused by the missing or incorrect function. Refer to Application Note 43-TV-
07-32 on your CD or web site for a list of scripting error messages.

Appendix C- Fuzzy Logging
What is Fuzzy Logging?

Fuzzy Logging is a real time Data Compression technique, is an alternative to the more
standard methods of recording data.
Paperless Recorders are primarily used for exception recording. They spend most of
their life trending and recording straight lines. Fuzzy Logging has been developed to
improve the efficiency of data storage, and is particularly effective in exception recording
examples where normal operation consists of generally static inputs.
Fuzzy Logging looks for straight lines in the data stream, in real time, whether they are
horizontal, climbing or descending. A straight line made up of say 10 points can be
equally well represented by 2 points, one at either end, the other 8 points are redundant.
Fuzzy logging works by creating straight lines in the data and discarding redundant
points.
What’s it for?
…… To help the user in the trade off
The Recording 'Pie'.
between Scan Rate, Disk capacity and
Recording Time, after all the ‘Pie’ is only
so big.
Fuzzy Logging has been developed to help

maximise all three sections, in effect Scan Rate Storage Capacity
increasing the size of the ‘Pie’. Recording Period
The result is a technique that delivers a host of real world benefits over the more tradi-
tional recording methods.
1. Disks take longer to fill – changed less frequently, less site visits.
2. Faster scan rates can be used for any given disk size – giving greater resolution on the process.
3. Recording time can be extended.
4. Less hard disk memory required for archiving on the PC.
5. Quicker graphing of data.
6. Smaller data files for remote collection.
OK. How does it work?

Fuzzy Logging does not log data points that form part of a straight line. The technique is
best illustrated by the diagram below:

Time
7
6
5
Input Signal
4
3
2
1
7
6
5 Continuously Sampled
4 data:
3
2
1
7
6
5 Fuzzy Logged data:
4 12 points only!
3
2
1 Changing ‘slope’ requires
more data points to be logged,
to capture the shape correctly.
Diagram 1
Points marked:  are NOT logged, as they lie on an ‘imaginary’ straight line between
points marked:
The graph of the Fuzzy Logged data, looks identical to the graph of the sampled data, but
has taken less than half the points to build it.
Sounds Great! But what about ‘Spikes’ on my trend line. Won’t it miss them?
NO, you will not miss any ‘Spikes’, ‘Glitches’ or ‘Transients’ – these are what you need to
see!
As Fuzzy Logging is an adaptive technique, it will log as fast as it needs to in order to cap-
ture everything.
Although not all points are logged, the base ‘Scan Rate’ of the input is the same as if you
were using a standard logging technique.

OK, but what about slowly drifting inputs?
Again – No Problem. The algorithm is processed in ‘Real Time’, i.e. as the reading is
taken. As it already knows the previous logged readings it can calculate where the next
point should be (assuming it’s on a straight line) – if the measured value does not equal the
predicted value, the point is logged as it no longer forms part of the straight line.
Fuzzy Logging, looks for straight lines – at any angle. Not just on the horizontal.
I’m convinced. Do you have any examples?

Example 1.) Flow & Pressure Measurement of Mains Water Pressure
A recorder was installed, to monitor the flow of a mains water supply. At peak demand the
mains pressure had been subject to sharp drops in pressure and flow rate, and it was nec-
essary to find the cause of the problem.
• The recorder had to have a fast scan rate, in order to capture the ‘glitches’.
• The recording period would be over many days if not weeks, so storage
capacity was at a premium.
A fast scan rate using the standard sampling method would result in a disk life of about a
day, which was not acceptable.
As this application consists of long periods of little activity (relatively constant flow rate),
and short periods of high activity (rapidly changing flow rate), it is an ideally suited to Fuzzy
Logging.
During the hours of stable flow where the flow rate remained more or less constant, the
Fuzzy Logging technique would give compression ratios up to 100 times. However, as soon
as a glitch appeared the fast sampling rate was able to capture and store all the points.
Example 2.) Cold Storage Temperature Measurement

A recorder was required to help track random and rapid temperature changes within the
cold storage rooms. Conventional sample recording had shown that temperature variations
were present, but was not of high enough resolution to pin point the cause.
Again as in example 1), the measured inputs would show long periods of stable constant
readings, interspersed with small sharp increases in temperature. In order to track the
cause of these variations, it was necessary to maximise the time resolution of the data.
This application was ideally suited to the Fuzzy Logging data storage technique, as the
periods of inactivity would result in compression rates of over 50 times.
Example 3.) Logged Data Example

The diagram below is a sample of actual logged data in both the Fuzzy Logging method
(top) and Sample Logging method (bottom), derived from the same analogue input.
It provides an excellent illustration of how less data points can be used to construct an iden-
tical trace.

Fuzzy Logged
Sample Logged
Diagram 2.
NB. This data extract was taken from a 56 hour temperature run, which resulted in approx-
imately 1 Mbyte of sample data, and approximately 40 Kbyte of Fuzzy Logged data.
A compression ratio of 25 times!
Anything else it can do?

Yes! Fuzzy Logging can be used as a ‘One Hit’ recording button.
In applications where the measured process is new or the ideal scan rate is unknown Fuzzy
Logging is ideal, as it adapts the log rate to the input signal, and can therefore find the opti-
mum logging rate for you.
Tolerance band widths

Tolerance band width can be set as a percentage of the scale range allowed above and below
the input signal.
A second band width can be set, this is where a tighter tolerance can be specified which must
be set within the limits of Band 1. Specify, as a percentage of the scale range, the tolerance
band allowed above and below the input signal.
Figure 14.1 Fuzzy logging tolerance settings
Band 1%
Band 2%
Trace
Band 2%

Appendix D - Events
Cause and Effect

The following is a list of all conditions and operations that are logged as Events. It provides
a description of the Event followed by a description of the Cause and the Effect tables.
For X Series and GR recorders Table 16 on page 317 and Table 17 on page 317.
*Not available on the eZtrend V5.
Table 14: Cause (Honeywell V5recorders only)
Method Description
Into Alarm When alarm state is entered
Out Alarm When alarm state is exited
Counter* When a counter reaches a specified value
Logging* When logging starts, stops
Change Set up* When a set up is changed
Disk/Card % Full When a disk or PC card is X% full. (X = user defined entry)
Disk/Card Out* When a disk or PC card is removed from system
Totaliser Start When totaliser is started
Totaliser Stop When totaliser is stopped or paused
Totaliser Reset When a totaliser is reset
Digital Inputs (high) A digital input has been applied
Digital Inputs (low) A digital input has been removed
Relay Outputs (high)* A relay output has been closed
Relay Outputs (low)* A relay output has been opened
Thermocouple O/C* Check if thermocouple has reported as open circuit
Screen Change* When a swap to another screen is generated
Manual Mark On Chart* When a manual mark on chart is received
Scheduled* Triggers an event at a specific time
Start-up* Trigger at recorder start up
Data Flushed* Logging/Event data has been successfully flushed to disk
ASCII serial data* When serial data is received through RS232 or RS485
Web Activate Triggered manually from web page

*Not available on the eZtrend V5.
Table 15: Effect (Honeywell V5 recorders only)
Method Description
Mark On Chart Cause a mark on chart
Control logging starts/stops or start logging and

Logging
discard current data in memory
Start Totaliser Start totaliser
Stop Totaliser Stop totaliser
Reset Totaliser Reset totaliser back to min value or 0
Screen Change* Automatically swap to another screen
Set Relay Close relay output(s)
Clear Relay Open relay output(s)
Counter Control* Add to or Reset a counter
Event Trigger another event(s)
Chart control method: Pause, Resume or Tog-

Chart Control*
gle
E-mail E-mail a message to a user
Flush Data* Flush all logging data to Disk or PC card
Reset Max/Mins* Resets visible max/mins

Cause and Effect - X and GR Series
Table 16: Cause - X and GR Series Recorders
Method Description
Into Alarm When alarm state is entered
Out of Alarm When alarm state is exited
Acknowledge Alarm Acknowledge an active alarm, latched or normal
Totaliser Start When totaliser is started
Totaliser Stop When totaliser is stopped or paused
Totaliser Reset When a totaliser is reset
Totaliser Rollover When a totaliser rollover occurs
Digital Inputs On A digital input has been applied
Digital Inputs Off A digital input has been removed
Digital Input State Change When a digital input has changed state On or Off
TC Burn Out When a Thermocouple is in burn out state
Setup a Schedule on a timed Interval, on Specific days or at the
Scheduled
Month End, or just Once
User Counters User Counter #
Max Mins (Reset) Reset max Min values
Power On, Setup Change, Int. Mem. Low, Exp. Mem. Low,
System)
FTP Mem. Low
User Action Mark Chart, Hot Buttons (x4)
Batch Start, Stop an Pause chart controls
TUS Start, Stop a Temperature Uniformity Survey
AMS2750 Timer Set TC Timers or Alert Timers as a warning or when expired
When selecting Totalisers and Alarms etc. ensure they are enabled and configured in the Pens tab.
Table 17: Effect - X and GR Series Recorders
Method Description
Mark On Chart Cause a mark on chart
Logging Start Control logging starts
Logging Stop Control logging stops
Start Totaliser Start totaliser
Stop Totaliser Stop totaliser
Reset Totaliser Reset totaliser back to min value or 0

Table 17: Effect - X and GR Series Recorders
Method Description
Reset totaliser back to min value or 0 and
Reset and Start Totaliser
Starts the Totaliser
Digital Outputs Activate a Digital Output On or Off
Alarm Acknowledge Acknowledges an Alarm, single or pen group
Email Sends an Email to recipients
Change the recorders screen or turn backlight

Screen Change
On/Off. Available in the recorder only
Print Screen Prints current process screen
Count an event occurance. Incl: User, Pulse,

Counters
Events, Digital Inputs, Pulse Outputs, Alarms
Reset all Max Min values. Multiple, All or Pen

Max Mins (Reset)
groups.
Chart Control Pause, Stop, Resume, Clear or Prefill chart
Clear All Messages Clear all messages from the message list
Delayed Event Delay an event by a specific amount of time
20 independent timers can be controlled. Stop,

Script Timers
Start, Reset or Reset and Start.
Start or Stop a sound used to alert the user that

Play Sound
an event effect has occurred
Display Alert used to display a preset or user defined marker.
Batch used to Start, Stop or Pause a batch
Reports generates a report
Update Tabular Readings updates the tabular screen with latest readings

Appendix E - Ethernet & E-mail
Ethernet
Ethernet is a local area network (LAN) technology that transmits information between
computers and other devices, at speeds of 10 to 100 million bits per second (Mbps).
Each Ethernet equipped device operates independently of all other devices on the net-
work.
All devices attached to an Ethernet are connected to a shared signalling system. Ether-
net signals are transmitted serially, one bit at a time, over the shared signal channel
attached to each device.
It is up to the high-level protocol that is sending data over the network to make sure that
the data is correctly received at the destination device.
Devices attached to an Ethernet can send application data to one another using high-
level protocol software, such as TCP/IP protocol suite.
High-level protocols have their own system addresses, such as the 32-bit addresses
used in the current version of IP. The high-level IP-based networking software in a
device is aware of its own 32-bit IP address and can read the 48-bit Ethernet address of
its own network interface, but it doesn’t know the Ethernet addresses of the other
devices on the network.
To discover the Ethernet addresses of other IP-based devices on the network another
high-level protocol is used. For TCP/IP, this is done using a protocol called Address
Resolution Protocol (ARP).
Example:
Device X has an IP address of 195.23.37.1 and sends data over the Ethernet channel to
another IP-based device, Device Y with IP address 195.23.37.2. Device X sends the
packets of information containing an ARP request. The ARP request is asking the
device with the IP address of 195.23.37.2 to identify the address of the Ethernet Inter-
face.
Only Device Y with the IP address of 195.23.37.2 will respond, sending a packet with
the Ethernet address of device Y back to device X. Now device X and Y have each oth-
ers Ethernet addresses to which data can be sent.

E-mail
General operation of the e-mail system
The recorder sends messages for distribution by an e-mail server. The e-mail server is
located by its IP address as set-up in the communications set-up options. When the
recorder sends an e-mail message, it locates the e-mail server and uses SMTP (Simple
Message Transfer Protocol) to send the message to the e-mail server. SMTP allows the
recorder to send messages to an e-mail server without having its own e-mail address;
because of this the e-mail server will not be able to send any reply back to the recorder.
When setting-up the e-mail address list, it is important to include the e-mail administrator
address. The Administrator e-mail address is the e-mail address to where the e-mail
server will respond in the event of any problems with the delivery of e-mail messages.
The Administrator will also appear to be the source of any e-mail messages sent by the
recorder. Most e-mail systems require a ‘Reply To’ address as part of an e-mail mes-
sage, since the recorder does not have its own e-mail address; it uses the e-mail admin-
istrator as the ‘Reply To’ address.
Any e-mail message will consist of a delivery list (recipients), a subject, and an optional
message body. The message body may be omitted for very short messages, or where
the message is to be sent to a paging system.
The e-mail subject may be either one of the existing event markers, or one of the two e-
mail subjects. The e-mail message body may be either one of the existing event mark-
ers, or one of the two e-mail message blocks. Event markers are restricted to 80 charac-
ters each. The two e-mail message blocks are restricted to just over 1000 characters
each. Both the message subject and body may contain embedded marker tags as used
in the event markers.
When the recorder sends an e-mail message that includes a message body, the
recorder name, recorder number and the time/date will be appended to the end of the
message body text. This is to allow easy identification of when the message was send,
and by which recorder.
Any e-mail message is sent as an action within the recorder events system, so anything
that can be configured to act as an event cause, may be configured to send an e-mail
message. Any e-mail message may be sent to up-to 8 of the recipients. If the e-mail
server supports named groups of e-mail addresses, an e-mail message may be sent to
a combination of e-mail addresses and e-mail group.
Mail Server
Ethernet
Recorder
LAN
Local Area Network

Appendix F: Function Codes and
Memory Maps
X & GR Series Modbus Memory Map Supplement:

Refer to document Modbus® Serial Communications User manual, 51-52-25-66Q, April 2007.
Start End See

Address Address Description Appendix
(Hex) (Hex) 51-52-25-66Q
1800 185F Analogue Input Value (48 inputs max.) A.5
1880 18BF Communications Inputs (32 comms values max.)* A.6
2400 24BF Extended Comms Inputs (96 comms values max.)* A.6
18C0 197F Pen Values (96 pens max.) A.7
1B00 1B7F Totalisers (64 totalisers max.) A.9
* Communications Inputs can be set by using Modbus function code 16

NOTE: Some Modbus masters may require an offset of 1 for example instead of entering
1800 enter 1801.
Totalisers
Totaliser values in engineering units, 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading.
Input Text message

This facility allows a text message to be passed to the recorder to be annotated on the chart
and added to the message log. The maximum length of the message is 32 bytes of ASCII
characters, which need not be null-terminated.
It operates by utilising modbus function code 16 (0x10), Preset Multiple registers, and the
unique address 0x0004 in the modbus global register map (Table A-1)
The modbus message format follows that shown in section 3.7 of the document cited. The
Start Address will be 00 04, and the Byte Count of the number of bytes in the following text
message. As 2 modbus registers are used to pass an address to function 16, the Number of
Addresses has to be back calculated from the required Byte Count to give the lowest integer
such that (Number of Addresses) * 2 ≥ = Byte Count. For example if Byte Count = 4, then
Number of Addresses = 2, but if Byte Count = 5, Number of Addresses = 3.

Page numbers refer to document Modbus® Serial Communications User manual, 51-52-
25-66Q, April 2007.As an example, to send the 5-character message Start to a slave
address 02 the complete message would be:
Start Start No No
Slave Function Byte
Addr. Addr. Addr. Addr. Data CRC CRC
Address Code Count
High Low High Lo
02 10 00 04 00 03 05 53 74 61 72 74 CRC CRC
The response follows the normal response for function code 16 given in section 3.7, and
so to the above message the response would be: 02 10 00 04 00 03 CRC CRC. Page
numbers refer to document Modbus® Serial Communications User manual, 51-52-25-
66P, April 2007.
Analogue Input Value

Analogue readings in engineering units. 4byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per
reading.
Communications Input
Values can be sent to the recorder for inclusion in the Maths Block, using command 16 up
to 32 IEEE floats can be sent to the recorder. Using CV1 to CV32 in the Maths Block, these
values can be displayed on the pens.
i.e. P1 = CV1 will set Pen 1 to the engineering value set address 1880 with the function
code 16. Once again these are 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading.
Pen Values
Pen values in engineering units, 4 byte IEEE floats using 2 Modbus registers per reading.
Modbus Function Codes

These are described in document Modbus® Serial Communications User manual, 51-52-
25-66Q, April 2007.
Pages 14 to 25, inclusive. For X Series and GR recorders only use codes 01, 02, 03/
04, 16 and 17.
25-66Q, April 2007.
Supplemental to Function code 16 with standard address 0004 can be used to send.
Supplemental to Function code 17, Report Device ID:
• Page 23 - Slave ID for X Series and GR recorders is always 05.
• Page 24 - Device description

Item Size in bytes Contents
Recorder type+space+software version

The length is extended to exactly 16 bytes by trailing
0x00 characters.
Device Description 16d, 0x10 Recorder type = is a combination of the OEM series
name followed by the OEM device name (truncated to
16 characters)
Software version is of the form nn.XX eg.00.FQ
• Page 25 - Number of data block records, byte 23, always equals 05 for the
Trendview range, data blocks are always in order.
00 = Analogue inputs, 02 = Digital inputs, 03 = Digital outputs, 06 = Pens, 09 =

Totalisers
25-66Q, April 2007.


Appendix G - Modbus Communications and
Modbus Profile Tool
TrendManager Suite and Modbus communications

The X Series and GRrecorders implement the industry standard Modbus protocol to
enable the retrieval of Realtime data into the TrendManager Software Suite.
The Modbus protocol defines a standard for communicating groups of registers (which are
2-byte values) to and from a master and a slave that understand the protocol. Registers
can be used as bitmasks for “Discrete Inputs” or “Coils”, as well as 2-byte integer values or
4-byte floating point numbers. In all, a Modbus memory map can support 4 different sets of
register types, being “Discrete Inputs”, “Coils”, “Input Registers” and “Holding Registers”.
TrendManager Software Suite supports command 04 input registers at 3xxxx and
03 command (read holding registers) at 4xxxx addresses in December 2006 release
and later.
TrendManager Software Suite currently supports getting “Input Registers” as floating
point values, so it will obtain two 2-byte registers in order to get a 4-byte floating point num-
ber. TrendManager Software Suite does not support programming (writing) register val-
ues in a device.
The default is N-8-1 which means no parity, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit. This is currently the
only byte option supported by Comms Server.
In order for TrendManager Software Suite to talk to a Modbus enabled device, it needs
to know something about the Modbus memory map of that device. Without knowledge of
the Modbus memory map of a device, TrendManager Software Suite will not know what
data it can get from the device and where it can get it from. The proprietary protocol Trend-
bus used by Honeywell V5 devices allows a device setup to be transmitted in realtime to
TrendManager Software Suite thus permitting instant setup of realtime data retrieval.
This is not supported by Modbus messaging which means that realtime communications
with Modbus will not happen “out-of-the-box”
This is where the concept of a Modbus device profile comes in, which is aimed at making
the setup of realtime communications with Modbus devices in TrendManager Software
Suite as straight-forward as possible. A Modbus device profile (or, Modbus profile for
short) encapsulates the key information that TrendManager Software Suite needs in
order to obtain data from a Modbus enabled device.
TrendManager Software Suite will generate a Modbus profile automatically whenever
data or a setup is imported into a database in TrendServer from an X Series and GRre-
corder or a Honeywell V5 recorder (although it will not do so when pen data is imported
via FTP). If a more recent setup is imported into a database (either imported directly as a
setup or imported as a part of logged data) then the Modbus profile for the associated
device is automatically updated without any user-intervention required.
When Comms Server is first started up, and if no data or setups have been imported into a
database in TrendServer, then no Modbus profiles will be available for selection when
adding a device.
The only exception to this is if some standard Modbus profiles for Honeywell devices have
been imported into the system.

Once data has been imported into TrendManager Software Suite, Modbus profiles
will be available for selection in Comms Server for setting up realtime data acquisition.
The Modbus profile names are based on the given name of the recorder, it’s ID number
and the type of the recorder (Multitrend or Minitrend).
When a Modbus profile is updated it will not automatically be used by Comms Server if it
is currently connected to the device concerned. It is only if that device is disabled then
re-enabled in Comms Server, or if the device properties window (also known as edit
device dialog) is opened for that device and committed with a press of the OK button,
that Comms Server will begin to use the updated Modbus profile.
In the case of wanting to connect with Comms Server to a device other than an X
Series and GR recorder or an older Honeywell V5 recorder, it may be necessary to
manually create a Modbus profile, which can be done with the Modbus Profile edit tool.
The Modbus Profile Tool

Installation
The Modbus Profile Tool is available with TrendServer Pro. It will install automatically
and can be activated from the same location as TrendServer Pro software.
The Modbus Profile Tool can be opened by going to Start > Programs > Trendview
Recorders Modbus Profile Tool. The Modbus Profile Editor window will open with
empty files ready for a new profile to be created.

Getting started
The Modbus Profile Tool can be used to edit existing Modbus profiles or create new
Modbus profiles. It can also be used to export Modbus profiles from one system so that
they can be imported into another system. It is generally aimed at enabling the setup of
Modbus communications with non-Honeywell devices that support floating point input
registers in their Modbus memory map. It can also be used to adjust any of the standard
Honeywell Modbus Profiles.
The three main courses of action available are:
TrendManager Software
1. Create a new profile - If there is no recorder setup available in
Suite then the Modbus profile will have no content and a new one must be created.
2. Modify an existing profile - If a recorder setup already exists in theTrendManager Soft-

ware Suite it will automatically create a Modbus profile that will be available using this tool. If
this is the case go to “Use an Existing Modbus Profile” on page 331.
3. Import/export an existing profile that can be transferred between systems. See “Transferring
Modbus profiles between systems” on page 332.
Create a new Modbus profile

The key information required in order to setup a new Modbus profile is the Modbus
memory map of the target device, specifically the floating point input registers that it
supports. An example of an existing profile is shown in Figure 18.1, “Existing Profile,” on
page 331.
Modbus Profile Editor window

Enter profile details:
Profile Details
• Profile name: This field will be populated when the profile is saved and the profile is
named.
• Profile description: Enter the description of your device
• Register type: Input registers

Input Registers
In the Profiler references to channels refers to input registers.
• Number of channel groups: Enter the number of groups determined by the division of
your input registers. Groups are required for each register or sets of registers that do not
occur contiguously in the memory map. For example: Group 1 may consist of Channels 1
to 16 using pens 1 to 16, if there is a gap between the pen numbers a second group is
required for channels 1 to 4 using pens 49 to 52.
Be aware that the more groups in the Modbus profile, the less efficient communication
will be when connecting to a device. This is because each Modbus profile group
requires a separate Modbus message to be made.
When the number of groups has been set the groups can be configured by specifying
the number of channels in the group and the register address of the first channel in that
group
• Channel group number: Once the number of groups has been set the groups can
be configured by specifying the number of channels in the group and the regis-
ter address of the first channel in that group. The remaining channel registers
addresses in a group are derived from the address of the first channel in the
group.
If you have two groups the drop down menu will give you the option to view details for
group 1 or 2.
Select each group and configure the Modbus profile for all channels in each group
Group 1 of 2 (depending on how many groups you have)

• First channel register number: This number can be found in the Modbus Mem-
ory Map information found in the instruction manual of your device. All Honeywell
devices state their register number in hex this must be converted into decimal
before entering it into the profile tool.
• Number of channels in group: Enter the number of channels for the device
• Channel Number: Select which channels to view or configure from the drop down
menu
Channel 1 of 16 in Group 1 (depending on what channel number and group has

been selected).
Once a group has been configured with the appropriate number of channels, each
channel in that group can be set up. The name, graphing span, unit of measure-
ment and colour of each channel can be configured separately. When values are
not specified for the channel, default attributes will be used if not by the Modbus
Profile Tool then by TrendServer Pro software when the Comms Server reads
the Modbus profile.

• Channel’s register number: This is the register address number allocated to this chan-
nel.
• Channel name: This displays the channel information made up from the register type,
group number and the channel number within the group. This can be changed as
required.
• Zero: Enter the zero or bottom limit of the pen/channel scale
• Span: Enter the Span or top limit of the pen/channel scale
• Unit: Select the units of measure to be used for the scale
• Colour: This will always display the channel colour as red for new profiles. If an existing
profile is used then the colours from the recorder’s setup will display.
• Scale type: Select a Linear or Logarithmic scale
The profile can be saved and will be automatically be available to use with devices in
Comms Server. Comms Server has a Test Dialog when setting up devices that commu-
nicate over Modbus that can be used to verify the Modbus profile.

Profile Workspace
As the Modbus profile is being created the information is being constructed in the Profile
Workplace window on the left. The window will display the profile in an hierarchal tree.
Click on the + box to expand the profile and display the Modbus register addresses,
Number of channels and channel details for each channel. In the Profiler references to
channels refers to input registers.
Saving a Profile
When the new profile is complete use the Save
icon or go to File and select Save Profile. It is
recommended to name the profile so that it
includes the recorder name, the recorder type
and the ID. eg Station 2 XX ID:21. Identifying
the type of recorder will be useful when creating
similar Modbus profiles in the future. This profile
can be called up modified and saved (Save Pro-
file As) with a new profile name. The new saved
profile will appear in the Comms Server list.

Use an Existing Modbus Profile
To open and use an existing Modbus profile either go to File > Open or select the yellow
folder in the toolbar. Select a profile to match your recorder from the list provided.
The attributes that can be modified are described in “Create a new Modbus profile” on
page 327. When the modified profile is complete it can be overwritten by selecting “Save
Profile” or to save as a new profile select “Save Profile As” from the File menu. The new
saved profile will appear in the Comms Server list.
FIGURE 18.1 Existing Profile

Transferring Modbus profiles between systems
Exporting Modbus Profile(s)
Select Export Profiles(s) from the File drop down list to produce the Export Profiles win-
dow. Select the profile you wish to export from the Available Profiles list and click on the
right pointing arrow in the middle to transfer the profile to the window on the right. Next
you must designate the target location of where you want the profile to be exported to.
Select the button to the right of the Target File window and browse to desired location.
You can enter the same file name as your profile or a new name if you are exporting
several profiles. The .xml file extension will be automatically added to the file name by
the Modbus Profile Tool. Click on the Save button to and to enter the entire file path into
the Target File window. Select the Export button to send the profile(s) to the target file.
Importing Modbus Profile(s)

The chosen profiles can now be imported into another system.
Run the Modbus Profile Tool on the system where the profiles are required. Select File >
Import Profile(s) .... > Profile name. A browser dialog will be displayed for selecting the
target .xml file to import modbus profiles on
One the target .xml file for import has been specified the Modbus Profile Tool will Import
the profiles. If any modbus profiles found in the .xml file have the same name as an
existing profile on the system, the user is asked if they wish to overwrite the existing pro-
file or skip. There are Overwrite All and Skip All options.
When the import is complete the Modbus Profile Tool provides a summary list of the pro-
files that were imported into the system. These profiles will immediately be available for
use the Comms Server when adding or editing a device for Realtime comms.

Comms Server and Modbus profile(s)
When Comms Server is first started up, and if no data or setups have been imported into
a database in TrendServer, then no Modbus profiles will be available for selection
when adding a device. The only exception to this is if some standard Modbus profiles for
Honeywell devices have been imported into the system.
Once data has been imported into TrendManager Software Suite, Modbus profiles
will be available for selection in Comms Server for setting up realtime data acquisition.
and the type of the recorder (eZtrend, Multitrend and Minitrend). See Figure 18.2 .
FIGURE 18.2 Comms Server - Select a profile

Print Profile
The Print Profile function can be found in the File drop down menu. There are two
options:
• Current View - This will print exactly what you can see on the Profile Workspace window
at the time you select the Current View option.
• Full View - This will print the full contents of the Profile window showing each Group,
Channel etc. completely expanded through all levels
Figure 18.3 shows the two print options available, Current View on the left and Full View
on the right
FIGURE 18.3 Print Profile options - Current and Full View

Modbus profile realtime data update
TrendServer software will generate a modbus profile when data is imported from USB
key, SD card or Compact Flash card or when it is manually imported via FTP. This
applies to FTP of setup and FTP of pen data. The automatic, or scheduled, FTP import
of data from a recorder does not result in an updated modbus profile being generated.
Once a modbus profile has been generated it is immediately available to the Comms
Server but will not be automatically used by the Comms Server.
Any new connections created in the Comms Server will use the most recent modbus
profile that has been generated when importing data on that PC.
For existing device connections, go to the relevant device and press right mouse button
for the context menu. Select Edit Device and then press OK on the resulting dialog. The
updated modbus profile will now be in use and this should be evident if you graph the
data a couple of minutes later (give enough time for some data to be logged to the data-
base using the updated modbus profile).
So in summary, when updating an X-Series and GR recorder configuration, import the
setup or pen data that use the new setup into TMS. Do this either via USB/SD card/
Compact Flash or a manual FTP operation, then go to Comms Server and bring up the
"Edit Device" dialog (as described above) and press OK.
and the type of the recorder (eZtrend, Multitrend and Minitrend). See Figure 18.2 .


Appendix H - IQOQ Protocol Document
IQOQ Protocol Document

IQOQ stands for Installation Qualification & Operation Qualification. This is a custom built
report based on the configuration of a recorder. The configuration can be validated as a
process of confirming that a piece of equipment or process meets the stated requirements
to produce a regulated product.
The IQOQ protocol product is for the eZtrend, Minitrend and Multitrend recorders. The
manufacturer is obligated to execute a “Validation Protocol” for every piece of equipment
that is associated with a “critical process”. The IQOQ feature aids in doing this and comes
with the TrendServer Pro software when ordering the IQ/OQ part number. (50032291-501).
When ordering your IQOQ Protocol Tool two codes will be supplied; one for the Trend-
Server Pro software and one to register IQOQ during the setup.
1. The CD based application generates customized IQOQ documentation for the specific
recorder model and its associated options. The IQOQ report is documented evidence
that the process will produce a consistent product that meets specification. The IQOQ
report that is generated is Honeywell’s documentation package that provides verifica-
tion that all aspects of the recorder installation adhere to Honeywell’sTrendServer
Pro interface. This will produce a list of recorders currently residing in a particular database.
Right click your mouse on the recorder you wish to run the IQOQ report on and select the Print but-
ton from the pop up toolbar

.
FIGURE 19.1 Select recorder and setup to generate an IQOQ report
2. Select the desired setup from the Select Setup box. The recorder may have more than
one set up saved so be sure to select the correct one.
3. For creating an IQOQ report first you must register your details. Registration is
required for each version of TrendServer Pro software.

4. Click on the Register IQOQ button in the Select Print Option box to open the Register
IQOQ Documentation Tool. See Figure 19.2 .
If you simply want to print the setup, without IQOQ, then select Print Setup and the
Print Setup box will appear
FIGURE 19.2 Register IQOQ
5. In the Register IQOQ Documentation Tools enter information to register your IQOQ
document. Registration is only required once and this process will not be necessary for
creating further IQOQ reports.
• In the Organisation box enter the company name as stated on the label.
• In the Code box enter the code that is supplied with the CD. You will receive two codes
one for the TrendServer Pro installation and a second code that enables the genera-
tion of the IQ/OQ protocol, enter this code here. Then click on the Register IQOQ button.
6. Once registration is successful the Register IQOQ button, in the Select Print Setup box
will change to the Create IQOQ button, select this to enter the document details.

7. When the Create IQOQ button is selected the Create IQOQ dialogue will appear. This
is where the information about this report is entered.
FIGURE 19.3 Create IQOQ dialogue box
• Document Name: Enter the name the PDF document will be saved as. If not changed
this will default to the name of the recorder in the recorder list and the serial number.
• Document ID: Enter ID information that will appear in the header of the PDF document
for your own reference.
• No of Computers for TMS installation (1-10): Number of units where TMS is going to
install. This value must be greater than or equal to 1. This value must be an integer
value. The report will create a table of inventory of hardware components for each com-
puter where the TMS software is going to be used.
• Three Line Footer: Three lines of footer information are set as default. Un-Tick this
option if only two line are required. The third line footer gives the option to verify with a
signature and date.
• Path: This is the file path where the generated PDF document will be located. A folder is
automatically created in this location called IQOQ. The default location is My Documents.
• Company Name: Enter your company name for which the IQOQ is going to apply.
• Company Department: Enter details of the department for which the IQOQ is going to
apply.
• Company Location: Enter the Company Location where the IQOQ is going to apply

8. When all the information is entered click on “Create IQOQ PDF Report” and the gener-
ation of the document will begin. Once the PDF creation starts, a box will appear say-
ing “Generating IQOQ Report” and progress bar will display the status.
9. The progress bar can be closed during the creation if necessary and the report will not
be generated. This may be required if details in the Create IQOQ box need to be
changed before the report in run.
10. If the PDF name already exists in the location a warning message will appear. If a file
of the same name is already open you will be prompted to close the file first, before
clicking, to ensure that the file is replaced with the new PDF being generated.
11. When the IQOQ PDF report is complete it will be saved to the file path specified in the
Create IQOQ dialogue.
12. On completion of the report creation, a Yes/No box can be selected to launch the
IQOQ PDF report immediately.
The process is complete and any open boxes can now be closed.

.
FIGURE 19.4 Sample page from an IQOQ document
Header information: Document description, recorder information

and serial number all appear by default.
Header information: Document ID as entered in Print IQOQ Setup dialog
The IQOQ document

shows how the
recorder is currently
set up when this
report was generated.
Tick marks indicate
that the parameter is
set or enabled no tick
indicates it is not
enabled.
Values show the cur-
rent configuration
value.
Footer information: Footer information:3rd line for verification

2 lines by default is optional in Print IQOQ Setup dialog

Index
A B
Access OPC DA/HDA Server ..........................40 Backlight

Add a folder ............................................................172 Event Effect ............................................................ 111
Add a Remote Server .........................................207 Barcodes for Batch .............................................157
Add new Database ..............................................170 Batch
Add New Device ...................................................137 Event Causes ..........................................................106
Event Effect ............................................................ 112
Add New Device, X Series .................................59 Batch button .............................................................56
Add New Graph ....................................................237 Batch Event icons ................................................247
Alarm Damping ..............................................92, 147 Batch Markers on the Recorder ...................157
Alarm Rate ................................................................86 Batch Mode ...................................................... 45, 185
Alarm Relay Card, X Series .............................75 Barcodes for Batch ................................................157
Alarm/Digital IO Card Positions, X Series 60 Event Markers ........................................................156
Alarm/Digital IO, X Series ...............................75 Markers on the Recorder ......................................157
Alarms Setup ..........................................................146 Batch Mode, X Series ..........................................65
Alarms, X Series .....................................................91 Batch Properties, General, X Series ............65
AMS2750 Furnace (Process and TUS) ......81 Batch Properties, Group, X Series ............... 67
AMS2750 Furnace Stability Detection (TUS Batch set up ............................................................178
mode) ...........................................................82 Batch Settings, X Series ...................................127
AMS2750 Mode ......................................................62 Batch Viewer ..........................................................183
AMS2750 Setpoint (TUS mode) .....................82 Batch, Graphing ..................................................250
AMS2750 Timer Boolean Expressions, Maths .........................294
Event Causes ...........................................................106 Brightness Control .............................................. 114
AMS2750 TUS Browse a Recorder .............................................168
Event Causes ...........................................................106 Button Bar .................................................................55
AMS2750 TUS report ........................................122
Analogue In ............................................................148
Analogue In, X Series ..........................................72
Linearisation .............................................................78
Analogue Out, X Series ......................................75 C
Analogue Output Setup or Re-tranmsit ....150
Analogue Scales ...................................................148 Cause and Effect, X Series .............................317
Engineering Scale ..................................................148 Change Chart Speed
Input Scale ...............................................................148
Event Effects .......................................................... 113
Pen Scales ................................................................149
Analogue Scales, X Series .................................85 Chart Control
Event Effect ............................................................ 112
Appendix G - Modbus Communications and Chart Controls
Modbus Profile Tool ..........................325 Event ........................................................................233
Appendix H - IQOQ Protocol Document 339 Realtime ..................................................................233
Arranging Scales .................................................245 Chart Speed ............................................................ 116
Audit Manager ......................................................211 Clear All Messages
Auto Arrange scales ...........................................245 Event Effect ............................................................ 112
Auto DNS, TCP/IP ..............................................100 Commenting in Scripts .....................................309

Comms D
Internet Security Settings ..................................... 216
OPC Interface ........................................................ 214
Web Browser .......................................................... 215 Damping Alarms ................................................... 92
Comms Logging Damping, Alarms ................................................ 147
Realtime .................................................................. 181
Damping, Signal .................................................. 148
Comms Server ....................................................... 217
Add a Database ...................................................... 224 Data Locator ......................................................... 239
Add a Database Server ......................................... 224 Data, Importing ................................................... 173
Add a Device .......................................................... 225 Database Management Tool ............................ 45
Add a new Device ................................................. 221 Database Servers ................................................ 222
Add Pens for Logging .......................................... 231 Database Size Management .......................... 223
Administration ....................................................... 221
Client Connections ................................................ 232 Databases ............................................................... 169
Comms Ports .......................................................... 222 Add a Database ...................................................... 169
Configure Database Logging .............................. 221 Change the Current Database .............................. 169
Connect to a Database .......................................... 224 Delayed Event
Connect to a Database Server ............................. 221 Event Effect ............................................................ 112
Database .................................................................. 220 Delete a Graph ..................................................... 238
Database Logging .................................................. 233 Delete a Server ..................................................... 207
Database Servers ................................................... 222 Diagnostics
Delete a Database .................................................. 224 Comms Server ....................................................... 221
Delete a Device ...................................................... 229
Diagnostics ............................................................. 221 Digital I/O Port Setup ...................................... 150
Edit a Device .......................................................... 228 Fail Safe .................................................................. 150
Logging Configuration ......................................... 230 Digital IO Card, X Series ................................. 75
Network Settings ................................................... 221 Disk Life Calculator .......................................... 141
Setup ........................................................................ 224 Display Alert
Status Screen .......................................................... 232 Event Effect ............................................................ 112
Summary of Logging Changes ........................... 231 DNS/WINS/MDNS Comms ............................ 100
Comms Server - Start up ........................... 46, 217 Documentation ....................................................... 45
Comms Server Database ................................. 235
Comms Server Overview ................................. 217
Comms Server Status Screen ......................... 232
Communications .................................................. 141 E
Email Setup .............................................................. 97
Ethernet ................................................................... 142
Modbus Master ........................................................ 95
Network Admin ..................................................... 101 Email
Peer to Peer ............................................................. 102 Alarms ....................................................................... 92
Ports ......................................................................... 101 Event Effects ...........................................................111
RS232 ...................................................................... 141 Email Setup .............................................................. 97
RS485 ...................................................................... 141 Email Setup, Events ........................................... 159
Communications, X Series ............................... 93 Embedded Process Values .............................. 108
FTP .......................................................................... 101 Event Effect ............................................................ 108
Modbus Comms ....................................................... 94 Engineering Scale ............................................... 148
SNTP ......................................................................... 98 Enter Replay Screen
TCP/IP ....................................................................... 99 Event Effects .......................................................... 113
Web ............................................................................ 97
Concurrent Batch Mode, X Series ................ 65 Error Alert, X Series ............................................ 70
Copy a Graph ....................................................... 238 Ethernet Port ......................................................... 142
IP Address .............................................................. 142
Counters .................................................................. 113 Mail Server ............................................................. 142
Event Effect .............................................................111 Event Causes
Credit Options, X Series .................................... 68 AMS2750 Timer .................................................... 106
AMS2750 TUS ...................................................... 106
Batch ........................................................................ 106
Hot Button .............................................................. 106
System ..................................................................... 106
User Action ............................................................ 106

Event Causes, X Series ..................................... 105 G
Event Chart Controls ........................................ 233
Event Counter Setup .................................. 113, 157
Counter as an Effect .............................................. 158 General Recorder Setup .................................. 141
Counters as a Cause .............................................. 157 General Recorder Setup, X Series ................ 64
Event E-mail ........................................................... 159 Glossary ................................................................... 283
Viewing Counters .................................................. 159
Golden Batch ........................................................ 192
Event Effects
Change Chart Speed .............................................. 113 Graph a Recorder ............................................... 238
Enter Replay Screen .............................................. 113 Graph Button .......................................................... 55
Exit Replay Screen ................................................ 113 Graph Data Viewer ............................................ 257
Event Effects, X Series ...................................... 108 Graph Pen Data Source Viewer .................. 257
Event Marker Setup ........................................... 153 Graph Set Time Span ........................................ 246
Event Viewer .......................................................... 183 Graph Settings ...................................................... 129
Events Filter .......................................................... 250 Graph with Events .............................................. 238
Events System ........................................................ 150 Graphing a Batch ............................................... 250
Event Marker Setup .............................................. 153 Graphing a Batch, Retrospectively ............ 253
Marker tables .......................................................... 155 Graphing Events .................................................. 247
Setting Up Events .................................................. 151
Groups, X Series .................................................... 65
Events, Graphing ................................................ 247
Events, User added text ................................... 250
Events, X Series ................................................... 103
Event Causes .......................................................... 105
Event Effects .......................................................... 108 H
Scheduled Events .................................................. 106
User Counters ......................................................... 108
Exit Replay Screen Hardware Change .............................................. 121
Event Effects .......................................................... 113 Hardware Setup ................................................... 161
Export Settings ..................................................... 203 Hardware Setup, X Series ................................. 60
Exporting Data to a Spreadsheet ................ 202 Help Button .............................................................. 56
Extra Pens .............................................................. 144 Historian ................................................................... 46
Extra Pens, X Series ............................................ 61 Hot Button
Event Cause ............................................................ 106
User Action ............................................................. 106
F
I
Fail Safe ................................................................... 150
Fail Safe, X Series ................................................ 77
Field IO Setup, X Series .................................... 72 Import Button .......................................................... 56
Folders ..................................................................... 172 Import Data from a Recorder ....................... 168
Add a Folder ........................................................... 172 Importing
Copy a Folder ......................................................... 172 Data .......................................................................... 173
Delete a Folder ....................................................... 172 Setup ........................................................................ 173
Graph Folders ......................................................... 172 Importing and Exporting Setups ................. 120
Move a Graph between Folders .......................... 172 Importing via FTP
Rename a Folder .................................................... 172 Importing Secure Comms I/Face ........................ 175
From Network Setup .......................................... 177 Installation ................................................................. 7
FTP Comms, X Series ....................................... 101 Installation of TrendManager Suite ............... 7
Full Maths .............................................................. 304 Installation or Migration of TrendView Historian
Full Maths & Script Processing .................. 295 36
Function Codes and Memory Maps .......... 321 Internet Security Settings ................................ 216
Fuzzy Logging ........................................................ 86 IP Address ......................................................... 99, 142
Fuzzy Logging Setup ......................................... 144 IP Address Troubleshooting .......................... 215
Fuzzy Logging, Appendix C ........................... 311 IQOQ Protocol Document ............................. 339

L N
Linearisation, X Series ....................................... 78 Network Admin ..................................................... 101

Logging .................................................................... 144 Network Admin Comms ................................... 101
Logging Method ..................................................... 86 Network Settings
Logging Rate ......................................................... 144 Comms Server ........................................................ 221
Logging Rate, .......................................................... 86
Logging Styles ....................................................... 144
Logging Type, X Series ....................................... 86
Logging, X Series .................................................. 86 O
OPC Client Access to Trendview OPC Historian

M Server ........................................................ 263
OPC Clients ........................................................... 213
OPC Interface ....................................................... 214
Mail Server ............................................................. 142 OPC Server ............................................................ 213
Mark on Chart, X Series Output Card ........................................................... 150
Event Effect ............................................................ 108 Output Card, X Series ......................................... 75
Marker tables ........................................................ 155
Maths and Fail Safe ........................................... 294
Maths Error Messages ..................................... 309
Maths Expressions .............................................. 287 P
Boolean Expressions ............................................. 294
Full Maths ............................................................... 304
Full Maths & Script Processing .......................... 295 Passwords ............................................................... 208
Maths Variable and Function Tables .................. 296 Change Password ................................................... 208
Mats and Fail Safe ................................................. 294 Password Access Table ......................................... 210
Operator Precedence ............................................. 292 Password Control ................................................... 208
Script Function Application Examples .............. 305 Password User Manager ....................................... 208
Maths Expressions, X Series .......................... 295 PCMCIA Interface Card .................................. 138
Maths for Pens ...................................................... 144 Peer Services, X Series ..................................... 127
Maths for Pens, X Series ................................... 87 Peer to Peer ........................................................... 102
Maths Variable and Function Tables ........ 296 Peer to Peer Comms .......................................... 102
Max Mins Reset Pen Report Information
Event Effect ............................................................ 112 Pen Report Information, ....................................... 124
Media Life Calculations, X Series ................ 64 Pen Scales ....................................................... 149, 244
Memory maps and Function Codes ........... 321 Arranging Scales .................................................... 245
Migration of TrendManager Suite ................ 21 Pen Setup
Modbus ....................................................................... 94 Alarms ..................................................................... 146
Master ........................................................................ 95 Fuzzy Logging ................................................. 86, 144
Modbus Communications ............................... 325 Logging ........................................................... 142, 144
Modbus Function Codes, X Series ............. 322 Maths for Pens ....................................................... 144
Scales ............................................................... 142, 143
Modbus Master Comms, X Series ................. 94 Totals ........................................................................ 146
Modbus Memory Map ....................................... 321 Pen Setup, X Series .............................................. 84
Modbus Profile Tool ............................ 46, 325, 326 Alarms Setup ............................................................ 91
Modbus RS485 ........................................................ 96 Logging ..................................................................... 86
Modbus Slave, X Series ...................................... 96 Maths for Pens ......................................................... 87
RAV ............................................................................ 93
Scales ......................................................................... 85
Totals .......................................................................... 89
Pen Summary ........................................................ 141
Pens Summary, X Series .................................... 64

Play Sound Recording .................................................................116
Event Effect .............................................................112 Rename a Graph ..................................................238
Point Markers ........................................................243 Report Generation Tool ......................................46
Port Comms ............................................................101 Reports ......................................................................122
Port, Comms ..........................................................142 Event Effect .............................................................112
Post installation checks for using TrendServer Resizing Scales ......................................................245
Pro ................................................................15 Retrospectively Graphing a Batch ..............253
Post-Trigger Time Set ........................................118 RS232 .........................................................................141
Preset Markers ......................................................113 RS485 .........................................................................141
Pre-Trigger Run a Report ..........................................................124
Acquiring .................................................................118
Alarm Rate ................................................................87
Configuration ..........................................................118
Event processing ....................................................118
Export .......................................................................119 S
Graphed Data ..........................................................242
Importing .................................................................119
Logging Type ............................................................87 Save a Graph .........................................................238
Overlapped Pens .....................................................242 Save As a Graph ...................................................238
Post-Trigger Time ..................................................118 Scales .........................................................................143
Pre-Trigger Data .....................................................242
Pre-Trigger Time Set .............................................118 Scales, X Series .......................................................85
Restart ......................................................................119 Schedule Setup ......................................................178
Set Time ...................................................................118 Scheduled .................................................................116
Print Screen Scheduled Events, X Series .............................106
Event Effect .............................................................111 Scheduler set up ...................................................178
Printer Comms, X Series ....................................68 Screen Change
Printing Graphs ...................................................259 Event Effect .............................................................111
Printing Setups ..............................................126, 161 Screen Saver ...........................................................114
Pulse In, X Series ...................................................75 Dim Saver ................................................................115
Screen Setup ...........................................................114
Screens ......................................................................114
Script Function Application Examples .....305
R Script Timers
Event Effect .............................................................112
Scripts using commenting ...............................309
RAV, X Series ...........................................................93 Searching in Help ..................................................58
Realtime Chart Controls ..................................233 Security Configuration Utility .........................38
Realtime Comms Logging ...............................181 Send Recorder Events ........................................221
Realtime Communications ........................55, 180 Chart Controls ........................................................233
Comms Server ........................................................180 Server
Data Buffer ..............................................................181 Add a Remote Server ............................................207
Pen Settings .............................................................181 Change the Current Server ...................................207
Realtime Graphing Server Button ...................................................56, 207
Graphing Realtime Data .......................................254 Server Name, Email .............................................98
Recorder Button .....................................................55 Server Name, SNTP ..............................................98
Recorder Clash List ............................................168 Setup
Recorder Configuration - X Series ...............59 Chart Speed .............................................................116
Recorder Event Viewer .....................................183 Counters ...................................................................113
Recorder Setup ......................................................141 Email ..........................................................................97
Hardware .................................................................121
Recorder Setup, X Series ...................................63 Ports ..........................................................................101
Recorder types ...........................................................3 Printing ....................................................................126
Recorders .................................................................167 Recording ................................................................116
Add a Recorder .......................................................167 Reports .....................................................................122
Copy a Recorder .....................................................168 Run a Report ...........................................................124
Delete a Recorder ...................................................167 Screen .......................................................................114
Edit a Recorder .......................................................168 Storage Alarm .........................................................117
Transfer Setup .........................................................120

Setup Transfer ............................................... 120, 161 UVW
Setup Window, X Series ...................................... 63
Setup, Importing .................................................. 173
Slave ID ..................................................................... 96 Web Browser .......................................................... 215
SNTP Comms, X Series ...................................... 98 Web, X Series ........................................................... 97
Software Access Table ...................................... 171 X Series
Software License .................................................... ix Cause and Effect .................................................... 317
Modbus Function Code ........................................ 322
Software Options ..................................................... 3 Modbus Slave .......................................................... 96
Square Root Extraction .................................... 148 Setup, Event Causes .............................................. 105
Start Up ...................................................................... 46 X Series Recorders ............................................... 59
Start up, Comms Server ..................................... 46 Add New Device ..................................................... 59
Storage Alarm ....................................................... 117 Alarm/Digital IO Card Positions .......................... 60
System Batch Properties, General ...................................... 65
Event Causes .......................................................... 106 Batch Properties, Group ......................................... 67
Batch Settings ........................................................ 127
System Button ......................................................... 56 Concurrent Batch Mode ......................................... 65
System Requirements ........................................... 47 Extra Pens ................................................................. 61
System Status Hardware Setup ....................................................... 60
E-Mail ..................................................................... 206 Peer Services .......................................................... 127
Password ................................................................. 206 Recommended Card Positions .............................. 60
Realtime .................................................................. 206 Setup .......................................................................... 63
System Status Button ......................................... 206 Alarm/Digital IO ............................................ 75
Alarms Setup .................................................. 91
Analogue In .................................................... 72
Analogue Out ................................................. 75
Batch Mode .................................................... 65
T Communications ............................................. 93
Credit Options ................................................ 68
Error Alert ...................................................... 70
TCP/IP Comms .................................................... 100 Event Effects ................................................. 108
TCP/IP Comms, X Series .................................. 99 Events ........................................................... 103
Time adjustment pen .......................................... 241 Field IO .......................................................... 72
To Install/Migrate TrendViewer Historian 36 FTP ............................................................... 101
To Migrate TrendManager Suite ................... 21 Groups ............................................................ 65
Totals ......................................................................... 146 Linearisation .................................................. 78
Totals, X Series ....................................................... 89 Logging .......................................................... 86
Traces on Graphs ................................................ 238 Maths for Pens ............................................... 87
Transfer Setup ............................................... 120, 161 Pens ................................................................ 84
Transient Filter .................................................... 148 Pens Summary ................................................ 64
Printer ............................................................ 68
Trash Can Button .................................................. 56
Pulse In ........................................................... 75
TrendManager Pro and TrendServer Pro RAV ................................................................ 93
Installation/Migration .................. 10, 22 Scales .............................................................. 85
TrendManager Suite .............................................. 8 SNTP .............................................................. 98
TrendManager Suite User Groups ......... 16, 30 TCP/IP ............................................................ 99
Trendview Historian ............................................ 46 Totals .............................................................. 89
Trendview Historian Installation ................ 262 Web ................................................................. 97
Trendview Historian Server Client Software 261 Setup Window
Trendview Historian Support Information 261 General ........................................................... 64
TrendViewer Installation/Migration ...... 10, 22 X-axis Zooming .................................................... 243
Troubleshooting for TrendManager Suite
Application ............................................... 33
Update Tabular Readings
Event Effect ............................................................ 113 XYZ
User Action
Event Causes .......................................................... 106
Hot Button .............................................................. 106 Y-axis Zooming ..................................................... 243
User Counters, X Series .................................. 108 Zooming ................................................................... 243

Sales and Service
For application assistance, current specifications, pricing, or name of the nearest Authorized Distributor, contact one of the offices below.
ASIA PACIFIC EMEA AMERICA’s

(TAC) Honeywell Process Solutions, Honeywell Process Solutions,
hfs-tac-support@honey- Phone: + 80012026455 or Phone: (TAC) 1-800-423-9883
well.com +44 (0)1344 656000 Or 215/641-3610
(Sales) 1-800-343-0228
Email: (Sales) Email: (Sales)

Australia
sc-cp-apps-salespa62@honey- [email protected]
Honeywell Limited
well.com or
Phone: +(61) 7-3846 1255
or (TAC)
FAX: +(61) 7-3840 6481
(TAC) hfs-tac-support@honey-
Toll Free 1300-36-39-36
hfs-tac-support@honeywell.com
Toll Free Fax:
1300-36-04-70 well.com
China – PRC - Shanghai

Honeywell China Inc.
Phone: (86-21) 5257-4568
Fax: (86-21) 6237-2826
Singapore
Honeywell Pte Ltd.
Phone: +(65) 6580 3278
Fax: +(65) 6445-3033
South Korea
Honeywell Korea Co Ltd
Phone: +(822) 799 6114
Fax: +(822) 792 9015
Specifications are subject to change without notice.
For more information

To learn more about Paperless Recorders,
isit www.honeywellprocess.com
Or contact your Honeywell Account Manager
Process Solutions
Honeywell
1250 W Sam Houston Pkwy S
Houston, TX 77042
Honeywell Control Systems Ltd

Honeywell House, Skimped Hill Lane
Bracknell, England, RG12 1EB
Shanghai City Centre, 100 Jungi Road 43-TV-25-11

Shanghai, China 20061 May 2018
 2018 Honeywell International Inc.
www.honeywellprocess.com

43 TV 25 11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

43 TV 25 11

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Description:

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

43 TV 25 11

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

TrendManager Suite Software for

V5, X Series and GR Series Recorders

PC Application Software Configuration,

Table of Contents iii

Chapter 1: Welcome to the

43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK iii

Chapter 6: Recorder Configuration from

iv 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

Chapter 7: TrendManager Suite 167

43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK v

Chapter 8: Comms Server 217

Chapter 9: Graphing in the

vi 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

Chapter 10: TrendView Historian Server Client Software 261

Chapter 11: Glossary 283

Appendix A - Maths Expressions for

43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK vii

Appendix C- Fuzzy Logging 311

Appendix D - Events 315

Appendix E - Ethernet & E-mail 319

Appendix F: Function Codes and Memory Maps 321

Appendix G - Modbus Communications and Modbus Profile Tool 325

Appendix H - IQOQ Protocol Document 339

viii 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

HONEYWELL END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK ix

x 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK xi

9. LIMITED WARRANTY; WARRANTY DISCLAIMER.

xii 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK xiii

xiv 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK xv

xvi 43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK

Features TrendViewer TrendManager TrendServer

Full Configuration of TrendView recorders  

Import data from removable media   

Operates in Windows 10, Windows 8 (32 and 64 bit-Profes-

Password protection - Full user traceability 

Archive data on integral secure database  

Concurrent Batch Mode  

Export using CSV format files  

Enable Fuzzy Logging  

Events system including user counters and reports  

Export using OPC links 

Communicate with recorders using RS485 interface * 

Communicate with recorders using Ethernet TCP/IP 

Distribute all recorder data over LAN plant-wide 

FTP or secure Communication Interface over Ethernet 

Web browse a recorder 

Send setup to recorder via Ethernet 

Audit trail manager 

Relating data retrieval used for graphing & logging 

Replay of historical and Realtime data using a split screen format. 

43-TV-25-11 GLO Issue 32 May 2018 UK 1

Enable Modbus and Modbus X via Ethernet or RS485* 

Comms Server manages the communication status of the recorder 

Remote access to other servers via Ethernet 